BC-5380 Service Manual.pdf

BC-5380 Auto Hematology Analyzer

Service Manual

I

Copyright

© 2008 Shenzhen Mindray Bio-medical Electronics Co., Ltd. All rights Reserved.

For this Service Manual, the issued Date is 2008-12 (Version: 1.0).

Intellectual Property Statement

SHENZHEN MINDRAY BIO-MEDICAL ELECTRONICS CO., LTD. (hereinafter called Mindray)

owns the intellectual property rights to this Mindray product and this manual. This manual may

refer to information protected by copyrights or patents and does not convey any license under

the patent rights of Mindray, nor the rights of others. Mindray does not assume any liability

arising out of any infringements of patents or other rights of third parties.

Mindray intends to maintain the contents of this manual as confidential information. Disclosure

of the information in this manual in any manner whatsoever without the written permission of

Mindray is strictly forbidden.

Release, amendment, reproduction, distribution, rent, adaption and translation of this manual

in any manner whatsoever without the written permission of Mindray is strictly forbidden.

, are the registered trademarks or trademarks owned by Mindray in China and

other countries. All other trademarks that appear in this manual are used only for editorial

purposes without the intention of improperly using them. They are the property of their

respective owners.

Responsibility on the Manufacturer Party

Contents of this manual are subject to changes without prior notice.

All information contained in this manual is believed to be correct. Mindray shall not be liable for

errors contained herein nor for incidental or consequential damages in connection with the

furnishing, performance, or use of this manual.

Mindray is responsible for safety, reliability and performance of this product only in the

condition that:

all installation operations, expansions, changes, modifications and repairs of this product

are conducted by Mindray authorized personnel;

II

the electrical installation of the relevant room complies with the applicable national and

local requirements;

the product is used in accordance with the instructions for use.

This equipment must be operated by skilled/trained medical professionals.

It is important for the hospital or organization that employs this equipment to carry out a reasonable service/maintenance plan. Neglect of this may result in machine breakdown or injury of human health.

Be sure to operate the analyzer under the situation specified in this manual; otherwise, the analyzer will not work normally and the analysis results will be unreliable, which would damage the analyzer components and cause personal injury.

III

Warranty

THIS WARRANTY IS EXCLUSIVE AND IS IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER WARRANTIES,

EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR

FITNESS FOR ANY PARTICULAR PURPOSE.

Exemptions

Mindray's obligation or liability under this warranty does not include any transportation or other

charges or liability for direct, indirect or consequential damages or delay resulting from the

improper use or application of the product or the use of parts or accessories not approved by

Mindray or repairs by people other than Mindray authorized personnel.

This warranty shall not extend to:

any Mindray product which has been subjected to misuse, negligence or accident;

any Mindray product from which Mindray's original serial number tag or product

identification markings have been altered or removed;

any product of any other manufacturer.

Return Policy

Return Procedure

In the event that it becomes necessary to return this product or part of this product to Mindray,

the following procedure should be followed:

1. Obtain return authorization: Contact the Mindray Service Department and obtain a

Customer Service Authorization (Mindray) number. The Mindray number must appear on

the outside of the shipping container. Returned shipments will not be accepted if the

Mindray number is not clearly visible. Please provide the model number, serial number,

and a brief description of the reason for return;

2. Freight policy: The customer is responsible for freight charges when this product is

shipped to Mindray for service (this includes customs charges);

3. Return address: Please send the part(s) or equipment to the address offered by Customer

Service department.

IV

Company Contact

Manufacturer: Shenzhen Mindray Bio-Medical Electronics Co., Ltd.

Address: Mindray Building, Keji 12th Road South, Hi-tech Industrial Park,

Nanshan,ShenZhen 518057, P.R.China,

Phone: +86 755 26582479 26582888

Fax: +86 755 26582934 26582500

1

Table of Contents

1 Using This Manual............................................................................................... 1-1 1.1 Introduction............................................................................................................ 1-1

1.2 Who Should Read This Manual............................................................................. 1-2

1.3 How to Find Information ........................................................................................ 1-3

1.4 Conventions Used in This Manual......................................................................... 1-4

1.5 Symbols ................................................................................................................. 1-5

2 System Structure................................................................................................. 2-1 2.1 Introduction............................................................................................................ 2-1

2.2 Fluidic System ....................................................................................................... 2-2

2.3 Hardware System.................................................................................................. 2-3

2.4 Main Structure ....................................................................................................... 2-4

2.5 Software structure ............................................................................................... 2-11 2.5.1 Menu structure ....................................................................................... 2-11 2.5.2 Passwords.............................................................................................. 2-31

3 Instrument Installation and Software Upgrade................................................. 3-1 3.1 Preparations .......................................................................................................... 3-1

3.1.1 Purpose .................................................................................................... 3-1 3.1.2 Tools ......................................................................................................... 3-1 3.1.3 Accessories .............................................................................................. 3-1

3.2 Installation Requirements ...................................................................................... 3-2 3.2.1 Space Requirements ................................................................................ 3-2 3.2.2 Power Requirements................................................................................ 3-2 3.2.3 Environment Requirements...................................................................... 3-2 3.2.4 PC Configuration Requirements .............................................................. 3-3

3.3 Package Checking and Unpacking ....................................................................... 3-7 3.3.1 Checks before unpacking......................................................................... 3-7 3.3.2 Unpacking the main unit........................................................................... 3-7 3.3.3 Checking packing list................................................................................ 3-9

3.4 Removal and Installation ..................................................................................... 3-10

3.5 Connections......................................................................................................... 3-23

3.6 Start-up ................................................................................................................ 3-27 3.6.1 Inspection before Startup ....................................................................... 3-27

3.7 Setup and Adjustment ......................................................................................... 3-35

3.8 Testing Other Functions....................................................................................... 3-41

3.9 Confirming Gain................................................................................................... 3-42

3.10 Calibration and Performance Test ....................................................................... 3-47

3.11 Software upgrade ................................................................................................ 3-53

4 Fluidic System ..................................................................................................... 4-1 4.1 Introduction of Fluidic Parts ................................................................................... 4-1

4.1.1 Piercing needle......................................................................................... 4-1 4.1.2 Probe Wipe............................................................................................... 4-1

Table of Contents

2

4.1.3 Pumps ...................................................................................................... 4-1 4.1.4 Syringes ................................................................................................... 4-1 4.1.5 Valves....................................................................................................... 4-1 4.1.6 Baths ........................................................................................................ 4-1 4.1.7 Volumetric tube......................................................................................... 4-2 4.1.8 Filters........................................................................................................ 4-2

4.2 Fluidic System ....................................................................................................... 4-3 4.2.1 Reagent volume required......................................................................... 4-3 4.2.2 Fluidic System Drawing............................................................................ 4-5 4.2.3 WBC Measurement Procedures .............................................................. 4-6 4.2.4 RBC/PLT Measurement Procedures........................................................ 4-6 4.2.5 HGB Measurement Procedures ............................................................... 4-7

4.3 Sequence of Whole Blood CBC+DIFF Measurement ........................................... 4-8 4.3.1 Sampling and dispensing procedures...................................................... 4-8 4.3.2 DIFF Channel ......................................................................................... 4-10 4.3.3 WBC/HGB Channel................................................................................ 4-13 4.3.4 RBC/PLT Channel .................................................................................. 4-15 4.3.5 Sequence of Predilute Mode CBC+DIFF Measurement........................ 4-18 4.3.6 Sequence of CBC Measurement ........................................................... 4-18

5 Hardware System ................................................................................................ 5-1 5.1 Mother board ......................................................................................................... 5-3

5.1.1 Introduction............................................................................................... 5-3 5.1.2 Board Composition................................................................................... 5-3 5.1.3 Adjustment and Test Points.................................................................... 5-26 5.1.4 Removal ................................................................................................. 5-28 5.1.5 Troubleshooting...................................................................................... 5-30

5.2 Data board........................................................................................................... 5-32 5.2.1 Introduction............................................................................................. 5-32 5.2.2 Board composition.................................................................................. 5-32 5.2.3 Adjustment and Test Points.................................................................... 5-45 5.2.4 Disassembly and assembly method....................................................... 5-49 5.2.5 Troubleshooting...................................................................................... 5-51

5.3 Drive board .......................................................................................................... 5-59 5.3.1 Introduction............................................................................................. 5-59 5.3.2 Board composition.................................................................................. 5-59 5.3.3 Adjustment and Test Points.................................................................... 5-75 5.3.4 Disassembly and assembly method....................................................... 5-78 5.3.5 Troubleshooting...................................................................................... 5-80

5.4 Autoloader board ................................................................................................. 5-99 5.4.1 Introduction............................................................................................. 5-99 5.4.2 Board Composition................................................................................. 5-99 5.4.3 Adjustment and Test Points.................................................................. 5-109 5.4.4 Disassembly and assembly method..................................................... 5-110 5.4.5 Troubleshooting.................................................................................... 5-112

5.5 Power board ...................................................................................................... 5-117 5.5.1 Introduction........................................................................................... 5-117 5.5.2 Board Composition............................................................................... 5-117 5.5.3 Adjustment and Test Points.................................................................. 5-122 5.5.4 Replacement and Connection.............................................................. 5-124 5.5.5 Troubleshooting.................................................................................... 5-127

5.6 Volumetric and pressure detecting board.......................................................... 5-129 5.6.1 Introduction........................................................................................... 5-129 5.6.2 Board Composition............................................................................... 5-129 5.6.3 Disassembly and assembly method..................................................... 5-132 5.6.4 Troubleshooting.................................................................................... 5-134

Table of Contents

3

5.7 Liquid-level detecting board .............................................................................. 5-140 5.7.1 Introduction........................................................................................... 5-140 5.7.2 Board composition................................................................................ 5-140 5.7.3 Replacement and Connection.............................................................. 5-143 5.7.4 Troubleshooting.................................................................................... 5-145

5.8 Laser Control Board .......................................................................................... 5-148 5.8.1 Introduction........................................................................................... 5-148 5.8.2 Board Composition............................................................................... 5-148 5.8.3 Adjustment and Test Points.................................................................. 5-150 5.8.4 Assembly and disassembly.................................................................. 5-151 5.8.5 Troubleshooting.................................................................................... 5-151

5.9 Pre-amplification board...................................................................................... 5-154 5.9.1 Introduction........................................................................................... 5-154 5.9.2 Board Composition............................................................................... 5-154 5.9.3 Adjustment and Test Points.................................................................. 5-158 5.9.4 Disassembly and assembly.................................................................. 5-158 5.9.5 Troubleshooting.................................................................................... 5-158

5.10 Indicator Board .................................................................................................. 5-160 5.10.1 Introduction........................................................................................... 5-160 5.10.2 Board Composition............................................................................... 5-160 5.10.3 Disassembly and assembly method..................................................... 5-161 5.10.4 Troubleshooting.................................................................................... 5-162

5.11 Key Board.......................................................................................................... 5-163 5.11.1 Introduction........................................................................................... 5-163 5.11.2 Board Composition............................................................................... 5-163 5.11.3 Disassembly and assembly method..................................................... 5-164 5.11.4 Troubleshooting.................................................................................... 5-165

6 Maintenance......................................................................................................... 6-1 6.1 Maintenance Modules and the Corresponding Settings ....................................... 6-1

6.2 General .................................................................................................................. 6-3

6.3 Disassembling the Panels ..................................................................................... 6-4 6.3.1 Removing the left door ............................................................................. 6-4 6.3.2 Removing the right door........................................................................... 6-5 6.3.3 Removing the top cover ........................................................................... 6-6 6.3.4 Removing the back panel......................................................................... 6-7 6.3.5 Removing the front door........................................................................... 6-8 6.3.6 Removing the front cover assembly......................................................... 6-9

6.4 Replacing the Valves, Pumps and Syringes........................................................ 6-11 6.4.1 Replacing valves .................................................................................... 6-13 6.4.2 Replacing the Pressure Chamber .......................................................... 6-15 6.4.3 Replacing the Vacuum Chamber ........................................................... 6-17 6.4.4 Replacing the Syringe Assembly............................................................ 6-18 6.4.5 Replacing the Waste Pump.................................................................... 6-24

6.5 Replacing the Bath/Aperture Assembly............................................................... 6-26

6.6 Replacing the Sampling Module and Adjusting Position ..................................... 6-29 6.6.1 Replacing the Sample Probe and Wipe ................................................. 6-29 6.6.2 Replacing the Optical Sensor................................................................. 6-31 6.6.3 Removing the Sampling Module ............................................................ 6-33

6.7 Maintaining and Replacing the DIFF Reaction Bath ........................................... 6-37

6.8 Autoloader Assembly (Closed-Tube)................................................................... 6-39 6.8.1 Removing and replacing the closed-tube sample compartment assembly 6-39 6.8.2 Removing and replacing the detection switches of the sample transport unit

Table of Contents

4

6-45 6.8.3 Replacing the sample transport unit....................................................... 6-46

6.9 Mix mechanism.................................................................................................... 6-58

6.10 Adjustment........................................................................................................... 6-66 6.10.1 Adjusting Sample Probe Position........................................................... 6-66 6.10.2 Adjusting Pincher Position ..................................................................... 6-73

7 Optical System..................................................................................................... 7-1 7.1 Optical System Adjustment and Troubleshooting.................................................. 7-1

7.2 Removing and Installing Optical System Assemblies............................................ 7-3 7.2.1 Laser driver board .................................................................................... 7-3 7.2.2 Front light assembly ................................................................................. 7-4 7.2.3 Flow cell assembly ................................................................................... 7-5 7.2.4 Rear light collimator assembly ................................................................. 7-7 7.2.5 Beam splitter assembly ............................................................................ 7-7 7.2.6 Rear light collector assembly ................................................................... 7-8 7.2.7 Rear light detector assembly.................................................................. 7-10

7.3 Adjustment........................................................................................................... 7-12 7.3.1 Coarse adjustment ................................................................................. 7-12 7.3.2 Preparation before fine tuning................................................................ 7-18 7.3.3 Fine tuning.............................................................................................. 7-19 7.3.4 Gain setup .............................................................................................. 7-24

7.4 Troubleshooting ................................................................................................... 7-27 7.4.1 Laser spot-deviation............................................................................... 7-27 7.4.2 Flow cell clog.......................................................................................... 7-27 7.4.3 Dirty flow cell .......................................................................................... 7-28

8 Troubleshooting .................................................................................................. 8-1 8.1 Error code and information.................................................................................... 8-1

8.2 Errors indicated by error messages ...................................................................... 8-9 8.2.1 Pressure errors......................................................................................... 8-9 8.2.2 Reagent errors ......................................................................................... 8-9 8.2.3 Hardware errors ..................................................................................... 8-10 8.2.4 Measurement errors............................................................................... 8-10 8.2.5 Temperature errors................................................................................. 8-12 8.2.6 Scattergram errors ................................................................................. 8-13

9 Appendixes ......................................................................................................... A-1 A. Accessories ...........................................................................................................A-1

B. List of Wearing Parts .............................................................................................B-1

C. Fluidic diagram ..................................................................................................... C-1

D. Pump and Valve Function Table ........................................................................... D-1

E. Tubing....................................................................................................................E-1

F. Method to identify cross network cable and direct-connected network cable .......F-1

1-1

1 Using This Manual

1.1 Introduction

The chapter explains how to use the BC-5380 service manual. This manual provides the

reference information and procedures needed in servicing the BC-5380. Before servicing the

BC-5380, read and understand the manual carefully for servicing the equipment properly and

for your safety.

This manual is to be used in conjunction with the operator’s manual of BC-5380.It does not

contain information and procedures already covered in the operator’s manual of BC-5380.

Be sure to operate and service the analyzer strictly as instructed in this manual and the operator’s manual.

Using This Manual

1-2

1.2 Who Should Read This Manual

To use this service manual effectively, the reader should posses:

A thorough understanding of

Basic electronic and fluidics principles and devices

Reagent systems

Quality control

Troubleshooting concepts

The ability to

Use basic mechanical tools and understand related terminology

Use a digital voltmeter (DVM) and an oscilloscope

Read fluidics schematics and understand related terminology

Read electronic schematics and understand related terminology

Using This Manual

1-3

1.3 How to Find Information

This service manual comprises 8 chapters and 5 appendices. Refer to the table below to find

the information you need.

If you want to … See …

learn about the system structure and the basic

principle of the BC-5380

Chapter 2 System Structure

learn about the installation requirements and how to

upgrade the BC-5380 software

Chapter 3 System Installation and Software Upgrade

learn about the fluidic system of the BC-5380 Chapter 4 Fluidic System

learn about the hardware system of the BC-5380 Chapter 5 Hardware System

learn about how to maintain the BC-5380 Chapter 6 Maintenance

learn about the optical system of the BC-5380 Chapter 7 Optical System

learn about how to troubleshoot the common errors

of the BC-5380

Chapter 8 Troubleshooting

learn about the main spare parts of the BC-5380 Appendix A Accessories

learn about the main wearing parts of the BC-5380 Appendix B List of Wearing Parts

learn about the schematic diagram of the fluidic

system of the BC-5380

Appendix C Fluidic Diagram

learn about the function of each valve and pump of

the BC-5380

Appendix D Pump and Valve Function Table

learn about the tubing connection of the BC-5380 Appendix E Tubing

learn about how to identify cross network cable and

direct-connected network cable

Appendix F Method to Identify Cross Network Cable and Direct-Connected Network Cable

Using This Manual

1-4

1.4 Conventions Used in This Manual

This manual uses certain typographical conventions to clarify meaning in the text:

all capital letters enclosed in [ ] indicate a key name (on the external keyboard), such as

[ENTER].

bold letters included in “ ” indicate text you can find on the screen, such as “Clean”.

bold letters indicate chapter titles, such as Chapter 1 Using This Manual.

All illustrations in this manual are provided as examples only. They may not necessarily reflect

your analyzer setup or data displayed.

Using This Manual

1-5

1.5 Symbols

You will find the following symbols in this manual:

When you see… Then…

read the statement below the symbol. The statement is

alerting you to an operating hazard that can cause

personnel injury.


alerting you to a possibility of analyzer damage or

unreliable analysis results.


alerting you to information that requires your attention.


alerting you to a potentially biohazardous condition.

You may find the following symbols on the analyzer, reagents, controls or calibrators.

When you see… It means…

CAUTION, CONSULT ACCOMPANYING

DOCUMENTS.

BIOLOGICAL RISK

HIGH VOLTAGE

WARNING, LASER BEAM

WARNING, HOT SURFACE

PROTECTIVE EARTH (GROUND)

Using This Manual

1-6

EARTH (GROUND)

ALTERNATING CURRENT

FOR IN VITRO DIAGNOSTIC USE

BATCH CODE

USE BY

SERIAL NUMBER

CATALOG NUMBER (FOR CONTROLS)

USE BY (YYYY-MM-DD) (FOR

CONTROLS)

DATE OF MANUFACTURE

MANUFACTURER

TEMPERATURE LIMITATION

CONSULT INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE

IRRITATING SUBSTANCE

THE FOLLOWING DEFINITION OF THE

WEEE LABEL APPLIES TO EU MEMBER

STATES ONLY: THE USE OF THIS

Using This Manual

1-7

SYMBOL INDICATES THAT THIS

PRODUCT SHOULD NOT BE TREATED

AS HOUSEHOLD WASTE. BY ENSURING

THAT THIS PRODUCT IS DISPOSED OF

CORRECTLY, YOU WILL HELP PREVENT

BRINGING POTENTIAL NEGATIVE

CONSEQUENCES TO THE

ENVIRONMENT AND HUMAN HEALTH.

FOR MORE DETAILED INFORMATION

WITH REGARD TO RETURNING AND

RECYCLING THIS PRODUCT, PLEASE

CONSULT THE DISTRIBUTOR FROM

WHOM YOU PURCHASED THE

PRODUCT.

Be sure to observe the following precautions for the safety of patients, operators and yours

when you are servicing the analyzer.

Using This Manual

1-8

It is important for the hospital or organization that employs this equipment to carry out a reasonable service/maintenance plan. Neglect of this may result in machine breakdown or injury of human health.

Never use combustible gas (e.g. anesthetic) or combustible liquid (e.g. ethanol) around the analyzer. Otherwise, the risk of explosion may exist.

Contacting exposed electronic components while the equipment is attached to power can cause personal injury from electric shock or damage to electronic components. Power down before removing covers to access electronic components.

Connect the analyzer to a socket having sole fuse and protective switch. Do not use the same fuse and protective switch with other equipment (e.g. life supporting equipment). Otherwise, the equipment failure, over current or impulse current that occurs at the startup moment may lead to tripping.

To prevent personal injury during the maintenance, keep your clothes, hairs and hands from the moving parts, such as sample probe, clipper and piercer.

Possible mechanical movement of the warned position may lead to personal injury during the normal operation, removal and maintenance.

Be sure to dispose of reagents, waste, samples, consumables, etc. according to government regulations.

The reagents are irritating to eyes, skin and diaphragm. Wear proper personal protective equipment (e.g. gloves, lab coat, etc.) and follow safe laboratory procedures when handling them in the laboratory.

If the reagents accidentally spill on your skin, wash them off with plenty of water and if necessary, go see a doctor; if the reagents accidentally spill into your eyes, wash them off with plenty of water and immediately go see a doctor.

Using This Manual

1-9

Improper maintenance may damage the analyzer. Maintain the analyzer strictly as instructed by the service manual and inspect the analyzer carefully after the maintenance.

For problems not mentioned in the service manual, contact Mindray customer service department for maintenance advice.

To prevent personal injury or damage to equipment components, remove metal jewelry before maintaining or servicing electronic components of the equipment.

Electrostatic discharge may damage electronic components. If there is a possibility of ESD damage with a procedure, then do that procedure at an ESD workstation, or wear an antistatic wrist strap.

This equipment must be operated by skilled/trained medical professionals.

Samples, controls, calibrators and waste are potentially infectious. Wear proper personal protective equipment (e.g. gloves, lab coat, etc.) and follow safe laboratory procedures when handling them in the laboratory.

All the analyzer components and surfaces are potentially infectious.

Take proper protective measures for operation or maintenance.

The sample probe tip is sharp and may contain biohazardous materials. Exercise caution to avoid contact with the probe when working around it.

2-1

2 System Structure

2.1 Introduction

Hardware

Hardware collects signals, controls and drives moving parts, and processes and displays

information. It mainly consists of the mother board, drive board, data board, power board, laser

control board, FS pre-amplification board, SS pre-amplification board, volumetric board,

indicator board, liquid-level detecting board, key board and autoloader control board.

Interface

The system mainly consists of two parts, the main unit (analyzer) and the external computer,

which are connected through the network port. Other connections are realized through the

interfaces of the external computer.

Software operating environment

The system software consists of the main unit software and the operation software. The main

unit software is operated on the data board inner the analyzer; the operation software is

operated under the WINDOWS platform of the external computer. The main unit software

analyzes the sequence, collects and identifies data. The operation software displays and prints

the results and stores them into the database, and realizes the interaction of the functions

including count, QC, calibration, maintenance, data management and communication, etc.

Fluidic System

The fluidic system indicates the tubing where reagents, samples and air pass in the analyzer.

The fluidic system controls the correlatively jointed fluidic parts in a set sequence by the

software and driving of the hardware to control the distribution and direction of the medium.

System Structure

2-2

2.2 Fluidic System Refer to Chapter 4 Fluidic System of this manual

System Structure

2-3

2.3 Hardware System Refer to Chapter 5 Hardware System of this manual

System Structure

2-4

2.4 Main Structure The BC-5380 auto hematology analyzer consists of the main unit (analyzer) and the

accessories.

Figure 2-1 Front of the analyzer

1---Front cover 2---Power/Status indicator

3---[OPEN] key 4---[RUN] key

5---Tube 6---Tube rack

7---Tube 8---Adapter

9---Sample compartment door

System Structure

2-5

Figure 2-2 Back of the analyzer

1 --- Network interface 2 --- M-53D diluent sensor connector

3 --- M-53D diluent inlet 4 --- M-53 cleanser inlet

5 --- M-53LH lyse inlet 6 --- M-53LEO(Ⅱ) lyse inlet

7 --- M-53LEO(Ⅰ) lyse inlet 8 --- AC input

9 --- Waste outlet 10 --- Waste sensor connector

System Structure

2-6

Figure 2-3 Left side of the analyzer

1--- Door lock 2---Power switch

System Structure

2-7

Figure 2-4 Right side of the analyzer

1---Door lock 2---Tube

3---Tube rack

System Structure

2-8

Figure 2-5 Front of the analyzer (front cover removed)

1 --- Sampling module 2 --- Tube

3 --- Tube rack 4 --- Sample transport assembly

5 --- Sample compartment assembly 6 --- Sheath fluid syringe assembly

7--- Sample injection syringe assembly 8 --- Sampling syringe assembly

9 --- Fluidic valve 10 --- Relieve valve assembly

System Structure

2-9

Figure 2-6 Left side of the analyzer (left door removed)

1 --- Front cover assembly 2 --- Diluent syringe assembly

3 --- Lyse syringe assembly 4 --- Pressure chamber assembly

5 --- Air pumps 6 --- Left door

7 --- liquid level detection unit 8 --- Valve assembly (2)

9 --- Valve assembly (1) 10 --- Power switch

11 --- Drive board 12 --- Data board

13 --- Mother board 14 --- Top cover

System Structure

2-10

Figure 2-7 Right side of the analyzer (right door removed)

1 --- Optical system 2 --- Isolation chamber

3 --- Sampling assembly 4 --- Fluidic valves

5 --- Fluidic valves 6 --- Volumetric unit

7 --- Vacuum chamber assembly 8 --- Right door

9 --- Waste pump assembly 10 --- Valve assembly (3)

11 --- Bath assembly 12 --- WBC reaction bath assembly

13 --- Pinch valve 14 --- Autoloader control board

15 ---Mix mechanism

System Structure

2-11

2.5 Software structure The software system consists of the main unit software which operates on the data board inner

the analyzer and the operation software which operates under the WINDOWS platform of the

external computer. The main unit software analyzes sequence, collects data and calculates the

parameters. The operation software realizes the interaction of the functions including count,

QC, calibration, maintenance, data management and parameter setup, etc.

2.5.1 Menu structure 1. Shortcut button area

When switching to any screen, a guidance bar will always be displayed on the left of the

screen containing 10 frequently used shortcut buttons. Click them to perform the

corresponding operations. The menu structure of the shortcut buttons is shown in Figure 2-8.

STAT

RunAny screen

Diluent

Worklist

Graph

QC

Table

Logout

Shutdown

Exit

Figure 2-8 Menu structure of the shortcut button area

2. “Run” message box

The menu structure of the “Run” message box is shown in Figure 2-9.

System Structure

2-12

RUN

CT-PD

AL-WB

CT-WB

Start

Ok

Cancel

Start

Ok

Cancel

Start

Ok

Cancel

Figure 2-9 Menu structure of the “Run” message box

3. “Worklist” screen

At the “Worklist” screen, you can click the function buttons to perform the corresponding

worklist-related operations.

The menu structure of the “Worklist” screen is shown in Figure 2-10.

System Structure

2-13

Figure 2-10 Menu structure of the worklist screen

4. “Review” screen

The “Review” menu has five submenus: Graph, Table, Data Backup, Data Export and

Compare. The Data Backup and Data Export functions can be enabled only when the analyzer

has just been started up or you are at the “Table” review screen; otherwise, they grey out. The

“Table” review includes the functions of auto-backup and auto-restore, which will be performed

automatically by the software when the condition of backup or restoring is fulfilled. The menu

structures of each screen of the “Review” screen are shown below.

Graph

The menu structure of the graph review screen is shown in Figure 2-11.

System Structure

2-14

Figure 2-11 Menu structure of the graph review screen

Table

The menu structure of the table review screen is shown in Figure 2-12.

TABLE

Result

Sample List

Microscopic Exam. and

Others

Optical

Edit Result

Restore Result

Store

Validate

Batch Validate

Search

Transmit

Pos./Total

Others Data Backup

Auto-backup

Auto-restore

Data Export

Delete

Deselect

Print

Trend Graph

CV

Samples within Today

All Samples

Samples Found

Sample/Patient Info.

Figure 2-12 Menu structure of the table review screen

Data Export

The menu structure of the “Data Export” screen is shown in Figure 2-13.

System Structure

2-15

Figure 2-13 Menu structure of the data export screen

Data Backup

The menu structure of the “Data Backup” screen is shown in Figure 2-14.

Figure 2-14 Menu structure of the data backup screen

Compare

The menu structure of the “Compare” screen is shown in Figure 2-15.

System Structure

2-16

COMPARE Comparison Summary

Result Trend

Re-fill

Search

Print

Re-fill

Search

Print

Adjust Parameter Order

Adjust Parameter Order

Figure 2-15 Menu structure of the compare screen

5. QC screen

The QC programs include the L-J QC, X-B QC, X QC and X -R QC. Click the shortcut

button “QC” of the guidance bar on the left of the screen to enter the “L-J QC graph” screen.

Click “Menu” → “QC”, then the submenus of four QC programs will pop up for you to select.

L-J

The menu structure of the “L-J” QC program is shown in Figure 2-16.

System Structure

2-17

Figure 2-16 Menu structure of the “L-J” QC program

System Structure

2-18

X-B

The menu structure of the “X-B” QC program is shown in Figure 2-17.

X-B Settings

Graph

Have Preset Values

List

Restore Defaults

Set Limits

Delete

Calculate Preset ValuesSave Preset

Values

Print

Pos./Total

Delete

Pos./Total

Print

Save

Print

Communication

Data Backup

Data Export

History

Figure 2-17 Menu structure of the “X-B” QC program

X

The menu structure of the “ X ” QC program is shown in Figure 2-18.

System Structure

2-19

X

Figure 2-18 Menu structure of the “ X ” QC program

System Structure

2-20

X -R

The menu structure of the “ X -R” QC program is shown in Figure 2-19.

-R

Run

Settings

Graph

Table

Print

Start

Pos./Total

Delete

New Vial

Data Compare

Display order

Outliers

Pos./Total

Delete

Pos./Total

Save

Print

Print

Print

Communication

Data Backup

Data Export

History

X

Figure 2-19 Menu structure of the “ X -R” QC program

6. ”Service” screen

The “Service” screen contains screens of “Maintenance”, “Status”, “Self-test”, “Debug”,

“Log”, “Counter” and “Version and Config. Information”. The menu structures of these

System Structure

2-21

screens are shown below.

“Maintenance” screen

The menu structure of the “Maintenance” screen is shown in Figure 2-20.

System Structure

2-22

Figure 2-20 Menu structure of the “Maintenance” screen

System Structure

2-23

“Status” screen

The menu structure of the “Status” screen is shown in Figure 2-21.

Status

Print

Signal Collection

Export

Sensor

Temperature&Pressure

Voltage&Current

Print

Export

Print

Export

Print

Export

Figure 2-21 Menu structure of the “Status” screen

“Self-test” screen

The menu structure of the “Self-test” screen is shown in Figure 2-22.

System Structure

2-24

Figure 2-22 Menu structure of the “Self-test” screen

System Structure

2-25

“Debug” screen

The menu structure of the “Debug” screen is shown in Figure 2-23.

Figure 2-23 Menu structure of the “Debug” screen

“Counter” screen

The menu structure of the “Counter” screen is shown in Figure 2-24.

Figure 2-24 Menu structure of the “Counter” screen

“Log” screen

The menu structure of the “Log” screen is shown in Figure 2-25

System Structure

2-26

Figure 2-25 Menu structure of the “Log” screen

“Version and Config. Information” screen

The menu structure of the “Version and Config. Information” screen is shown in Figure 2-26.

Figure 2-26 Menu structure of the “Version and Config. Information” screen

System Structure

2-27

7. “Setup” screen

The “Setup” screen contains screens of “Gain”, “Data Format”, “Reagent”, “Auxiliary”, “Para. Unit”, “Ref. Range”, “Print”, “Auto Maintenance”, “User and Password” and “Advanced”.

The menu structure of the “Setup” screen is shown in Figure 2-27.

System Structure

2-28

Para. Unit

Auxiliary

Reagent

Ref. Range

Print

Communication

SETUP

RUO

Gain

User and Password

Maintenance

Date Format

Delete

Edit

New

Reset Password

Change Password

Close

Autoloader

Auto Maintenance

Barcode Info.

Lab Info.

Advanced

Cancel

Ok

Apply

Ok

Cancel

Figure 2-27 Menu structure of the “Setup” screen

8. “Statistics” screen

System Structure

2-29

The menu structure of the “Statistics” screen is shown in Figure 2-28.

Calculate Workload STATISTICS Statistical

Condition

Statistical Item

Workload Summary

Calculate Charge

Re-fill

Statistics

Adjust Order

Print

Statistical Condition

Charge Summary

Re-fill

Statistics

Adjust Order

Print

Figure 2-28 Menu structure of the “Statistics” screen

9. “Shortcut Code” screen

The menu structure of the “Shortcut Code” screen is shown in Figure 2-29.

Figure 2-29 Menu structure of the “Shortcut Code” screen

10. “Calibration” screen

The menu structure of the “Calibration” screen is shown in Figure 2-30.

System Structure

2-30

Figure 2-30 Menu structure of the “Calibration” screen

11. “Help” info.

The menu structure of the “Help” screen is shown in Figure 2-31.

ContentsHELP Service

Review

Daily Operations

Setup

Calibration

QC

Search

Print

Figure 2-31 Menu structure of the “Help” screen

12. Shutdown

The menu structure of “Shutdown” is shown in Figure 2-32.

System Structure

2-31

SHUTDOWN Sleep

Shutdown

Figure 2-32 Menu structure of “Shutdown”

13. Exit

The menu structure of “Exit” is shown in Figure 2-33.

Figure 2-33 Menu structure of “EXIT”

2.5.2 Passwords The passwords are divided into three levels: common user, administrator (set by the user at

the “User and Password” screen) and service engineer (user name: “service”, and password:

“Se s700”. Note: there is a space between “e” and ”s”). An administrator is enabled to have all

the authorities of a common user, and a service engineer is enabled to have all the authorities

of an administrator. Tables below introduce the authorities enabled for each level of user.

Table 2-1 Authorities enabled for the common user level

Level Module Screen Authorities enabled

Common

User

Worklist Worklist Users of three levels are enabled with all

the authorities of the worklist screen, which

including: “New”, “Save”, “Insert”, “Delete”, “Search”, “Hide”,

“Select(Deselect)”, “Browse”, “Copy” and

“Print”.

System Structure

2-32

Count All screens

except the “QC

Run” and

“Service”

(Maintenance,

Status,

Self-test and

Debug); as

well as the

“Run” screen

Users of three levels are all enabled with

the authority of running samples.

Graph Data/Graph, Saving of DIFF, Print,

Pos./Total, Lock, Data Browse (the buttons

of “Validate”, “Edit Result” and “Restore Result” are available, but when you click

them, a message box will pop up for

authority identification.)

Saving of the “Microscopic Exam. and Others” screen, Print, Pos./Total, Lock,

Data Browsing and Setup of blood ESR ref.

range.

TABLE Save, Print, Communication, Deselect,

Search, Trend Graph (cannot be printed),

CV (cannot be printed), arrow buttons

above the “Pos./Total” control (the buttons

of “Validate”, “Batch Validate”, “Edit Result” and “Restore Result” are

available, but when you click them, a

message box will pop up for authority

identification.)

Data Export Data Export

Data Backup Data Backup

Compare Search and re-fill patient information,

adjust and print parameters in the

comparison summary, adjust and print

parameters in the result trend.

Auto-backup Auto-backup

Review

Auto-restore Auto-restore

System Structure

2-33

L-J L-J QC setup: browse file information of

different lot No.(but can not edit the QC

settings), Print

L-J QC count: Start QC Run, Print and

Pos./Total

L-J QC graph: New Vial, Data Compare,

Display Order, Calculate Preset Values,

Save Preset Values, Outliers, Print and

Pos./Total

L-J QC table: Print, Communication, Data

Backup, Data Export, History and

Pos./Total

X-B X-B QC setup: browse the information of

the screen but no edit allowed, Print

X-B QC graph: Calculate Preset Values,

Save Preset Values, Print and Pos./Total

X-B QC table: Print, Communication, Data


Pos./Total

QC

X X QC setup: browse file information of


settings), Print

X QC count: Start QC Run, Print and

Pos./Total

X QC graph: New Vial, Data Compare,

Display Order, Calculate Preset Values,

Save Preset Values, Outliers, Print and

Pos./Total

X QC table: Print, Communication, Data


Pos./Total

System Structure

2-34

X -R X -R QC setup: browse file information of


settings), Print

X -R QC count: Start QC Run, Print and

Pos./Total

X -R QC graph: New Vial, Data Compare,

Display Order, Outliers, Print and

Pos./Total

X -R QC table: Print, Communication,

Data Backup, Data Export, History and

Pos./Total

Maintenance Replace Reagent (“All Reagents”

unavailable), Clean, (“Empty WBC Bath”,

“Empty RBC Bath”, “Empty DIFF Bath”

all unavailable), Maintain the whole device

Status Temperature&Pressure ( “Analyzer Information” unavailable at the “Print” message box), Voltage&Current

(“Analyzer Information” unavailable at the

“Print” and “Export” message boxes)

Self-test Self-test for syringes and sampling

mechanism, valves and others

Counter Check and print all the information

Log Check, print and see details of logs

including “Set Paras”, “Other Logs” and

“All Logs”

Service

Version and

Config.

Information

Check, export and print the information of

the “Version and Config. Information”

screen

General

Format

Date Format, Reagent, Auxiliary

(“Authority” unavailable)

Setup

User and

Password

1. Check the information of the “User list” screen, but New, Edit, Delete and Reset

password are disabled.

2. When log in as a common user, the

password of the current login user can be

modified.

System Structure

2-35

Lab

Information

Check the Lab information, but not allowed

to edit

Calculate

Workload

Select statistical items, set statistical

conditions, adjust and print workload

summaries

Statistics

Calculate

Charge

Set calculate conditions, adjust and print

charge summaries

Department Check

Deliverer Check

Diagnosis Check

Shortcut Code

Gender Check

Calibration Calibration

Factor Browse and print user calibration factors

Help Help Check the help information

Shutdown Shutdown

Perform the Sleep and Shutdown

procedures

Exit Exit Log out and exit the system

Table 2-2 Authorities enabled for the administrator level


Worklist Worklist

Run All screens

except the “QC Run” ,

“Service”

(Maintenance,

Status,

Self-test and

Debug) and

“Calibration”

Graph Delete, Histogram Adjust., Validate, Edit

Result and Restore Result

Table Validate, Batch Validate, Edit Result and

Delete

Administrator

Review

Data Export

System Structure

2-36

Data Backup

Compare

Auto-backup

Auto-restore

L-J L-J QC setup: Edit QC files, save and set

limits, get preset values

L-J QC count

L-J QC graph: Delete

L-J QC table: Delete

X-B X-B QC setup: Edit QC files, get preset

values, restore defaults, save

X-B QC graph: Delete

X-B QC table: Delete

X X QC setup: Edit QC files, save and set

limits, get preset values

X QC count

X QC graph: Delete

X QC table: Delete

QC

X -R X -R QC setup: edit QC files, save

X -R QC count

X -R QC graph: Delete

X -R QC table: Delete

Maintenance

Status Temperature&Pressure (“Analyzer Information” available at the “Print” message box), Voltage&Current

(“Analyzer Information” available at the

“Print” message box)

Self-test

Counter

Log Check, print and see the details of the

“Error Info.”

Service

Version and

Config.

Information

System Structure

2-37

General Setup

“Authority” setting items of the “Auxiliary”

screen

Check and set the parameters of screens

including Para. Unit, Ref. Range, Print,

Communication, RUO, Auto Maintenance,

Autoloader and Barcode Info.

User and

Password

New, Edit, delete user, reset the passwords

of all users and change the administrator’s

own password

Lab

Information Check and edit the Lab Information

Setup

Shortcut Code New, Edit and Delete the shortcut code

Calculate

Workload

Statistics

Calculate

Charge

Department New, Edit and Delete

Deliverer New, Edit and Delete

Diagnosis New, Edit and Delete

Shortcut Code

Gender New, Edit and Delete

Calibration

Factors

Save and restore the User Calibration

Factors (all the User Calibration Factors)

Calibrator

1. Calibration in the CT-CBC+DIFF mode

2. Calibrate one or more parameters

among WBC, RBC, HGB, MCV and PLT.

Calibration

Fresh Blood

1. Fresh Blood calibration in the CT-WB

and CT-PD Mode;


among WBC, RBC, HGB, MCV and PLT.

Help Help

Shutdown Shutdown

Exit Exit

Table 2-3 Authorities enabled for the service engineer level


Service Worklist Worklist

System Structure

2-38

Run All screens

except the “QC Run” ,

“Service”

(Maintenance,

Status,

Self-test and

Debug) and

“Calibration”

Graph Special Info.

Table Trend graph (can be printed), CV (can be

printed), Optical

Data Export

Data Backup

Compare

Auto-backup

Review

Auto-restore

L-J

X-B

X

QC

X -R

Maintenance 1. Replace All Reagents

2. Empty WBC Bath, Empty RBC Bath and

Empty DIFF Bath at the “Maintenance”

screen

Status Temperature&Pressure (“Analyzer Information” available at the “Export” message box), Voltage&Current

(“Analyzer Information” available at the

“Export” message box), Sensor, Signal

collection and Export the Analyzer

Information

Self-test

Engineer

Service

Counter Initialize the number of times that each

item has been calculated except

the ”Sample Count Times” (samples in

QC, calibration, background counts and

reliability tests not included)

System Structure

2-39

Log Export, Save, Print and see Details of “Set Paras”, “Other Logs”, “All Logs”, “Error Info.” and “RunSequence”

Debug Debug

Version and

Config.

Information

General Setup

Edit FS, SS and SF values of the “Gain”

screen; set the value for “Auto prompt when n samples were run” at the “Auto Maintenance” screen

User and

Password

Lab

Information

Shortcut Code

Setup

Advanced Maintain

Calculate

Workload

Statistics

Calculate

Charge

Department

Deliverer

Diagnosis

Shortcut Code

Gender

Calibration

Factors

Import and Export User Calibration Factors

and Factory Calibration Factors, Restore

Defaults, Save, Restore (All the Factory

Calibration Factors and Factory Transfer

Factors), Print

Calibration

Calibrator

1. Factory calibrator calibration in the

WB-CBC, WB-CBC+DIFF, PD-CBC and

PD-CBC+DIFF mode.


among WBC, RBC, HGB, MCV, PLT and

MPV.

Help Help

System Structure

2-40

Shutdown Shutdown

Exit Exit

3-1

3 Instrument Installation and Software Upgrade

3.1 Preparations

3.1.1 Purpose Install the instrument and update the software properly as per the procedures introduced in this

chapter.

3.1.2 Tools Blade or clipper

USB flash drive

Pipette (200µl)

Cross-headed screwdriver

Thermometer with a probe

The software copied in the U-drive must be the specified one for the analyzer of the specified model. Otherwise, you can not proceed to install.

3.1.3 Accessories Plastic test tube

Glass Pipette

7µm standard particles

Gloves

Tissues

Controls (high and normal level)

Do prepare the 7µm standard particles firstly to proceed with the later confirmation work of the optical gain.

Instrument Installation and Software Upgrade

3-2

3.2 Installation Requirements 3.2.1 Space Requirements Check the site for proper space allocation. In addition to the space required for the analyzer

itself, arrange for:

at least 100 cm on both left and right sides;

at least 50 cm behind;

enough room on or below the countertop to accommodate the diluent, rinse and waste

containers

3.2.2 Power Requirements 1. Make sure the analyzer is properly grounded. Before turning on the analyzer, make sure

the input voltage meets the requirements.

2. Using pinboard may bring the electrical interference and the analysis results may be

unreliable. Please place the analyzer near the electrical outlet to avoid using the

plug-board.

3. Please use the original electrical wire shipped with the analyzer. Using other electrical wire

may damage the analyzer or cause unreliable analysis results.

Voltage: A.C. 100V-240V Input power: ≤300 VA Frequency: 50/60 Hz

3.2.3 Environment Requirements The installation environment of analyzer must meet the following requirements:

1. Optimal operating temperature: 15 ℃ - 30 ℃

2. Optimal operating humidity: 30 % - 85 %

3. Atmospheric pressure: 70 kPa - 106 kPa

4. The environment should be as free as possible from dust, mechanical vibrations, loud

noises, pollution and electrical interference.

5. It is advisable to evaluate the electromagnetic environment prior to the operation of this

analyzer. Make sure the electromagnetic interference is less than CLASS B. Do not use

this analyzer in close proximity to sources of strong electromagnetic radiation.

6. Do not place the analyzer near brush-type motors, flickering fluorescent lights, and

electrical contacts that regularly open and close.

7. Do not place the analyzer on a slope.

8. The environment should have good ventilation. Do not place the analyzer in direct sunlight

or in front of a source of heat or drafts.


3-3

Make sure the installation environment meets the above 8 requirements. Otherwise, the performance of the analyzer might be affected.

3.2.4 PC Configuration Requirements 1. Startup the computer, then right-click “My Computer” and select “Properties” to enter the

property screen shown in Figure 3-2. You can check the operation system and RAM of the

computer here. They should meet the following requirements:

Operation system ： Windows 2000 Professional + SP4, Windows XP Home/XP

Professional + SP2 or Windows Vista.

RAM：256MB at least

Figure 3-1 Checking “Properties” of “My computer”


3-4

Figure 3-2 System properties

2. Right-click the desktop and select “Properties”, and then click the “Settings” tag to enter

the screen shown in Figure 3-4. You can check the resolution of the display here. It should

meet the following requirements:

Resolution：1024 x 768 or higher (adjust as shown in Figure 3-4)；

Figure 3-3 Checking “Properties” of desktop

Operating system

RAM


3-5

Figure 3-4 Setting screen resolution

3. Double-click “My Computer” to enter the screen shown in Figure 3-5. You can check the

space available on each disk here. It should meet the following requirements:

Hard disk space：4GB available on one disk at least.

Figure 3-5 My computer

Then, close these 3 dialog boxes.

Disk space

Screen resolution


3-6

The PC hardware configuration and operation system must meet the foregoing requirements. Otherwise, the analyzer can not work properly.

If the operating system on the external PC is Windows 2000 Professional +SP4, the software for the analyzer can only be installed successfully after installing the Windows2000-KB835732 patch of the corresponding language.

To install the software on a PC without CD-ROM, you should copy the installation files from the installation CD to a USB flash drive on a PC with a CD-ROM, and then copy the files to the PC for installation through U drive. To install the software on a PC with a CD-ROM, install or update the software using the CD directly. To connect to the LIS, the PC should be configured with two network cards.


3-7

3.3 Package Checking and Unpacking

3.3.1 Checks before unpacking Please check if the package is intact before unpacking.

3.3.2 Unpacking the main unit 1. The appearance of the main unit is shown in Figure 3-6. Cut off the binding belt before

unpacking.

Figure 3-6 External package of main unit

2. Cut off the binding belt and remove the wooden cover. Then, remove the accessory box

shown in the figure below.

Figure3-7 Remove wooden cover

3. Lift the carton to expose the main unit.


3-8

Figure3-8 Remove accessory box

4. Remove the protection foam from both sides of the main unit.

Figure3-9 Remove carton

5. Remove the plastic bag from the main unit. Grab the bottom of the main unit and lift it onto a

countertop. Note that the main unit must be lifted by at least two persons.

Figure 3-10 Lift main unit


3-9

When lifting the main unit, keep it as level as possible and avoid strong impact.

3.3.3 Checking packing list Check the delivered components against the packing list to see if everything is delivered.


3-10

3.4 Removal and Installation 1. Open the right door of the main unit, remove the plastic cable tie vertically fixing the

sampling assembly and remove the clamp fixing the synchronous belt, as Figure 3-11

shows.

Figure 3-11 Remove the plastic cable tie and the clamp

2. When using the tubes of Ф14×75（mm）or Ф15×75（mm）model, you should disassembly

the adapter from the rack to load the tubes. Disassembly as shown in Figure 3-12.

Figure 3-12 Remove the adapter from the tube rack

3. To install the software on a PC without CD-ROM, the installation files should be copied

from the installation CD to a USB flash drive on a PC with a CD-ROM, and then plug the

flash drive to the USB interface of the PC for installation and open the folder with


3-11

installation files. To install the software on a PC with a CD-ROM, put the installation CD

directly into the CD-ROM.and open the folder with instaltion files. Copy the installation files

from the disk to the U drive. Then, plug the U drive to the USB interface and then open the

installation folder.

4. Check if there is any software of other hematology analyzer on the PC. If there is, uninstall

the software or database before installation, and then double-click “Setup.exe” to install

the software. Select the language from the pull-down list in the pop-up message box, and

then click “OK” to continue installing, as shown in Figure 3-13.

Figure 3-13 Language selecting

5. An installation directory box will pop up with the default directory: D:\Mindray\Auto

Hematology Analyzer. You can click “Browse” to change the directory if necessary. Then,

click “Next” to continue installing as shown in Figure 3-14.

Figure 3-14 Selecting directory

6. A progress bar shown in Figure 3-15 will pop up. Please wait while the software is being

installed.


3-12

Figure 3-15 Progress bar

7. When the installation of the software is finished, a message box shown in Figure 3-16 will

pop up. Click “Next” to install the necessary components and database.

Figure 3-16 Continuing installing

8. The message boxes shown in Figure 3-17 will pop up while installing, please click the

“Accept” to continue installing.


3-13

Figure 3-17 Installing .NET Framework 2.0

9. The message boxes shown in Figure 3-18 will pop up while installing, please click the

“Accept” button to continue installing.


3-14

Figure 3-18 Installing Windows Installer 3.1

10. Then, the message boxes shown in Figure 3-19 will pop up while installing, please click

the “Accept” to continue installing.


3-15

Figure 3-19 Installing SQL

11. Then, the message boxes shown in Figure 3-20 will pop up while installing, please click

the “Install” button to continue installing.

Figure 3-20 Installing VC++ R L

12. A progress bar “Installing XXX…” shown in Figure 3-21 will pop up while installing the

components. Please be patient and wait as it may take longer time.


3-16


13. After part of the components is installed, a message box shown in Figure 3-22 may pop up.

You should click “Yes” to restart the computer and the installation program may continue

automatically after restarting.

Figure 3-22 Restarting the PC

14. When finish installing the components, the database will be installed automatically as

shown in Figure 3-23 .

Figure 3-23 Installing database


3-17

15. When the installation is complete, a message box shown in Figure 3-24 will pop up. Click

“Close” to close the box and the entire software installation procedure is finished.

Figure 3-24 Installation complete

If it is found that the main unit software mismatches the PC software, you should upgrade the main unit software as per the procedures specified in 3.11.2 to match it with the software of the PC-end.

16. Install the driver program of the printer properly on the PC.

17. The BC-5380 consists of the IPU PC and the main unit as designed. Only basic interactive

keys like the [RUN] and [OPEN] keys are located on the main unit. The rest of the

operations are realized through the IPU PC. The IPU PC has two network interfaces, one

connecting the BC-5380 and the other one may connect to other information devices (e.g.

LIS system) or the LAN of the hospital, which are used to export data. There are two icons

of “Local Area Connection” for the two network interfaces existed. follow the procedures to

configure the network interfaces of the IPU PC:

(1) Right click “My Network Places” and select “Properties” from the pop-up dialog box.


3-18

Figure 3-25 Right clicking “Network neighbor”

(2) Right click one of the network interfaces and select “Properties”. In the pop-up message

box, select the check box of “Show icon in notification area when connected” and “Notify me when this connection has limited or no connectivity”, and then click “OK”. Repeat this

procedure to set the other network interface.

Figure 3-26 Connection properties

(3) At the “Local Area Connection Properties” screen, select “Internet Protocol (TCP/IP)” and then click “Properties”. At the pop-up screen, select “Use the following IP address”, and

then enter 10.0.0.1 into the “IP address” box and 255.0.0.0 into the “Subnet mask” box, as

shown in Figure 3-27 .


3-19

Figure 3-27 Setting IP address

(4) Then, click “OK” to save all the settings.

Never set the “Default gateway” and DNS server for the network interface (10.0.0.1) connecting the BC-5380. Otherwise, you may not access to the network connecting the other network interface.

If other computers or network are connected to the IPU PC (through the other network interface), be sure that the IP address 10.0.0.1 (used by the IPU PC) or 10.0.0.2 (used by the BC-5380) is not applied to other computers or computers in the other network.

18. The LIS computer is used to transmit data by connecting the IPU computer. Do as follows

to check and set the IP for the LIS computer.

(1) At the desktop of the LIS computer, right click “My Network Places” and select

“Properties” from the pop-up dialog box, as shown in Figure 3-28 .


3-20

Figure 3-28 “Network Neighbor” (LIS computer)

(2) Right click the “Local Area Connection” icon and select “Properties”, as shown in Figure

3-29 .

Figure 3-29 Connection properties

Then, the following box will pop up:


3-21

Figure 3-30 Connection properties (LIS computer)

(3) At the “Local Area Connection Properties” screen, double click “Internet Protocol (TCP/IP)” to enter the following screen.


3-22

Figure 3-31 Setting IP address

(4) Check and record the IP address shown in the screen. It will be used to set the IP

information on the BC-5380.

(5) If the IP address is not displayed here, you should set it manually (do not set the gateway

and DNS server). After setting the IP address, the subnet mask will be generated automatically.

Then, click “OK” to save the settings.

The IP address you set here can not be 10.0.0.1 or 10.0.0.2.


3-23

3.5 Connections

1. See Figure 3-32 for connections of reagent and waste containers. Note that the

M-53LEO(I) lyse, M-53LEO(II) lyse, M-53LH lyse and the analyzer should be placed in a

plane of the same level, and the M-53D diluent, M-53 cleanser, and waste containers

should be placed under the countertop.

Figure 3-32 Connections of reagent and waste containers

Make sure the M-53LEO (I) lyse, M-53LEO (II) lyse, M-53LH lyse and M-53 cleanser are placed on the same level as the analyzer.

Make sure the tubes are electrically isolated.

See Figure 3-33 for proper connections of reagent and waste containers. Note that the tube

connectors and their counterparts on the analyzer are of the same colors.


3-24

Figure 3-33 linking wires and lines

2. Locate the power inlet at the back of the main unit and connect the female end of the

power cable to the power inlet, and connect the three-pronged end of the power cable to a

power outlet.

Figure 3-34 Connection of PC and power supply

3. Connect the BC-5380 with the IPU computer by a cross network cable, as shown in Figure

3-35 .


3-25

Figure 3-35 Connecting the main unit and the IPU computer

Be sure to use the cross network cable to connect the IPU computer and the LIS computer.

The two ends of a cross network cable have no difference. You can plug them to IPU computer and the LIS computer respectively at will. Please see appendix H for method of how to distinguish a cross network cable from a direct-connected network cable.

4. There are two ways to connect the BC-5380 and the LIS computer.

(1) Connect the BC-5380 with the LIS computer by a cross network cable, as shown in Figure

3-36 .

Figure 3-36 Connecting the IPU computer and the LIS computer

Be sure to use the cross network cable to connect the analyzer and the LIS computer.

The two ends of a cross network cable can be randomly plugged into the two computers respectively.

(2) Connect the IPU computer to the LAN of the hospital, as shown in Figure 3-37 .


3-26

Figure 3-37 Connecting the IPU computer and LAN

Be sure to use the direct-connected network cable to connect the IPU computer to the LAN.

The two ends of a direct-connected network cable can be randomly plugged into the IPU computer and the network devices (HUB, Exchanger, Router, etc.) respectively.

Adopt one of the two ways to finish the network connection according to the condition of the

hospital or doctor’s requirement.

5. Connect the printer with the IPU computer with specified cable and connect the power

cord properly.


3-27

3.6 Start-up

3.6.1 Inspection before Startup Check and make sure the marks on the relieve valve are on the same line, as shown in Figure

3-38. Change the relieve valve if the marks are not on the same line.

Figure 3-38 Marks on relieve valve

1. Check and make sure the sampling tube and the two pipes connected the probe wipe are

not bended and clogged at the place of the flatten cable clamp (at top of the sampling

assembly), as shown in Figure 3-39.

Figure 3-39 Sampling and probe wipe tubing

2. Before starting up, remove the right door of the analyzer, and then check and make sure

the tubes connecting the V25, V26 and the tee-connector of the volumetric tube are not

bended and clogged, as Figure 3-40 shows.

Marks on relieve valve


3-28

Figure 3-40 Tubing free from bending and clogging

3. Check and make sure the thick 50 tube connecting the V27 is not bended and clogged, as

Figure 3-41 shows.

Figure 3-41 Tubing free from bending and clogging

4. Check and make sure the two-way connector and the tee connector connecting tube 1 are

in the same distance towards the pinch valve, as shown in Figure 3-42 .

Check and make sure the tubes connecting the V25, V26 and the tee-connector of the volumetric tube are not bended and clogged

Check and make sure the thick 50 tube connecting the V27 is not bended and clogged


3-29

Figure 3-42 Checking the pinch valve

3.6.2 Start up for the first time

1. Turn on the analyzer, wait a moment and then a prompt will appear

on the task bar. It means the local-connection-related network interface connects the

BC-5380 already. Similarly, if the other prompt appears on the

task bar, it means the local-connection-2-related network interface doesn’t connect the

BC-5380, and it is available to connect the LAN of the hospital. If the two prompts are all

then, you should unplug the network cable connecting the

BC-5380 from the IPU computer, and then plug it into the other network interface; then,

plug the network cable connecting the LIS computer into the rest network interface.

2. Double click the “BC-5380 Hematology Analyzer” icon on the desktop of the IPU

computer to start up the software. Then, enter the user name “service” and the password

“Se s700” (note: there is a space between “e” and ”s”) into the login box, as shown in

Figure 3-43 , and then click “OK” to initialize the analyzer.

Tube 1

Tee connector

Two-way connector


3-30

Figure 3-43 Logging in

3. During the initialization, a dialog box “Skip fluidic initialization?” will pop up. Click “No” to

continue the initialization.

Figure 3-44 “Skip fluidic initialization?”

4. When initialization is finished, click “Menu” “Setup” “Communication” to enter the

screen shown below. Set the IP address and Port here, and then click “Ok” to save the

settings.


3-31

Figure 3-45 Communication setup

The IP address you set here should be the one of the LIS computer connecting the IPU computer. The Port you set here should be the interception port of the LIS computer. The IP address of external server cannot be 10.0.0.1 and 10.0.0.2, and format like 10.0.0.* is not recommended.

5. Before transmitting data, make sure the LIS computer connecting the IPU computer is

working. Thus, the IPU program could locate the destination for transmitting.

6. If the connection is established between the IPU computer and the LIS computer, the “LIS”

icon in the IPU screen will turn to colorful, as shown in Figure 3-46, indicating you can start

transmitting data now.


3-32

Figure 3-46 LIS communication

The data communication will be terminated automatically once the IPU software is closed. The LIS computer is the server terminal and the IPU software is the customer terminal. The IPU software keeps trying to connect after starting up, if it is intercepted correctly by the server terminal, then the connection will be established and ready for communication.

The IPU computer can connect LIS computer through cross network cable; connect LIS computer in the same network through devices like HUBs or exchangers; connect LIS computer in a different network through devices like routers.

3.6.3 Inspection after Startup 1. Click “Menu→ Service→ Version and Config. Information”, as shown in Figure 3-47 to

enter the version and configuration information screen shown in Figure 3-48.


3-33

Figure 3-47 Menu option

Figure 3-48 Version and config. Info.

2. Check and make sure the following items are the correct and specified version: Boot

Software, Application Software, Operating System, Driver Board FPGA, Driver Board MCU,

Data board FPGA, Fluidics Sequence and Algorithm Library, as shown in Figure 3-48, and

then close the message box.


3-34

The specified version here means the PC end software should be complied with that of the main unit end. Upgrade the main unit end software to match the PC end software if necessary.


3-35

3.7 Setup and Adjustment

3.7.1 Setting Parameters 1. At the main screen, click “Menu”→“Setup”→“Reagent” to enter the reagent screen where

you can set the expiration date for the reagents, as shown in Figure 3-49.

Figure 3-49 Clicking “Reagent”

2. Set the expiration date for the following reagents: “Diluent”, “LEO (I) Lyse”, “LEO (II) Lyse”, “LH Lyse” and “Cleanser”.


3-36

Figure 3-50 Setting the expiration date

3. At the main screen, click “Menu”→“Setup”→“Advanced” to enter the screen shown in

Figure 3-52.

Figure 3-51 Entering “Advance” screen


3-37

Figure 3-52 “Advance” screen

4. Click “Ambient Temp.” at the “Advanced” screen, as shown in Figure 3-52, and the

“Ambient Temp. Calibration” screen will pop up. Put the thermometer to about 5cm from

the right side of the analyzer (do not touch the analyzer). Read the measured value after 1

minute and enter it in the blank box at the screen. Click “Calculate New Difference” to get

the new deviation, and then click “Ok” to go back to the “Advanced” screen, as shown in

Figure 3-53.

Figure 3-53 “Ambient Temp. Calibration” screen

5. Click “Ambient Temp.” at the “Advanced” screen to go to the “Ambient Temp. Calibration” screen;

6. Read the measured temperature after 1 minute and make sure the deviation of the value

measured by the analyzer from that by the thermometer should be less than ±1℃. If not,

readjust the ambient temperature until the deviation is less than ±1℃.

7. Input the ambient temperature measured by the analyzer and the thermometer, and then


3-38

click “Ok” at the “Ambient Temp. Calibration” screen to go to the “Advanced” screen.

Click “Ok” to close the “Advanced” screen.

3.7.2 Adjusting Position 1. Press the [RUN] key. Then, the analyzer will run a background count once.

2. At the graph review screen, click the “Special info.” button as shown in Figure 3-54 to

enter the special information screen shown in Figure 3-55.

Figure 3-54 Clicking “Special info.”

Figure 3-55 “Special info.” Screen

3. Firstly, make sure the DIFF pulse data length is less than 200. Otherwise, do the

background count till the DIFF pulse data length is less than 200, as shown in Figure 3-55.


3-39

Use the cross-headed screw driver to remove the shielding cover of the volumetric board.

Make sure the WBC Start signal delay is within [2.5, 3] and the RBC Start signal delay is

within [4, 5.5]. If they are found out of the limit, fine adjust the distance between the tee

connector under the volumetric tube and the lower fixing plate of the volumetric board

according to the WBC and RBC Start signal delay, as shown in Figure 3-56. When WBC

start signal delay is less than 2.5s, fine adjust the WBC volumetric tube downwards; When

WBC start signal delay is more than 3s, fine adjust the WBC volumetric tube upwards;

When RBC start signal delay is less than 4s, fine adjust the RBC volumetric tube

downwards; When RBC start signal delay is more than 5.5s, stop adjusting the RBC

volumetric tube upwards. When the WBC and RBC Start signal delay are within the limit,

do the background count three times consecutively to check and make sure the two values

are within the range every time, and then record the values of the last time. Meanwhile,

check the WBC and RBC count time and calculate the mean time. Then, close the special

info. message box.

Be sure to adjust the position of the volumetric tube by your hand directly. Never pull the tee connector hard to adjust, otherwise, the tee connector may leak and the volumetric tube may be broken.

Figure 3-56 Distance under the volumetric tube

4. At the main screen, click “Menu”→“Setup”→“Advanced” to enter the screen shown in

Figure 3-58.


3-40

Figure 3-57 Entering “Advance” screen

Figure 3-58 “Advance” screen

5. Confirm whether the WBC and RBC count mean time that you recorded previously

complies with the time displayed in the screen, as shown in Figure 3-58. Enter the

recorded mean time if the time displayed doesn’t comply with the recorded one.


3-41

3.8 Testing Other Functions Click “Menu”→“Setup”→“Print” to enter the print screen. You can set the connection between

the IPU computer and the printer here, as shown in Figure 3-59.

Figure 3-59 Print Setup

Select printer

Click “OK”


3-42

3.9 Confirming Gain 3.9.1 HGB blank voltage After the transportation and initialization, the HGB blank voltage required may differ from the

factory settings.

Thus, confirming and adjusting the HGB blank voltage through gain setup is necessary.

1. Entering the setup screen

At the main screen, click “Menu→ Setup→Gain” to enter the screen.

Figure 3-60 Setup screen

2. Confirming the HGB gain

You can adjust the HGB blank voltage by adjusting the HGB gain. The HGB blank voltage shall

be set to 4.48-4.52 V, 4.50V is favorable. Do as follows to adjust:

At the “Gain” screen, click the adjusting button of the “HGB current value” to set the HGB

blank voltage to 4.48-4.52 V, 4.50V is favorable.

3.9.2 Gain of Optical System After the transportation, the gain of the DIFF channel of the optical system may differ from the

factory settings.

Thus, adjusting the gain of the optical system is necessary. Do as follows to adjust:

1. At the “Graph” screen, select the work mode as “WB-CBC+DIFF” and then perform the

background count once and make sure the background results meet the specified

HGB gain

HGB blank voltage


3-43

requirement.

2. At the “Table” review screen, select the background record run previously, and then click

“Optical” to enter the screen shown in Figure 3-62 .



3. Click “Calculate”, and then make sure the calculated FS and SS 0.1max total (the larger

Click “Calculate”

SS 0.1max total

FS 0.1max total

Click “OK”


3-44

number) is less than 50. Otherwise, you should clean the flow cell and DIFF bath at the

“Maintenance” screen. Then, repeat steps 1 to 3 until the number of FS and SS 0.1max

particles are less than 50. Then, click “Ok” to back to the main screen, as shown in Figure

3-62.

4. Run the calibrator on the analyzer. Select the test results from the “Graph” review screen,

and click “Optical” to go to the “Optical” screen. Click “Calculate”, and then check if the

gravity center position of FS and SS meet the following requirements (choose the one

have more particles within the FS 0.1max range): the FS gravity center should locate

within ±0.57 of the low angle target peak; the SS gravity center should locate within ±0.63

of the high angle target peak

5. If the position of FS and SS gravity centers do not meet the requirements, input the FS and

SS gain target values of the corresponding particle at the “Optical” screen, and then get

the gain values, as shown in Figure 3-63

Figure 3-63 “Optical” screen

6. Click “Ok” to close the “Optical” screen, and then click “Menu→ Setup→Gain”. Confirm

the values in the FS and SS boxes are the same with the FS and SS gain values. If not,

input the recorded FS and SS gain values as current FS and SS values, and then click

“Ok” to exit the screen, as shown in Figure 3-64


3-45

Figure 3-64 Setting optical gains

7. At the “Graph” review screen, select the work mode as “WB-CBC+DIFF”. Then, prepare

the standard particle sample at the ratio that dispenses 3 drops of standard particles into

1ml distilled water. Then, well mix the sample and run the sample once.

Be sure to use the distilled water to prepare the standard particle sample. Prepared standard particle sample should be run within 12 hours.

8. When finish running, enter the “Table” screen and select the standard particle sample just

run, and then click the “Optical” button, as shown in Figure 3-65.


3-46

Figure 3-65 “Table” review screen

9. At the “Optical” screen, click the “Calculate” button. Check if the following requirements

are met: FS gravity center within (16.68, 19.42); SS gravity center within (100.56, 107.92);

SS 0.1max width ≤15.21, and then click “OK” to exit the optical screen.

10. If the gravity center and the 0.1max width of the standard particle do not meet the

requirements, fine tune the FS and SS gain values at the “Gain” screen. Run the calibrator

and the 7um standard particles, until the following requirements are met: for the calibrator,

the gravity center of the low angle should be within ±1.51; the gravity center of the high

angle should be within ±2.4 from the target values; for the 7um standard particles, the

gravity center of low angle should be 18.05±1.37 (16.68, 19.42); gravity center of high

angle should be 104.24±3.68 (100.56, 107.92); low angle width ≤6.50, high angle width of

7um standard particles ≤15.21. If these requirements are met, name and save the values.


3-47

3.10 Calibration and Performance Test 3.10.1 Background Count Back to the “Graph” screen and perform the background count in “WB-CBC+DIFF” mode. The

background results shall meet the specified requirement: WBC:≤0.1×109/L, RBC:≤0.03×1012/L,

HGB:≤1g/L, HCT:≤0.5%, PLT:≤5×109/L.

3.10.2 Carryover Follow the procedure 3 instructed in section 9.3.1 of the Operator’s Manual to make sure the

carryover of the analyzer meets the requirements listed in the table below:

Parameter Carryover

WBC ≤0.5％

RBC ≤0.5％

HGB ≤0.6％

HCT ≤0.5％

PLT ≤1.0％

3.10.3 Reproducibility In the “AL-WB-CBC+DIFF” mode, “AL-WB-CBC” mode, “CT-PD-CBC+DIFF” mode and

“CT-PD-CBC” mode, make sure the reproducibility of the analyzer meets the requirements

specified in Appendix B 5.4 of the Operator’s Manual

The CV requirements for whole blood mode:

Para. Condition CV% / absolute deviation d (WB)

WBC (6.0～15.0)×109/L ≤2.0%

RBC (4.00～6.00)×1012/L ≤1.5%

HGB (110～180)g/L ≤1.5%

MCV (80～110)fL ≤1.0%

PLT (150～500)×109/L ≤4.0%

The CV requirements for predilute mode:

Para. Condition CV% / absolute deviation d (PD)

WBC (6.0～15.0)×109/L ≤4.0%

RBC (4.00～6.00)×1012/L ≤3.0%

HGB (110～180)g/L ≤3.0%

MCV (80～110)fL ≤2.0%

PLT (150～500)×109/L ≤8.0%


3-48

3.10.4 Calibration 1. Click “Menu→Calibration”, and then click “Calibrator” to enter the screen. Select the

calibration mode as “Whole Blood”; enter the lot No. and the expiration date of the

calibrator, and then enter the WBC, RBC, HGB, MCV and PLT targets of the calibrator into

the table.

Figure 3-66 Calibration (WB)

2. Well mix the calibrator and then open the cap. Press the [OPEN] key to open the sample

compartment and put the calibrator into the compartment. Close the compartment door

manually, and then press the [RUN] key, as Figure 3-67 shows. When you hear the beep,

the analyzer is starting to run automatically.


3-49

Figure 3-67 Calibrator sampling

Be sure to immerse the tip of the sample probe into the calibrator (1 ml at least).

3. Repeat running the calibrator for 11 times as instructed by Step 2.Then, click the “Start”

button. The setup of whole blood calibration factors is completed. Click “Diluent” and a

message box will pop up. Put the tube into the tube holder and put the loaded tube holder

into the sample compartment, and then close the compartment door manually. Then press

the [RUN] key to start dispensing the diluent, as Figure 3-68 shows. Dispense the diluent

into the tube for 6 times consecutively. Then click the “Cancel” button to close the

message box. Press the [OPEN] key to open the sample compartment and take out the

tube and the tube holder.


3-50

Figure 3-68 Dispensing diluent

4. Well mix the calibrator. Set the pipette to 120µL and load the tip, and then aspirate the

calibrator, as Figure 3-69 shows.

Figure 3-69 Pipette

5. Clean the tip of the pipette by lint-free tissue, and then dispense the aspirated calibrator

into the tube loading the diluent and well mix it by the pipette, as Figure 3-70 shows.

Click “Diluent”

Then click “Cancel”


3-51

Figure 3-70 Mix the sample

6. Go back to the “Calibrator” screen, and then select the calibration mode as “Predilute”

and enter the lot No. and the expiration date of the calibrator, and then enter the WBC,

RBC, HGB, MCV and PLT targets of the calibrator into the table.

Figure 3-71 Calibration (PD)

7. Present the vial of calibrator well mixed as instructed by Step 6 into the tube holder, and


3-52

then put the loaded tube holder into the sample compartment. Close the compartment door,

and then press the [RUN] key. When you hear the beep, the analyzer is starting to run

automatically.

Be sure to immerse the tip of the sample probe into the calibrator (at least 1ml).

8. Running the calibrator consecutively for 11 times as instructed by Step 8. The setup of

predilute calibration factors is completed.

3.10.5 Linearity See installation verification report of the BC-5380.


3-53

3.11 Software upgrade 3.11.1 Upgrading the PC installed software We only update the IPU software provided that it has been completely installed on the PC. The

update will not change users’ custom configuration including settings and database. Follow the

following steps to update the software:

1. Double-click the setup. exe icon to launch the update program;

2. A window will pop up as shown in Figure 3-72;

Figure 3-72 Selecting the updating mode

3. Click “Next” to go to the installation screen shown in Figure 3-73;


4. When the program finishes the installation, a message box shown in Figure 3-74 will pop

up;


3-54

Figure 3-74 Prompting to update the database

5. Click the “Next” button to update the database, as shown in Figure 3-75;

Figure 3-75 Installing database files

6. When all the database files are installed, a message box shown in Figure 3-76 will prompt


3-55

the completion of installation.

Figure 3-76 Finishing installation

To update the Version 1.3 BC-5100 software, select the “Install” mode to install the new version in the previous folder rather than update the outdated software.

If the system prompts for not enough space on disk during installation, select another disk to install and make sure the free space on that disk is at least 4G.

3.11.2 Upgrading the software of the main unit (analyzer) 1. Click” Menu→All Programs→BC-5380 Auto Hematology Analyzer→Analyzer

Upgrade” to launch the update software;

Before perform this step, make sure that the analyzer is powered on for at least 30 seconds. Otherwise, the connection to the main unit may fail after reboot or the update server may be uploaded again after being connected to the main unit.


3-56

Figure 3-77 Client update software interface

For PC using Windows Vista, the IPU software or the update client may loose connection to

the main unit after reboot. Right click on the “Analyzer Upgrade” item and choose “Run as administrator” to solve this problem, as shown in Figure 3-78;

Figure 3-78 Running the update client in Windows Vista

2. Click “Analyzer Upgrade” shown in Figure 3-77 and a message box will pop up. Enter the

user name “service” and the password “Se s700” (note: there is a space between “e”

and ”s”) in the message box, as shown in Figure 3-79;


3-57

Figure 3-79 Logging in the client update software

3. Ensure proper connection between the PC (IPU software end) and the analyzer (main unit

end). If the connection fails, a message box shown in Figure 3-80 will pop up;

Figure 3-80 Connection failure message box

If the connection is proper, the update software will automatically check if the version of the

update server is suitable. If the version meets the requirement, Step 4 will be skipped;

otherwise, the update software will upload the latest update server files to the analyzer, as

shown in Figure 3-81;

Figure 3-81 Automatically uploading the update server to the analyzer

4. After the update server files have been uploaded successfully, you will be asked to restart

the main unit. Click “Ok” to restart, as shown in Figure 3-82;


3-58

Figure 3-82 Reboot message box

At this time, the update program has already been disconnect from the analyzer, so Step 1 and 2 should be performed again to launch the update program.

After the update server program being successfully updated and main unit being rebooted, wait 2 minutes before logging on to the client.

5. After logging on, a message box shown in Figure 3-83 will pop up, asking you to choose

the directory of the update files;

Figure 3-83 Selecting the directory of the update files (1)

6. Click “Browse…” in the message box shown in Figure 3-83 and select the update

package folder “step1” (or other names as defined) generated by the installation CD as the

target directory, as shown in Figure 3-84;


3-59


7. Click “Ok” and the directory will be displayed in the box. Check if the displayed directory is

correct, as shown in Figure 3-85;


8. Click “Ok” to start uploading update files to the main unit, as shown in Figure 3-86;

Figure 3-86 Uploading the update files


3-60

During uploading the update files, if the message box of “Analyzer disconnected! Can not upgrade the analyzer!” pops up, check if the selected folder is correct, and then perform the update procedures again.

9. After finishing uploading, a message box of successful uploading shown in Figure 3-87 will

pop up;

Figure 3-87 Uploading files successfully

The uploading process takes 1 to 2 minutes according to the size of the update files.

10. Click “Ok” and wait for a while. A message box will pop up to show the items to be updated,

as shown in Figure 3-88;


3-61

Figure 3-88 Items to be updated

11. Click “Ok” to start updating, as shown in Figure 3-89;


During installation, if a message box of “Disconnected from the analyzer. Unable to finish updating! Please connect the analyzer and the PC end software and try to update again.” pops up, do not switch off the power supply of the analyzer and restart the updating process from the beginning after 5 minutes.


3-62

12. Click “Ok” in the message box prompting successful update, and then switch off and

restart the analyzer;

13. Update the folder step2 (including the main unit software, configuration files and fluidic

sequence) according to the same process, and then switch off the analyzer;

14. Use the screwdriver to remove the three cross-headed screws to open the top cover, and

then open the right door. Connect the J3 interface of the data board and the J11 interface

of the autoloader board using a dedicated cord, and then restart the main unit.

Use the dedicated cord in the accessory box provided by the manufacturer.

15. Update the folder step4 (including the hardware writing software) according to the same

process, and then switch off the analyzer.

Do not delete the files under ftp://10.0.0.2/3101 before updating and keep the power supply of the main unit on. Always update the hardware after Step2 is updated successfully.

After replacing the data board (including rootfs, material code: 051-000014-00), remember to perform all the steps to update the software at the main unit end.

4-1

4 Fluidic System

4.1 Introduction of Fluidic Parts

4.1.1 Piercing needle Pierces the evacuated blood collection tube; aspirates and dispenses the blood sample.

4.1.2 Probe Wipe Washes the interior and exterior of the sample probe

4.1.3 Pumps P1: provides pressure for the pressure chamber.

P2: empties the DIFF bath and vacuum chamber and creates vacuum.

P3: empties the probe wipe, WBC bath and RBC bath.

4.1.4 Syringes Aspiration-Syringe: full volume 100 µl; it aspirates and dispenses samples and aspirates

the second diluted sample.

Diluent-Syringe: full volume 10ml; it dispenses diluent into the WBC and RBC bath and

supplies the diluent to the probe wipe.

Lyse-Syringe: full volume 2.5ml; 3 syringes are driven by a motor; it dispenses M-53Leo

(I), M-53Leo (II) and M-53H.

Sheath-Syringe: full volume 10ml; it dispenses the sheath into the flow cell, cleans the

flow cell and DIFF bath, and is also be used for sample preparation.

Sample-Syringe: full volume 250µl; it dispenses the sample into the flow cell.

4.1.5 Valves Fluidic valve: turns on and off by electromagnetic force; controls the fluidic or air flow

direction.

Pinch valve: turns on and off by electromagnetic force; starts/stops the fluidic flow.

Pressure switch: monitors the pressure of the DIFF channel.

4.1.6 Baths WBC bath: consists of a front bath, back bath and aperture. The WBC sample mixes and

reacts here and it is used for the measurement of HGB and WBC.

RBC bath: consists of a front bath, back bath and aperture. The RBC sample mixes and

Fluidic System

4-2

reacts here and it is used for the measurement of RBC/PLT.

DIFF bath: DIFF sample mixes and reacts here.

Vacuum chamber: creates and stores stable vacuum for counting the WBC and RBC by

impedance method; cleans the back bath and empties the volumetric tube.

Pressure chamber: creates and stores stable pressure to generate bubbles for the baths.

WBC isolation chamber: provides air buffer to isolate outside interference

RBC isolation chamber: provides air buffer to isolate outside interference

4.1.7 Volumetric tube WBC volumetric tube: volume 500ul; it measures the volume of the WBC sample

RBC volumetric tube: volume 300ul; it measures the volume of the RBC sample

4.1.8 Filters Filter of WBC volumetric tube: it filters the air entered the WBC volumetric tube

Filter of RBC volumetric tube: it filters the air entered the RBC volumetric tube

P1 filter: it filters the air entered the air pump.

Fluidic System

4-3

4.2 Fluidic System

4.2.1 Reagent volume required Sample analysis for a single sample each time

2 analysis modes: Open vial-whole blood mode and open vial-predilute mode.

Table 4-1 Reagent volume required when running samples

Volume of single analysis Reagents Name

CBC+DIFF CBC

M-50 Diluent M-53D Diluent ≤45mL ≤34mL

M-53LEO(I) Lyse 1.1ml 0

M-53LEO(II) Lyse 0.135ml 0 M-53 Lyse

M-53LH Lyse 0.5ml

Normal startup function (excluding background)

Reagents volume required:

Table 4-2 Reagents volume required when starting up normally

Reagents Name Volume of normal startup

M-50 Diluent M-53D Diluent 89ml

M-53LEO(I) Lyse 0

M-53LEO(II) Lyse 0 M-53 Lyse

M-53LH Lyse 2ml

Cleanser M-53 Cleanser 0

Abnormal startup function (excluding background)


Table 4-3 reagents volume required when starting up abnormally

Reagents Name Volume of abnormal startup


M-53LEO(I) Lyse 0


M-53LH Lyse 2ml

Cleanser M-53 Cleanser 0

Starting up a drained system (after the Prepare to Ship procedure has be done)(excluding

startup background)


Fluidic System

4-4

Table 4-4 reagents volume required for starting up a drained system (after the Prepare to Ship procedure has been done)

Reagents Name

Volume of starting up a

drained system (after the

prepare to ship procedure

has been done)


M-53LEO(I) Lyse 12ml

M-53LEO(II) Lyse 12ml M-53 Lyse

M-53LH Lyse 12ml

Cleanser M-53 Cleanser 8ml

Normal shutdown function


Table 4-5 reagents volume required when normally shutting down

Reagents Name Volume of normal shutdown


M-53LEO(I) Lyse 0


M-53LH Lyse 0

Cleanser M-53 Cleanser 29ml

Fluidic System

4-5

4.2.2 Fluidic System Drawing

Figure 4-1 Fluidic system (Whole Blood Mode)

Figure 4-2 Fluidic system (Predilute Mode)

Fluidic System

4-6

4.2.3 WBC Measurement Procedures

WBC Count/BASO channel

The reagents used include:

M-53LH Lyse: it lyses erythrocytes and platelets and separates basophiles from other WBCs.

Diluent: it is used for cleaning and provides the environment for reaction and measurement.

Principles: Electrical Impedance Method

Parameters: WBC, BASO# and BASO%

Diagrams: WBC histogram

Dilute ratio: 1:500

Metering volume: 500

Function description: 6µl blood sample, 2.5ml diluent and 0.5ml LH Lyse are mixed in the

bath, and then they react. After reaction, the sample flows to the back bath via the

aperture, driven by the vacuum, and the blood cells are counted when passing through

the aperture. The volume of the sample is measured by the volumetric tube.

DIFF channel


LEO (I) and LEO (II): they lyse RBCs and differentiate WBCs into 4 sub-populations.

Diluent: cleans the fluidic system and provides sheath.

Principles: flow cytometry and semiconductor laser scatter

Parameters: MONO#, MONO%, LYMPH#, LYMPH %, NEUT#, NEUT%, EOS# and

EOS%

Diagrams: 4-DIFF scattergram

Dilute ratio: 1:138

Metering volume: 127µl

Function description: 0.6ml Leo (I) is dispensed into the bath as the initial volume, and

then 9µl blood sample and 0.6ml Leo (I) are dispensed. After the sample is well mixed and

reacts with the reagent for a while, 0.135ml Leo (II) is dispensed. After the sample reacts

with the reagents for a while, the sample is driven to the bottom of the flow cell and the

sheath flow is enabled. Then the sample is dispensed into the flow cell by the sample

syringe for measurement.

4.2.4 RBC/PLT Measurement Procedures

Fluidic System

4-7

RBC/PLT channel


Diluent: dilutes samples, washes, provides a conductive environment and processes the cells

Principles: Electrical Impedance Method

Parameters: RBC and PLT

Diagrams: RBC histogram and PLT histogram

Dilute ratio: 1:20000

Metering volume: 300µl

Function description: 52.08µl sample dilution (1:417.7) is aspirated by the sample probe

from the WBC bath. The sample probe then moves to the RBC bath and mixes the

sample with 2.5ml diluent to dilute the sample to the ratio of 1:20000. Then, the mixed

sample is driven into the back bath through the aperture by the vacuum, and the blood

cells are counted when passing through the aperture. The volume of the sample is

measured by the volumetric tube.

4.2.5 HGB Measurement Procedures

HGB channel


Diluent: dilutes samples and washes

LH lyse: lyses the red blood cells and combines the hemoglobin

Principles: Colorimetry

Parameters: HGB

Dilute ratio: 1:500

The HGB unit calculates the concentration of HGB by comparing the light passing through

the sample with the blank reference reading.

Fluidic System

4-8

4.3 Sequence of Whole Blood CBC+DIFF Measurement

4.3.1 Sampling and dispensing procedures A. Aspirating samples and dispensing samples into the DIFF bath

20µl sample is aspirated by the aspirat① ion syringe from the sample tube, and then the

sample probe ascends while its exterior is being cleaned.

The sample probe moves to above the DIFF bath.②

The sample probe descends into the DIFF bath and dispenses ③ 9µl sample.

B. First Diluting

The sample pr① obe ascends from the DIFF bath, meanwhile the probe exterior is cleaned.

The sample probe moves to above the WBC bath②

The sample probe descends into the WBC bath, and then dispenses ③ 6µl sample. The

dispensed sample is diluted by the 2.5ml diluent that is already there to form the 1:417.7

dilution.

C. Cleaning the residual sample

The sample probe ascends from the WBC bath, meanwhile the probe exterior is cleaned.①

The sample probe dispenses diluent into the probe wipe from the top to wash off the residual ②

sample.

The sample probe descends again into the WBC bath and aspirates the diluted sample.③

D. RBC second diluting

The sample probe ascends from the WBC bath, meanwhile the probe exterior is cleaned.①

The sample probe moves above the RBC bath.②

The sample p③ robe descends into the RBC bath, and then dispenses 1ml diluted sample. The

dispensed sample is diluted by the diluent that is already in the bath to form the 1:20000

dilution.

E. Sample probe returning to home position

The sample probe ascends from the RBC① bath, meanwhile the probe exterior is cleaned.

The sample probe returns to the home position.②

Fluidic System

4-9

A B

C D

E

Figure 4-3 Dispensing procedures of sample probe

Fluidic System

4-10

4.3.2 DIFF Channel

Cleaning the reaction bath before dispensing samples（0 - 6s）

During this period:

The DIFF bath is drained. Then, 0.6ml LEO (I) Lyse is dispensed into the DIFF bath and then

the bath is drained again. The sheath syringe and sample syringe aspirate the diluent.

1. During 0-1.5s, valve V38 is energized and waste pump 2 operates to drain the DIFF bath.

2. During 2.8-3.8s, valve 05 is energized and the lyse syringe dispenses 0.6ml LEO (I) Lyse

into the DIFF bath to clean it.

3. During 4.5-6s, valve V38 is energized and waste pump 2 operates to drain the DIFF bath

and then the DIFF bath is ready to receive sample.

4. Valve 39 is pinched. The sheath syringe and sample syringe aspirate diluent respectively.

Sample dispensing, mixing and DIFF sample preparation (6-19.8s)

During this period:

1. Dispensing LEO (I) Lyse for the first time: valve V05 is energized and 1.1ml pre-heated

LEO (I) Lyse is dispensed into the DIFF bath via the 2.5ml lyse syringe.

2. Sample dispensing and mixing: The 100ul aspiration syringe dispenses 9ul sample into

the DIFF bath.

3. Mixing by bubbling: valve V09 is energized to mix the sample with the LEO(I) lyse by

bubbling.

4. Dispensing LEO (II) Lyse: valve V06 is energized and 0.135ml pre-heated LEO (II) Lyse is

dispensed into the DIFF bath via the 2.5ml Lyse syringe.

5. Mixing sample by bubbling: valve 09 is energized to mix the sample by bubbling.

6. DIFF sample preparation: valve V39 is de-energized to open the path between the DIFF

bath and the syringe. Valve 22 is energized and valve 23 keeps de-energized. The

sheath syringe aspirates 1.2ml sample from the DIFF bath.

When the sample preparation is done, the status of the fluidic system of the DIFF unit is shown

in Figure 4-4. The tubing highlighted in red is the part that holds the sample.

The sheath flow of the DIFF channel and the measurement (19.8-40.5s)

During this period:

1. Sheath fluid forming: V23 and V24 are energized. The sheath syringe dispenses the

diluent into the flow cell at a certain speed to form the sheath.

2. Dispensing the sample at a high speed: The sample syringe dispenses the sample into the

flow cell at a high speed.

3. Measurement: when the sample fluid is stable, the sample syringe dispenses the sample

Fluidic System

4-11

into the flow cell at a low speed while the sheath syringe dispenses the diluent into the flow

cell to surround the sample. Thus, the sheath flow passes through the flow cell at a stable

speed for measurement.

The fluidic system status of this period is shown in Figure 4-5.

Figure 4-4 Fluidic status of DIFF channel sample preparation

Fluidic System

4-12

Figure 4-5 Fluidic status of DIFF channel measurement

Cleaning of DIFF channel (40.5-59s)

During this period:

1. The sample surrounded by the sheath passes through the flow cell. Then, the flow cell and

the sample probe are washed.

2. Cleaning the sample preparation tubing: valve V22 are energized and valve V23 and V24

keep energized. The sheath syringe dispenses diluent to clean the sample preparation

tubing. Meanwhile, valve 38 is energized and waste pump 2 operates to drain the DIFF

bath.

3. Cleaning the DIFF bath

a. Dispensing 1.7ml diluent for cleaning: the sheath syringe dispenses 1.7ml diluent into

the DIFF bath through V21 and V22 to clean the bath.

b. Draining: valve 38 is energized and waste pump 2 operates to drain the DIFF bath.

Meanwhile, the sheath syringe aspirates 1.5ml diluent.

c. Dispensing 1.5ml diluent for soaking: valve V22, V23 and V24 are energized. The

sheath syringe dispenses 1.5ml diluent to soak the DIFF bath.

Fluidic System

4-13

4.3.3 WBC/HGB Channel

HGB background, cleaning, draining volumetric tube and sample distribution (0-18.2s)

1. 5s HGB background test.

2. Creating vacuum: the vacuum used for draining the volumetric tube and cleaning the back

bath is provided by the vacuum chamber. Thus, the waste pump is needed to create the

vacuum in the vacuum chamber.

3. Zapping and cleaning the back bath.

4. Draining the WBC bath: valve V36 is energized and waste pump 3 operates to drain the

WBC bath.

5. Draining the WBC volumetric tube: valve V25 and V31 are energized to drain the

volumetric tube for three times.

Figure 4-6 Fluidic status when draining WBC volumetric tube

6. WBC sample distribution:

a. At 9.4s, valve V02, V03 are energized; and at 9s, V27is energized and the waste

pump operates. The sample probe ascends while the diluent syringe dispenses the

diluent to clean the exterior of the sample probe.

b. Dispensing initial volume and sample probe moving to the WBC bath: valve V03 is

energized. The 10ml diluent syringe dispenses a small portion of the diluent into the

WBC bath as the initial volume. The sample probe moves to the WBC bath, and then

descends into the WBC bath.

c. Dispensing the blood sample: the aspiration syringe dispenses 6 µl sample into the

WBC bath while mixing the sample by bubbling.

Fluidic System

4-14

Dispensing lyse and mixing (18.3-25s)

1. The sample probe ascending: the sample probe ascends from the WBC bath, meanwhile

its exterior is washed.

2. Dispensing HGB lyse and mixing: valve V07 is energized. The 2.5ml lyse syringe

dispenses the LH Lyse into the WBC bath and the samples mixes with the lyse by bubbling.

The system waits for the sample becoming stable.

Creating vacuum (18.1-25s)

Vacuum is the power that drives the fluid movement. Waste pump 2 pumps out the air in the

vacuum chamber to create the vacuum between -300HPa and -260HPa.

Counting and bath cleaning

1. WBC counting: valve V33 is energized to start counting. Driven by the stable vacuum

（-300 to -260 HPa）, the sample in the front bath flows to the back bath in the direction

shown in Figure 4-7. The sample volume measured is determined by the diluent volume

that flows between the two photocouplers of the WBC volumetric tube..

2. HGB measurement: HGB measurement starts at 41s.

3. Cleaning the front bath twice.

4. Cleaning the back bath: valve V29 and V31 are energized. Driven by the vacuum, the

diluent enters the volumetric tube via valve V29, and then passes through valve V31 and

enters the vacuum chamber. Then, valve V31, V33 and V13 are energized. The diluent

flows into the back bath through the volumetric tube to drain the waste in the back bath.

Driven by waste pump 2, the waste in the vacuum chamber is drained through V37.

Figure 4-7 Fluidic status when WBC counting

Fluidic System

4-15

Figure 4-8 Fluidic status when cleaning the WBC back bath

4.3.4 RBC/PLT Channel

Cleaning, volumetric tube draining (0-18.2s)

1. Creating vacuum: the vacuum used for draining the RBC volumetric tube and cleaning the

back bath is all provided by the vacuum chamber. Thus, waste pump P2 is used to create

the vacuum in the vacuum chamber.

2. Zapping and cleaning the back bath: zap the RBC aperture, and then open V30, V34 and

V14 to clean the back bath and drain the bubbles caused by zapping.

3. Draining the RBC bath and volumetric tube: valve V35 is energized and waste pump P3

operates to drain the RBC bath. Then, V26 and V32 are energized together to drain the

volumetric tube for three times.

4. First dilution and aspiration: during 0-8.7s, the sample probe finishes sampling and sample

is dispensed into the DIFF bath. Thus, the first dilution is formed during the 8.8-20.5s

period and then a portion of the diluted sample is aspirated back into the sample probe.

Fluidic System

4-16

Figure 4-9 Fluidic status when draining RBC volumetric tube

Second diluting and mixing (18.4-25s)

1. Aspirating the first dilution: the aspiration syringe aspirates the sample diluted at the ratio

of 1:417.6 from the WBC bath, and then ascends while its exterior is being cleaned.

2. Sample probe moving to RBC bath and dispensing initial volume and the sample: the

sample probe moves to the RBC bath. Valve V03 and V08 are energized at the same time,

and the diluent syringe dispenses a certain amount of diluent into the RBC bath and then

the sample probe descends into the RBC bath. Valve V01 and V03 are energized and the

10ml diluent syringe dispenses the first dilution into the RBC bath to form the second

dilution at the ratio of 1:20000.

3. Mixing: Valve V11 is energized. Driven by the pressure, the sample is mixed by bubbling

for three times.

Creating vacuum (18.1-25s)

The stable vacuum is created to drive the fluidics when running samples.

Waste pump 2 pumps out the air in the vacuum chamber to create the vacuum between

-300HP and -260HP.

Counting and bath cleaning

The fluidic status of RBC counting is shown in Figure 4-10.

1. RBC counting: valve V34 is energized to start counting. Driven by the stable vacuum

Fluidic System

4-17

（-300 to -260 HP）, the sample in the front bath flows to the back bath in the direction

shown in the following figure. The sample volume measured is determined by the diluent

volume that flows between the two photocouplers of the WBC volumetric tube.

Figure 4-10 Fluidic status of RBC counting

Figure 4-11 Fluidic status when cleaning the back bath and draining the front bath

2. Draining the front bath and cleaning: Valve V35 is energized and waste pump pumps the

remaining sample out of the RBC bath. The diluent syringe dispenses 3ml diluent into the

RBC bath for soaking.

Fluidic System

4-18

3. Cleaning the back bath: The vacuum of -400 to -300HP is created in the vacuum chamber.

Valve V30 and V32 are energized. The volumetric tube is cleaned and bubbles are

discharged from the top of the volumetric tube. Vale V32, V14, V34 and V30 are energized

to clean the back bath, and then the waste is discharged.

4.3.5 Sequence of Predilute Mode CBC+DIFF Measurement In the predilute mode, the sample needs to be first manually diluted at the ratio of 1:10. The

sequence inside the analyzer has no great difference with the whole blood mode.

4.3.6 Sequence of CBC Measurement In the CBC mode, the DIFF channel is not used and the sample dispensing procedures are

also changed.

Sampling and sample dispensing procedures of CBC Mode

A. Aspirating sample and dispensing sample into the WBC bath

15µl sample is aspirated by the aspiration sy① ringe, and then the sample probe ascends

meanwhile its exterior is cleaned and the sample probe dispenses 3µl sample into the probe

wipe.

The sample probe moves to above the WBC bath②

The sample probe descends into the WBC bath and dispenses 6µl sample in③ to the WBC

bath.

B. Cleaning the sample remains

The sample probe ascends from the WBC bath, meanwhile its exterior is cleaned.①

The sample probe dispenses cleanser into the probe wipe from the top to wash off the ②

residual sample..

The sample probe descends③ again into the WBC bath and aspirates the diluted sample.

C. RBC second dilution

The sample probe ascends from the WBC bath meanwhile its exterior is cleaned.①

The sample probe moves to above the RBC bath.②

The sample probe descends into the RBC bath, and ③ then dispenses 1ml diluted sample into

RBC bath, where the sample is further diluted by the diluent that is already there to form the

second dilution at the ratio of 1:20000.

D. Sample probe returning to home position

The sample probe ascends from the RBC b① ath meanwhile its exterior is cleaned.

Fluidic System

4-19

The sample probe returns to the home position.②

A B

C D

Figure 4-12 Dispensing procedures of sample probe

5-1

5 Hardware System

The BC-5380 hardware system consists of the boards, power execution parts, sensors,

switches and cables. Their relationship is shown below.

Mother Board

Data Board

Drive BoardPower Supply Board

Volume mesure board and press

sensors

FSPre-amp

board

SSPre-amp

board

Liquid level sensor

Laser board

Auto-sample board

Indication Board

Key Board

Vavles and pumps

Fan

Sample drive

motors

Syringe drive

motors

WBC Pole

RBC Pole

Door driver

Optics couple sensor

Jam drive motor

Feed drive motor

AC Power Switch HGB Module

Heater for optics

systemAnd

Temp. sensors

Heater for Diff pool and

temp. sensors

Ambience

temp. sensor

Sensor on right door

Sensor on optics system

NetPort

BC-5380 Hardware System

Figure 5-1 BC-5380 hardware system structure

Note:

In the figure, the thin arrows represent the cable connections; the thick arrows (connecting the

data board and the driver board) represent the plugboard connections; the square boxes

Hardware System

5-2

represent the boards and the ellipses represent the components.

The boards of the BC-5380 and their functions are shown in the table below.

Table 5-1 Boards of the BC-5380 and their functions

No. Name Functions

1 Data board CPU basic system + FPGA + A/D + Analog

channel

2 Drive board MCU+FPGA+ Valves and pumps driving +

Photocoupler detecting + Temperature and

pressure monitoring

3 Mother board Power distribution and centralized wiring.

Plugboard supported

4 Laser control board Laser creating and controlling

5 FS pre-amplification

board

Collecting and pre-amplifying the low-angle

scattered light

6 SS pre-amplification

board

Collecting and pre-amplifying the high-angle

scattered light

7 Volumetric board Creating the volumetric signals of RBC and

WBC channels; the vacuum and pressure

sensors and amplifying the detected signals

8 Indicator board Buzzer and indicator

9 Power board Supply D5V,P12V,P24V,A±12V power

Supply AC120V/50Hz zapping power

10 Liquid-level board Liquid-level detection of reagents

11 Autoloader board Sample transport, mix control,

electromagnetic valve control

12 Key board [RUN] key and [OPEN] key

Hardware System

5-3

5.1 Mother board

5.1.1 Introduction The function of the mother board is to realize power distribution and centralized wiring of board

input/output.

5.1.2 Board Composition The mother board is composed of two slots and several connectors. The two slots are for

connecting the data board and the drive board respectively; while the connectors are for

various input/output signals.

Function

Power interface

Slot for data board

Slot for drive board

Connectors for board signals (autoloader board, laser control board, pre-amp board,

volumetric board, liquid level checker, key board and indicator board, etc.)

Connectors for component (valves, pumps, motors, heaters, fan, HGB module,

independent key, optics, etc.) signals

Communication interface (COM port and LAN port)

Block diagram

Hardware System

5-4

Sockets for Drive Board

Socket for

power( Autosample board)

Sockets for vavles,pumps,motors,heat

ers

Sockets for

PowerSupply

Socktes for Data Board

Socket for laser control board

Sockets for optics sensor

Socket for valume mesure and press

control board

Sockets for pre-amp. board

Socket for Indicator and key board

DB9(rs232)

Power filter& indicator

Isolate transfoemer

rs232 int. driver

Data borad power

Drive boatd power

Socket for Temp. sensor

Socket for HGB module

Socket for Auto-sample

Socket for fan

RS422 int driver

RJ45 Socket for suck key and right door chec

ker

Socket for Liq.level checker

Figure 5-2 Function of mother board

Interface definition

List of connectors

Table 5-2 List of connectors

SN. PIN Number Function Description

PA1 96 Data board connector, digital signals

PA2 96 Data board connector, analog signals

PB1 96 Drive board connector, digital signals and part of optics signals

PB2 96 Drive board connector, part of optics signals and motor drive

Hardware System

5-5

signals

PB3 96 Drive board connector, drive signals of motors, valves, pumps,

and heaters

J1 8 RS-232 LAN port

J2 9 Reserved for COM port debugging

J3 10 Multi-functional JTAG port, debugging or upgrading MCU

programs of autoloader board

J4 4 RS-422 COM port, COM port of autoloader board

J5 8 Connector for the key board and indicator board

J6 6 Right door switch, and optical shielding box switch

J7 6 Laser control board connector

J8 8 Reserved for side fluorescence channel (SF)

J9 8 side scatter channel (SS)

J10 8 Connector for forward scatter channel (FS)

J11 5 HGB module connector

J12 8 A+/- 12V connector

J13 3 AC120V connector

J14 6 Temperature sensor connector

J15 12 Volumetric board connector

J16 34 Connector for level sensors and associated photocouplers

J17 No in use

J18 24 Connector for photocouplers 1-6

J19 24 Connector photocouplers 7-12

J20 24 Connector photocouplers 13-18

J21 3 Reserved for DC mix motor

J22 8 Connector stepping motors 1-2




J26 No in use

J27 4 Connector for heater 2

J28 4 Connector for heater 1

J29 20 Connector for pumps 1-7

J30 20 Connector for valves 1-10




J34 2 Fan connector

J35 10 Connector for P12V and P24V

Hardware System

5-6

J36 6 Connector for autoloader board power

J37 4 D+5V connector

Data board slots (PA1 and PA2)

Data board slots are two 96pin DIN 41612 connectors.

Connector type: AMP VME female connector 3*32PIN vertical connection

Model: 5535043-4

Table 5-3 Definition of PA1 for mother board

Column A Column B Column C

1 D+5V D+5V D+5V

2 D+5V D+5V D+5V

3 D+5V D+5V D+5V

4 D+5V D+5V D+5V

5 D+5V D+5V D+5V

6 DGND DGND DGND

7 DGND DGND DGND

8 DGND DGND DGND

9 DGND DGND DGND

10 DGND DGND DGND

11 DGND DGND DGND

12 TP_TX+ PWFBOUT TP_RX+

13 TP_TX- DGND TP_RX-

14 DGND DGND DGND

15 DGND DGND DGND

16 TMS_TO_DRV TMS_TO_AS UART3_TO_PC

17 TCK_TO_DRV TCK_TO_AS UART3_TO_DAT

18 DATA_TO_DRV DATA_TO_AS DGND

19 DATA_FROM_DRV DATA_FROM_AS DGND

20 DGND UART1_TO_DAT+ UART1_TO_AS+

21 DGND UART1_TO_DAT- UART1_TO_AS-

22 UART0_TO_DRV DGND DGND

23 UART0_TO_DAT DGND DGND

24 DGND DGND #SUCK_KEY

25 DGND #VM_ON DGND

26 DGND #RBC_START #BUZ

27 DGND #RBC_STOP #COUNT_KEY

28 DGND #WBC_START FAULT

29 DGND #WBC_STOP READY

Hardware System

5-7

30 DGND DGND OPTI_DOOR

31 DGND #LASER_ON #RIGHT_DOOR

32 DGND DGND #INSERT_DOOR

Table 5-4 Definition of PA2 for mother board

Column A Column B Column C

1 AGND AGND AGND

2 AGND LASER_CURT AGND

3 AGND AGND AGND

4 AGND AGND AGND

5 AGND AGND AGND

6 AGND AGND AGND

7 AGND AGND AGND

8 AGND AGND AGND

9 AGND AGND AGND

10 AGND AGND AGND

11 AGND NC AGND

12 AGND AGND A GND

13 AGND SS AGND

14 AGND AGND AGND

15 AGND FS AGND

16 AGND AGND AGND

17 AGND HGB_IN AGND

18 AGND AGND AGND

19 AGND HGB+ AGND

20 AGND HGB- AGND

21 AGND A-12V A-12V

22 AGND A-12V A-12V

23 AGND A+12V A+12V

24 AGND A+12V A+12V

25 AGND A+12V A+12V

26 NC NC NC

27 NC A+70V NC

28 NC NC NC

29 NC NC NC

30 NC AC120_B NC

31 NC NC NC

32 AC120_A NC NC

Hardware System

5-8

Connector J1 for LAN port

Connector type: RJ-45 female connector with iron casing

Model: 5406217-1

Table 5-5 Definition of J1 for mother board

Definition Description

1 ET_TP+ Transmit, positive

2 ET_TP- Transmit, negative

3 ET_RP+ Receive, positive

4 ET-NGP Receive, virtual ground

5 ET-NGP Receive, virtual ground

6 ET_RP- Receive, negative

7 ET-NGR Receive, virtual ground

8 ET-NGR Receive, virtual ground

Connector J2 for COM port

Connector type: DB9 male / female connector

Table 5-6 Definition of J2 for mother board (male connector)

Pin Definition Description

1 NC

2 RXD/TXD Send/receive

3 TXD/RXD Receive/send

4 NC

5 GND

6-9 NC

Table 5-7 Definition of J2 for mother board (female connector)


1 GND

2 NC

3 TXD/RXD Send/receive

4 RXD/TXD Receive/send

5-9 NC

Connector J3 for JTAG

Connector type: HEADER WTB 2.54MM DIP2*5 TOP 70246SERIES

Model: 70246-1001, MOLEX

Hardware System

5-9



1 D3V3

2 GND

3 GND

4 TCK JTAG clock

5 TMS JTAG status select

6 DATA_FROM_AS JTAG data to data board

7 DATA_TO_AS JTAG data to drive board

8 NC

9 GND

10 NC

Connector J6 for aspirate key and door switch on/off checking

Connector type: HEADER WTB 2MM DIP1*6SIDE PHSERIES

Model: B6B-PH-K 2MM 'JST'



1 #SUCK_KEY NC

2 GND

3 #RIGHT_DOOR Right door switch on/off

4 GND

5 OPTI_DOOR optical shielding box switch

6 GND

Connector J4 for autoloader board signal


Model: B4B-PH-K 'JST'



1 UART2_TO_AS+ 5474 serial port 2 to positive end of

sample board data

2 UART2_TO_AS- 5474 serial port 2 to negative end of

sample board data

3 UART2_TO_DAT+ sample board serial port to positive

end of 5474 serial port data

4 UART2_TO_DAT- sample board serial port to negative

end of 5474 serial port data

Hardware System

5-10

Connector J5 for indicator board

Connector type: HEADER WTB 2MM DIP1*8 TOP PHSERIES

Model: B8B-PH-K 'JST' 2MM



1 D+5V

2 #COUNT_KEY Start sampling switch, effective low

3 #INSERT_DOOR Insert STAT switch, effective low

4 FAULT Fault status indicator light, effective high

5 READY Ready status indicator light, effective high

6 NC

7 #BUZ Buzzer driven

8 GND

Connector J7 for laser board

Connector type: HEADER WTB 2.5MM DIP1*6SIDE XHSERIES

Model: B-6B-XH-A 'JST'



1 NC

2 AGND

3 LASER_CURT Laser current feedback, analog signal

4 A+12V

5 #LASER_ON Laser source on/off signal, effective low

6 D+5V

Connector J9 and J10 for pre-amplification board

Connector type: HEADER WTB 2.5MM DIP1*8SIDE XHSERIES

Model: B8B-XH-K 'JST'

Hardware System

5-11

Table 5-13 Definition of J9, J10 for mother board


1 AGND

2 FS/SS FS/SS signal input, analog signal

3 AGND

4 AGND

5 A-12V

6 AGND Connecting inner shield of cable

7 A+12V

8 MHOLE Connecting external shield of cable

Connector J11 for HGB module





1 HGB+ HGB light drive,

positive

2 HGB- HGB light drive,

negative

3 HGB_IN HGB feedback

4 AGND

5 AGND

Connector J12 for analog A12V

Connector type: HEADER WTB 4.2MM DIP2*4 SIDE, 5566 serial

Model: 1-794509-1 'JST'



1 AGND

2 NC

3 NC

4 NC

5 A+12V

6 AGND

7 AGND

8 A-12V

Connector J13 for AC120V

Hardware System

5-12

Connector type: HEADER WTB 2.5MM DIP1*3 TOP XHSERIES

Model: B-3B-XH-A 'JST' 2.5MM



1 AC120V_A A end of 120V AC

2 NC

3 AC120V_B B end of 120V AC

Drive board slots: PB1, PB2 and PB3

DIN41612, 96PIN female

Definition of PB1-PB3 signals:

Note: On the mother board, PB1 is placed laterally, with column A under it, and row 1 at left

side. Since the drive board and mother board is connected vertically, column A should be

arranged at the nearest joint side of board.

Table 5-17 Definition of PB1 for mother board

column A column B column C

1 HT1_SA HT1_SB AMBI_SA

2 HT2_SA HT2_SB AMBI_SB

3 POSI_PRESS NEGA_PRESS DGND

4 DGND DGND DGND

5 DGND DGND DGND

6 DGND DGND DGND

7 DGND DGND DGND

8 DGND DGND DGND

9 DGND DGND DGND

10 DGND DGND DGND

11 DGND DGND DGND

12 D+5V D+5V D+5V

13 D+5V D+5V D+5V

14 D+5V D+5V D+5V

15 D+5V D+5V D+5V

16 D+5V D+5V D+5V

17 DGND DGND DGND

18 #LIQ1 #LIQ2 TMS_TO_DRV

19 #LIQ3 #LIQ4 TCK_TO_DRV

20 #LIQ5 #LIQ6 DATA_TO_DRV

21 #LYSE_SENSOR #WASTE_SENSOR DATA_FROM_DRV

22 #LS_ON DGND DGND

Hardware System

5-13

23 DGND DGND DGND

24 OP17_CTRL OP17_STS UART0_TO_DRV

25 OP18_CTRL OP18_STS UART0_TO_DAT

26 OP19_CTRL OP19_STS DGND

27 OP20_CTRL OP20_STS DGND

28 OP1_CTRL OP1_STS OP2_CTRL

29 OP2_STS OP3_CTRL OP3_STS











6 OP16_CTRL OP16_STS DM_ON

7 DGND DGND DGND

8 NC NC NC

9 P+24V SM1_AP SM1_AP

10 P+24V SM1_AN SM1_AN

11 P+24V SM1_BP SM1_BP

12 P+24V SM1_BN SM1_BN













25 PGND SM5_AP SM5_AP

Hardware System

5-14

26 PGND SM5_AN SM5_AN

27 PGND SM5_BP SM5_BP

28 PGND SM5_BN SM5_BN















9 PGND HT1_ON HT1_ON

10 PGND HT2_ON HT2_ON

11 PGND PGND PGND

12 PGND PUMP7 PUMP7

13 PGND PUMP6 PUMP6

14 P+12V PUMP5 PUMP5





19 V1 V2 V3

20 V4 V5 V6

21 V7 V8 V9

22 V10 V11 V12

23 V13 V14 V15

24 V16 V17 V18

25 V19 V20 V21

26 V22 V23 V24

27 V25 V26 V27

28 V28 V29 V30

Hardware System

5-15

29 V31 V32 V33

30 V34 V35 V36

31 V37 V38 V39

32 V40 NC NC

Connector J14 for temperature sensor





1 HT1_SA

2 HT1_SB

both ends of thermistor of heater

1

3 HT2_SA

4 HT2_SB

both ends of thermistor of heater

2

5 AMBI_SA

6 AMBI_SB

both ends of thermistor of

environment temperature

Connector J15 for sensors of volumetric board and pressure control board


Model: SIP12TD-B12B-PH-K 'JST'



1 P+12V

2 PGND

3 DGND

4 POSI_PRESS Pressure chamber (pressure) signal

5 NEGA_PRESS Vacuum chamber (vacuum) signal

6 DGND

7 #VM_ON Volumetric optics is on, effective low

8 #RBC_START RBC volume measurement starts, effective low

9 #RBC_STOP RBC volume measurement stops, effective low

10 #WBC_START WBC volume measurement starts, effective low

11 #WBC_STOP WBC volume measurement stops, effective low

12 D+5V

Connector J16 for liquid level sensor

Connector type: HEADER WTB 2MM DIP2*17 TOP

Model: B34B-PHDSS-B(LF)(SN) 'JST'

Hardware System

5-16



1 D+5V

2 #LIQ1 LIQ1status, effective low

3 #LIQ2 LIQ 2 status, effective low




7 #LS_ON Control signal for liquid level board

8 GND

9 NC

10 NC


12 GND

13 #LYSE_SENSOR LYSE level sensor, status, i, effective low

14 GND

15 #WASTE_SENSOR Waste level sensor status, effective low

16 GND

17 NC

18 NC

19 OP17_CTRL Optics 17 control

20 OP17_STS Optics 17 status

21 GND

22 GND



25 GND

26 GND



29 GND

30 GND



33 GND

34 GND

Connector J18, J19, J20 for optics of position sensor

Position sensor has three connectors, all using double-row and 2mm connectors.

Hardware System

5-17

Connector type: HEADER WTB 2.0MM DIP2*12 TOP

Model: B24B-PHDSS-B (LF) (SN) 'JST'



1 OP1_CTRL Optics 1 drive


3,4 DGND



7,8 DGND



11,12 DGND



15,16 DGND



19,20 DGND



23,24 DGND





3,4 DGND



7,8 DGND



11,12 DGND



15,16 DGND


Hardware System

5-18


19,20 DGND



23,24 DGND





3,4 DGND



7,8 DGND



11,12 DGND

13 OP16_CTRL Optics 16


15,16 DGND

17-24 NC

Connector J21 (reserved) for DC mix motor





1 DM_ON DC Motor drive

2 NC

3 DGND

Connector J22, J23, J24, J25 for stepping motors

Each connector connects two motors.


Model: B-8B-XH-A 'JST' 2.54MM

Hardware System

5-19



1 SM1_AP A-phase coil drive , motor 1

2 SM1_AN A-phase coil drive , motor 1

3 SM1-BP B-phase coil drive , motor 1

4 SM1_BN B-phase coil drive , motor 1




















4 SM5-BN B-phase coil drive , motor 5





Hardware System

5-20











Connector J27, J28 for heaters





1 P+24V

2 HT1_ON Heater 1 drive

3,4 Heater 1 control



1 P+24V

2 HT2_ON Heater 2 drive

3,4 Heater 2 control

Connector J29, J30, J31, J32, J33 for pumps and valves

Valves and pumps have five double-row PH-model connectors.

Connector type: HEADER WTB 2MM DIP2*10 TOP PHDSERIES

Model: B20B-PHDSS-B(LF)(SN)



1~6 NC

7 PUMP7 Pump 7 drive

8 P+12V


10 P+12V

Hardware System

5-21


12 P+12V


14 P+12V


16 P+12V


18 P+12V


20 P+12V



1 V1 Valve 1 drive

2 P+12V

3 V2 Valve 2 drive

4 P+12V

5 V3 Valve 3 drive

6 P+12V

7 V4 Valve 4 drive

8 P+12V

9 V5 Valve 5 drive

10 P+12V

11 V6 Valve 6 drive

12 P+12V

13 V7 Valve 7 drive

14 P+12V

15 V8 Valve 8 drive

16 P+12V

17 V9 Valve 9 drive

18 P+12V

19 V10 Valve 10 drive

20 P+12V




2 P+12V

Hardware System

5-22


4 P+12V


6 P+12V


8 P+12V


10 P+12V


12 P+12V


14 P+12V


16 P+12V


18 P+12V


20 P+12V




2 P+12V


4 P+12V


6 P+12V


8 P+12V


10 P+12V


12 P+12V


14 P+12V


16 P+12V


Hardware System

5-23

18 P+12V


20 P+12V




2 P+12V


4 P+12V


6 P+12V


8 P+12V


10 P+12V


12 P+12V


14 P+12V


16 P+12V


18 P+12V


20 P+12V

Connector J37 for D+5V


Model: 3928-1043


Pin Definition

1 D+5V

2 D+5V

3 DGND

4 DGND

Connector J35 for P+12V, P+24V

Hardware System

5-24

Connector type: HEADER WTB 4.2MM DIP2X5 TOP 5566SERIES

Model: 39-31-0108


Pin Definition

1 P+24V

2 P+24V

3 P+24V

4 P+12V

5 P+12V

6 PGND

7 PGND

8 PGND

9 PGND

10 PGND

Connector J34 for fan power




Pin Definition

1 P+12V

2 PGND

Connector J36 for power (autoloader board)


Model: 3928-1063


Pin Definition

1 D+5V

2 P+12V

3 P+24V

4 DGND

5 PGND

6 PGND

Hardware System

5-25

Assembly drawing

Figure 5-3 Assembly drawing of the mother board

Hardware System

5-26

5.1.3 Adjustment and Test Points There are no test points designed specially for mother board. To test certain power or signal,

use the touch points of connectors directly.

On the mother board with the Debug Serial Communication Port (DSCP) configured, the

configuration of COM port is implemented by several connection matrices. See the following

introduction for connection method.

By adjusting JP1 to JP3, the J2 COM port can support the following 5 debugging modes (all via

PC COM port).

1. Data board COM 3: debugging the data board function

2. Data board COM 0: debugging the data board’s function of controlling the drive board

3. Drive board COM: debugging the drive board function

4. Data board COM 1: debugging the data board’s function of controlling the autoloader

board

5. Autoloader board COM: debugging the function of autoloader board

Notice: In case of functions 2 or 3 (4 and 5 are the same), do not connect the drive board and

the data board at the same time. Namely, in case of function 2, do not connect the drive board,

and in case of function 3, do not connect the data board.

JP1 and JP2 respectively connect UART1, 3, 0 to the input of the RS-232 transceiver. JP1 can

also be used for selecting the UART1 COM direction. JP2 connects interface signals of the

data board or the autoloader board to the RS-422 transceiver. (U2 in Figure 5-3)

See Table 5-42 for configuration details.

Table 5-42 Configuration details

Debugging COM port JP1 JP2

Data board UART0 Put jumpers on pins 1-2 and

3-4,

No jumpers

Drive board COM Put jumpers on pins 5-6

and 7-8

No jumpers

Data board UART1 Put jumpers on pins 9-10

and 11-12.

Put jumpers on pins

1-2,,3-4,,5-6, and,7-8..

Autoloader board

COM

Put jumpers on pins 9-10

and 11-12.

Put jumpers on pins

9-10,11-12,13-14,and 15-16.

Data board UART3 Put jumpers on pins 13-14

and 15-16.

No jumpers.

A male or female receptacle can be installed at J2. Four cable types can be supported, as

shown in the following table.

Hardware System

5-27

Table 5-43 COM port receptacle and cable selection

Connector cable JP3

Serial cable with female

connectors on both ends,

signals not intercrossed

3-4, 7-8, 13-14, 15-16

DB9 male

receptacle

(straight or 90°

installation)

Serial cable with female

connectors on both ends,

signals intercrossed; namely

the COM cable

3-4, 7-8, 9-10, 11-12

Serial cable with a female

connector on one end and a

male connector on the other

end, signals not intercross;

namely the COM extension

cable

1-2, 5-6, 13-14, 15-16

DB9 female

receptacle

(straight or 90°

installation)

Serial cable with a female

connector on one end and a

male connector on the other

end, signals intercross

1-2, 5-6, 9-10, 11-12

JP4 needs to be configured as shown in the following table when the MCU JTAG of the drive

board or the autoloader board is to be connected to J3.

Table 5-44 Connection matrix of multi-functional JTAG port

JTAG function JP4

Connect MCU JTAG of

autoloader board

No jumpers

Connect MCU JTAG of

drive board

Put jumpers on pins 1-2, 3-4, 5-6 and

7-8.

Note: the mother board does not provide a fixed connection to the JTAG port of the autoloader

MCU. If you need to update the autoloader MCU on the analyzer, connect the J11 and J3

receptacles using the cable dedicated for autoloader update before updating on PC using the

client update software. The dedicated cable is provided to the service and manufacture

personnel, not as an accessory of the analyzer.

Hardware System

5-28

5.1.4 Removal

Purpose

The mother board is unlikely to be damaged. But in case you need to replace it, follow the

steps below.

Tools

107 cross-headed screwdriver

107 flat-headed screwdriver

Removal

Follow these two procedures to disassemble the mother board:

To remove the mother board from the analyzer:

1. Power off the analyzer.

2. Unplug the power cable and the LAN cable from the back of the analyzer.

3. Remove the top cover and front cover of the analyzer

4. Remove the data board and the drive board.

5. Disconnect all cables from the mother board.

6. Use the 107 cross-headed screwdriver to remove the four M4X8 small panhead screws

fixing the bracket.

7. Pull the bracket to remove it.

Hardware System

5-29

Figure 5-4 Disassembly diagram of the mother board-1

1 ―――Bracket 2 ―――Mother board

3 ―――M4X8 panhead screw

To disassemble the mother board:

1. Use the 107 cross-headed screwdriver to remove the fourteen M3X6 cross-headed

panhead screws on the mother board.

2. Pull the mother board towards the panel by a certain distance, remove the LAN port

connector from the metal plate and take out the mother board.

Figure 5-5 Disassembly diagram of the mother board-2

1 ―――Bracket 2 ―――Mother board

3―――M3X6 cross-headed panhead screws

Hardware System

5-30

Installation

Install the mother board as per the above-mentioned procedures in the reverse order.

Note: Since the mother board has many connectors, pay attention to the number indicated on

the connector to avoid wrong connection. The design of the mother board has included certain

error-proof measures. Generally speaking, wrong connection will not lead to safety issues, yet

the whole unit cannot function properly

Verification

1. Power on the analyzer, the fan at the back of the analyzer should run normally. Use a

multimeter to measure the voltage of D+5V, P+12V, P+24V, A+/-12V, AC120V, and all

measurements should be within normal ranges.

2. Power indicators of the boards are on, showing that the mother board is functioning

correctly.

5.1.5 Troubleshooting Since the function of the mother board is to realize power distribution and centralized wiring, a

failure in the mother board usually takes the form of hardware system failure.

Table 5-45 Troubleshooting

Failure Cause Recommended Action

Abnormal voltage

detected

cable not properly

connected to power

connector

Check connectors J12, J13, J35,

J37;

If the connection is normal, use a

multimeter to check if the voltage

of each power source indicated

on the mother board is correct.

Fan not running. Fan damaged or no power

supply

Check connector J34;

Check the P12V indicator on the

drive board

Communication failure

of autoloader board

Connector J4 abnormal..

Connector J36 abnormal..

Check connector J4

Check connector J36

Pressure control

abnormal

Connector J15 abnormal Check connector J15

Volumetric abnormal Connector J15 abnormal Check connector J15

Liquid level inspection Connector J16 abnormal Check connector J16

Hardware System

5-31

abnormal, misinform

Laser not light or laser

current detected

abnormal

Connector J17 abnormal Check connector J7

Pre-amp board has no

power or work

abnormally.

Connectors J9 and J10

abnormal

Check connectors J9 and J10

Motor not active Motor drive cable not

properly connected .

Check connectors J22,J23,J24,

and 25

Valve not active Valve drive cable not

properly connected.

Check connectors J30,J31,J32

and J33

Pump not active Pump drive cable not

properly connected

Check connector J29

Temperature control

fails.

Temperature sensor not

properly connected.

Check connector J14

Hardware System

5-32

5.2 Data board

5.2.1 Introduction The “data” function of the data board consists of two aspects: analog part and digital part. The

analog part is responsible for obtaining, amplifying, and conditioning sensor signals and

converting the analog signals into digital signals. The digital part processes digital signals and

uploads them to the PC as well as provides the platform for the built-in software and the

access interface.

5.2.2 Board composition

Function

The analog part:

Conditioning and converting power

Monitoring voltage (including power voltage, WBC aperture voltage, RBC aperture voltage

and FS background voltage, also monitoring laser drive current and AD working status,

etc.)

Collecting and conditioning WBC/RBC volume signals

Detecting and amplifying HGB signals

Conditioning WBC DIFF signals

Driving constant-current supply

Controlling and setting amplification factors for all channels

Zapping apertures

AD conversion

The digital part:

Providing a platform for software operating

Controlling interfaces for the indicator board and the key board

Providing communication interfaces for the autoloader board and the drive board

Providing communication interfaces for PC

Controlling and monitoring interfaces for the volumetric board and the laser board

Processing digital signals and identifying pulse

Block diagram

Hardware System

5-33

Figure 5-6 Data board circuit

Analog power filter module

Monitoring module

RBC/PLT amplification

HGB amplification

HGB led constant current driver

Constant current source/zappingcontrol module of RBC/PLT hole

Digital circuits of data board

A/D module

SS amplification

FS amplification

SF amplification

HGB

Gain control

RBC/PLT aperture

Gain control

HGB

Driver control

Constant current source /burn control

Gain control

Gain control

SS

SF

FS

A±12V、AC120V

Gain control

WBC

Laser driver

RBC/PLTsensor

WBC sensor

HGB sensor

SS pre-amplification board

FS pre-amplification board

SS pre-amplification board

Power for analog circuits

WBC amplification

Constant current source/zappingcontrol module of WBC hole

RBC／PLT

WBC aperture

FS base currrent

signal monitoring of laser current driver

Gain control

Constant current source /zapping control

Figure 5-7 Functions of analog part on data board

Hardware System

5-34

Figure 5-8 Functions of digital part on data board

Description

The analog part:

Conditioning and converting voltages

The A±12V and AC120V analog power sent from the mother board are conditioned or

converted to be the required voltages for the board. The AC120V is used for zapping

apertures.

Monitoring voltage

The voltage of A±12V power and VCONST, WBC aperture voltage, RBC aperture voltage, FS

blank voltage, laser drive current and AD working status are all monitored via AD.

Collecting and amplifying WBC/RBC volume signals

WBC/RBC volume signals are collected and conditioned, and then sent to the AD converter.

Detecting and amplifying HGB signals

The HGB current signals are converted into voltage signals through colorimetric method, then

after conditioning, they are sent to the AD converter.

Conditioning WBC DIFF signals

The WBC DIFF signals （including FS, SS and SF signal; SF signal reserved ）are first

collected and conditioned, and then sent to the AD converter.

Driving constant-current supply

The data board provides the constant current for the electrodes of the WBC bath and the

RBC/PLT bath and the HGB light.

Controlling setting amplification factors for all channels

Hardware System

5-35

The zapping voltage on-off, constant current supply/zapping switch and HGB light on-off are

controlled by the GPIO interface of CPU. The amplification factors of WBC DIFF, WBC,

RBC/PLT and HGB signal channels are set by the FPGA as required.

Zapping aperture

If the analyzer has been running for a certain period or the WBC/RBC bath aperture clogs, the

zapping function shall be performed to clean up the aperture by high temperature.

A／D conversion

The cell signals (WBC, RBC, PLT and WBC DIFF signals), voltage monitoring signals and

HGB signals are converted into digital signals, and then sent to FPGA for further processing.

The digital part:

Providing a platform for operating system and application software

CPU： MCF5474, 266MHz；

DDR：128M, 133MHz；

FLASH：16Mx16bit

Communicating with the TTL port of the driver board

Sending control command to the driver board and receiving its response.

Baud rate: 38400bps

Data bit: 8bit

Stop bit: 1bit

Start bit: 1bit

Parity: even

Communicating with the 422 port of the autoloader board

Sending control command to the autoloader board via serial port and receiving its response.

Baud rate: 38400bps

Data bit: 8bit

Stop bit: 1bit

Start bit: 1bit

Parity: even

The IO port for the driver board and autoloader board upgrading

By simulating the JTAG sequence through the CPU IO port, the driver board and the

autoloader board can be upgraded respectively.

Interface for the indicator board

The status indicator and the buzzer on the indicator board are controlled by the CPU IO port.

Interface for the volumetric board

Enabling the volumetric board and receiving its detecting signals

Interface for the laser control board

Enabling the laser control board and detecting laser diode current

Key input interface

Receiving the key events (including the aspiration key and the keypad).

Hardware System

5-36

Status detection interface

Detecting the open/closed status of the side door and laser shielding box

Analog signal input interface

Receiving the analog signals from the pre-amplification board and the aperture electrodes

10M／100M network interface

The network interface is introduced by the mother board and connected to PC by the cross

network cable, and capable of program downloading and data transmission, etc.

BDM debug interface

The BDM interface of CPU, which is used for detecting hardware, downloading program and

writing the FLASH, is not available for customers.

JTAG interface of FPGA

It debugs FPGA and downloads FPGA program. It is not available for customers.


The data board is a plug-in board. It provides 9 connectors: the connectors for aperture

electrodes, the connector to connect the digital part to the mother board, the connector to

connect the analog part to the mother board, the connectors for debugging and the reserved

connectors. See Figure 5-9 for the layout of the data board.

See the following table for the function of each connector.

Table 5-46 Interfaces of data board

Connector Function Number of

pins Note

J1 Connects the RBC/PLT aperture

electrode 3

/

J2 Connects the WBC aperture electrode 3 /

J3 Connects the digital part to the mother

board 96

/

J7 Connects the analog part to the

mother board 96

/

J8 JTAG interface of FPGA 10 /

J9 Reserved 20 /

J10 Reserved 40 /

J11 Reserved 14 /

J13 BDM interface of CPU 26 /

The layout of interfaces is shown in the figure below:

Hardware System

5-37

Figure 5-9 Interfaces layout of data board

Definition of J1

J1 is the signal interface of RBC/PLT.

Table 5-47 Definition of J1

Pin Name Note

1 SHELL Shielding ground

2 RHOLE_A RBC/PLT signals

3 RHOLE_B RBC analog ground

Definition of J2

J2 is the signal interface of WBC.


Pin Name Note

1 WHOLE _B WBC analog ground

2 WHOLE_A WBC signals

3 SHELL Shielding ground

Definition of J3

J3 is the signal interface for the digital part of data board and mother board, and is European

96 pin connector.

Hardware System

5-38


Pin Definition Function Pin Definition Function

A1 D+5V Power supply B17 JTAG_TCK_

AS

JTAG clock of autoloader

board

A2 D+5V Power supply B18 JTAG_TO_A

S

JTAG sending of

autoloader board

A3 D+5V Power supply B19 JTAG_FROM

_AS

JTAG receiving of

autoloader board

A4 D+5V Power supply B20 UART1_TO_

DAT+

Reserved debug serial

port sending

A5 D+5V Power supply B21 UART1_TO_

DAT-

Reserved debug serial

port sending

A6 DGND Signal ground B22 DGND Signal ground



A9 DGND Signal ground B25 #VMCTRL Volumetric board enabling

A10 DGND Signal ground B26 #RBC_STAR

T

Start RBC volume

metering

A11 DGND Signal ground B27 #RBC_STOP Stop RBC volume

metering

A12 TP_TX+ Positive sending

terminal of

network

B28 #WBC_STAR

T

Start WBC volume

metering

A13 TP_TX- Negative sending

terminal of

network

B29 #RBC_STOP Stop WBC volume

metering


A15 DGND Signal ground B31 #LASER_CT

RL

Laser board enabling

A16 JTAG_TMS JTAG mode

signal

B32 DGND Signal ground

A17 JTAG_TCK JTAG clock signal C1 D+5V Power supply

A18 JTAG_TO_

DRV

JTAG sending of

drive board

C2 D+5V Power supply

A19 JTAG_TO_

DAT

JTAG receiving of

drive board

C3 D+5V Power supply

A20 DGND Signal ground C4 D+5V Power supply

A21 DGND Signal ground C5 D+5V Power supply

A22 UART0_TO Serial port C6 DGND Signal ground

Hardware System

5-39

_DRV sending of drive

board

A23 UART0_TO

_DAT

Serial port

receiving of drive

board

C7 DGND Signal ground

A24 DGND Signal ground C8 DGND Signal ground




A28 DGND Signal ground C12 TP_RX+ Positive receiving

terminal of network

A29 DGND Signal ground C13 TP_RX- Negative receiving

terminal of network



A32 DGND Signal ground C16 UART3_TO_

PC

PC communication serial

port sending

B1 D+5V Power supply C17 UART3_TO_

DAT

PC communication serial

port receiving

B2 D+5V Power supply C18 DGND Signal ground

B3 D+5V Power supply C19 DGND Signal ground


AS+

autoloader board serial

port sending


AS-

autoloader board serial

port receiving

B6 DGND Signal ground C22 DGND Signal ground


B8 DGND Signal ground C24 ＃

SUCK_KEY

Aspiration key control

input


B10 DGND Signal ground C26 ＃BUZ Buzzer control output

B11 DGND Signal ground C27 #COUNT_KE

Y

Aspirate key control input

B12 PWFBOUT Network power

supply feedback

C28 FAULT_J Indicator control output

(red)

B13 DGND Signal ground C29 READY_J Indicator control output

(green)

B14 DGND Signal ground C30 OPTI_DOOR Laser shielding box

monitoring input

Hardware System

5-40

B15 DGND Signal ground C31 #RIGHT_DO

OR

Right door status

monitoring input

B16 JTAG_TMS

_AS

JTAG mode of

autoloader board

C32 #INSERT_KE

Y

Compartment door open

key control input

Definition of J7

J7 is the signal interface for the analog part of data board and mother board, and is European

96 pin plug.


Pin Name Note Pin Name Note

A1 AGND Analog ground B17 HGB_IN HGB signals input

A2 AGND Analog ground B18 AGND Analog ground

A3 AGND Analog ground B19 HGB+ HGB light drive positive

electrode

A4 AGND Analog ground B20 HGB- HGB light drive negative

electrode

A5 AGND Analog ground B21 A-12V -12V power supply

A6 AGND Analog ground B22 A-12V -12V power supply

A7 AGND Analog ground B23 A+12V +12V power supply



A10 AGND Analog ground B26 NC /




A14 AGND Analog ground B30 AC120V_

B

Zapping voltage input



A17 AGND Analog ground C1 AGND Analog ground









Hardware System

5-41

A26 NC / C10 AGND Analog ground






A32 AC120V_

A

Zapping voltage input C16 AGND Analog ground

B1 AGND Analog ground C17 AGND Analog ground

B2 LASER_I

N

Laser current

monitoring input

C18 AGND Analog ground



B5 AGND Analog ground C21 A-12V -12V power supply

B6 AGND Analog ground C22 A-12V -12V power supply

B7 AGND Analog ground C23 A+12V +12V power supply



B10 AGND Analog ground C26 NC /

B11 FS_IN FS signals input C27 NC /


B13 SS_IN SS signals input C29 NC /


B15 SF_IN SF signals input C31 NC /


Definition of J8

J8 is the JTAG interface of FPGA.


Pin Name Note

1 FPGA_TCK Clock

2 GND Signal ground

3 FPGA_TDO Data output

4 VDD Power supply

5 FPGA_TMS Testing mode selection

6 VDD Power supply

7 NC /

8 NC /

Hardware System

5-42

9 FPGA_TDI Data input

10 GND Signal ground

Definition of J9

Reserved. Not available for customers.

Definition of J10

Reserved. Not available for customers..

Definition of J11

Reserved. Not available for customers.

Definition of J13

J11 is the BDM interface of CPU.


Pin Definition Function

1 NC /

2 BKPT# Breakpoint setup

3 GND Signal ground

4 DSCLK synchronizing clock input

5 GND Signal ground

6 TCK Clock input of JATG

7 BDM_RSTI BDM reset

8 DSI Serial input

9 VDD Power supply

10 DSO Serial output


12 PSTDATA7

13 PSTDATA6

14 PSTDATA5

15 PSTDATA4

16 PSTDATA3

17 PSTDATA2

18 PSTDATA1

19 PSTDATA0

Configuration data


21 NC /

22 NC /


Hardware System

5-43

24 PSTCLK Processor clock

25 NC /

26 MCF_TA# Transmission response

Assembly drawing

Hardware System

5-44

Figure 5-10 Assembly drawing of data board

Hardware System

5-45

5.2.3 Adjustment and Test Points

All the adjustable parameters of analog part are adjusted as per the command of FPGA. Adjust

the parameters' settings in the software interface if necessary.

LED function definition

Table 5-53 LED function definition

No. Indicator Function description

1 D17 A-12V power indicator

2 D20 A+12V power indicator

3 D21 A-5V power indicator

4 D22 A+5V power indicator

5 D39 Reserved for software use.





10 D44 Network conflict indicator. It turns on when network

conflicts.

11 D45 100M network communication indicator. It turns on

when enabled.

12 D46 10M network communication indicator. It turns on

when enabled.

13 D47 Network connection indicator. It turns on when

enabled.

14 D48 Network full-duplex communication indicator. It

turns on when enabled.

15 D49 FPGA configuration complete indicator. It turns on

when the configuration is done.

16 D51 D+5V power indicator

Function definition of test points

Hardware System

5-46

Table 5-54 Test points on data board

No. Test point Signal

under testFunction description

1 +12V AVCC +12V power supply of analog part

2 -12V AVSS -12V power supply of analog part

3 +5V AVDD +5V power supply of analog part

4 -5V AVEE -5V power supply of analog part

5 VR_MON +2.5V +2.5V power supply of analog part

6 VR_H +2.5V +2.5V power supply of analog part

7 +56V VCONST Drive voltage of constant current source

of electrode

8 +12VM A+12V_MO

N

+12V power supply monitoring

9 -12VM A-12V_MO

N

-12V power supply monitoring

10 +56VM VCONSTM Monitor drive voltage of constant current

source of electrode

11 RHOLE RHOLE RBC Aperture Voltage monitoring

12 WHOLE WHOLE WBC Aperture Voltage monitoring

13 FSBASE FSBASE FS background voltage monitoring

14 LASER LASER Laser diode drive current monitoring

15 HGB1 HGB1 HGB channel voltage value after I/V

16 NHGB #HGBLED HGB light on-off control

17 HGB HGB HGB measurement voltage value

18 NBURN #BURN Zapping control

19 PULSE PULSE Pulse control signals that produce

zapping voltage

20 FS_IN FS_IN FS pre-amplification board output signals

21 FS1 FS1 Adjustable amplified FS signals

22 FS FS Analog signals outputted by FS channel

23 SS_IN SS_IN SS pre-amplification board output signals

24 SS1 SS1 Adjustable amplified SS signals

25 SS SS Analog signals outputted by SS channel

26 SF_IN SF_IN SF pre-amplification board output signals

27 SF1 SF1 Adjustable amplified SF signals

28 SF SF Analog signals outputted by SF channel

29 NCONST #CONST Constant current source control

30 NSEL_R #SELECT_ RBC aperture zapping/constant current

Hardware System

5-47

RBC selection control

31 NSEL_W #SELECT_

WBC

WBC aperture zapping/constant current

selection control

32 RBC1 RBC1 RBC channel output signals of adjustable

amplification grade

33 RBC2 RBC2 RBC channel output signals of direct

current restoring grade

34 RBC3 RBC3 RBC channel output signals of low-pass

filter grade

35 RBC RBC RBC channel signals of output grade

36 PLT1 PLT1 PLT channel output signals of direct


37 PLT2 PLT2 PLT channel output signals of low-pass

filter grade

38 PLT PLT PLT channel signals of output grade

39 WBC1 WBC1 RBC channel output signals of adjustable

amplification grade

40 WBC2 WBC2 WBC channel output signals of direct


41 WBC3 WBC3 WBC channel output signals of low-pass

filter grade

42 WBC WBC WBC channel signals of output grade

43 HCLK HCLK HGB and clock of monitoring voltage

44 HGND HGND Analog ground

45 RBCF RBCF Signals inputted into AD from RBC

46 VR_R VR_R AD reference voltage of RBC

47 RAGND RAGND Analog ground

48 RCLK RCLK AD clock signals of RBC

49 WBCF WBCF Signals inputted into AD from WBC

50 VR_W VR_W AD reference voltage of WBC

51 WAGND WAGND Analog ground

52 WCLK WCLK AD clock signals of WBC

53 PLTF PLTF Signals inputted into AD from PLT

54 VR_P VR_P AD reference voltage of PLT

55 PAGND PAGND Analog ground

56 PCLK PCLK AD clock signals of PLT

57 MCLK MCLK AD clock of monitoring voltage

58 FSF FSF AD input from FS

59 FSCLK FSCLK AD clock signals of FS

Hardware System

5-48

60 SSF SSF AD input from SS

61 SSCLK SSCLK AD clock signals of SS

62 SFF SFF AD input from SF

63 SFCLK SFCLK AD clock signals of SF

64 TP8 MCF_FBAD

1

Flexbus address data 1 of CPU

65 TP9 MCF_FBAD

2


66 TP37 FPGA_DDR

_VRF

VREF power of DDR on FPGA, +1.25V

67 TP45 VCC +5V digital power supply

68 TP46 VDD +3.3V digital power supply

69 TP47 D_1V5 +1.5V digital power supply


71 TP57 D_1V2_FG

PA

+1.2V digital power supply


73 TP74 #MCF_CS1 Flexbus CS1 of CPU

74 TP75 MCF_R/#W Flexbus read/write signals of CPU

75 TP76 MCF_FBAD

6


76 TP78 D_1V25VTT VTT power of DDR on CPU, +1.25V

77 TP79 #MCF_CS0 Flexbus CS0 of CPU

78 TP80 FPGA_DDR

_2V5

+2.5V DDR power on FPGA

79 TP81 FPGA_DDR

_VTT

VTT power of DDR on FPGA, +1.25V

80 TP82 MCF_FBAD

5


81 TP83 D_1V25VR

F

VREF power of DDR on CPU, +1.25V

82 TP85 MCF_FBAD

5


83 TP86 #MCF_OE Output enabling of Flexbus of CPU

84 TP87 MCF_TS Address latch indication of Flexbus of

CPU

85 TP95 MCF_FBAD

3


86 TP96 #MCF_RST Reset input signals of CPU

Hardware System

5-49

I

87 TP101 #MCF_IRQ

1

Interrupt input signals 1 of CPU

88 TP102 #MCF_IRQ

2


89 TP103 #MCF_IRQ

3


90 TP104 #MCF_IRQ

5


91 TP105 #MCF_IRQ

6


92 TP106 #MCF_IRQ

7


AGND, TP10-21, TP38, TP44, TP70, TP73, TP77, TP88, TP90, TP92-94 and TP107-116 are

connected to the GND network and usually used as the connecting point of the oscilloscope

probe grounded end.

Data board key definition

Table 5-55 Key definition

No. Function

S12 Manually reset the main CPU

5.2.4 Disassembly and assembly method

Purpose

Damaged data board needs to be replaced by a new one..

Tools



Disassembly

Data board disassembly consists of the following two main procedures:

Hardware System

5-50

Remove the data board from the main unit:

1. Shut down the analyzer.

2. Remove the left door.

3. Remove the top cover board

4. Use the 107 cross-headed screwdriver to remove the two cross-headed bolts (M3X6) from

the upper cover of the shielding box, and then remove the upper cover.

5. Disconnect the two power cables connected to the data board.

6. Use your hand or cross-headed screwdriver to remove the two hand-tightened screws

from the bracket.

7. Use both of your hands to flip outward the two latches on both sides of the data board, and

then draw the data board out.

Figure 5-11 Disassembly diagram of data board-1

1---Upper cover of the shielding box of

data board

2---Cross-recessed panhead screw M3x6

(with washer)

3---Data board 4---Hand-tightened screws

Further disassembly of the data board

1. Use the 107 cross-headed screwdriver to remove the 5 cross-headed panhead screws

(M3X6) from the data board.

Hardware System

5-51

2. Remove the data board from the bracket.

3. Use the 107 cross-headed screwdriver to remove the 2 panhead screws (M3X8) and 6

socket cap screws (M3X12) from the lower cover of the shielding box.

Figure 5-12 Disassembly diagram of data board-2

1---Cross-recessed panhead screw

M3x6 (with washer)

2---Data board

3---Bracket 4---Lower cover of the shielding box of data

board

5---Panhead screw M4X8 6---Socket cap screws M3X12

Assembly

Assemble the data board as per the above-mentioned steps in the reverse order.

Verification

1. Power indicators D20, D17, D22, D21 and D51 turns on.

2. Indicator D49 turns on after FPGA initialization.

3. Indicator D47 and D48 turn on and D45 flashes after network is enabled.

5.2.5 Troubleshooting

The errors analysis and the corresponding troubleshooting of the analog part on data board

are listed in the following table. Most of the errors can be tested and determined by testing the

corresponding test points with a multimeter. A measurement value within the normal range

indicates the circuit or component is in good working condition. Otherwise, be sure to find out

Hardware System

5-52

the particular error according to the certain symptom and remove it accordingly.

Table 5-56 Troubleshooting of analog part

No. Error Character Possible Cause Recommended action

Improper cable

connection with

the mother board

or disconnection

caused by a

broken cable

Reconnect the cable or

change a new cable

Improper 12V

power supply sent

by the mother

board or the

power board

Check whether the proper

power supply is sent by the

mother board or the power

board

1 12V power

supply error

The voltage of the

+12V test point

exceeds the range

of 12±0.6V; or the

ripple noise is

greater than 50mV.

Inductor L16 or

capacitor C111,

C95 and C88 are

damaged or not

properly soldered.

Re-solder or change the

component

Improper cable

connection with

the mother board

or disconnection

caused by a

broken cable


change a new cable

Improper -12V

power supply sent

by the mother

board or the

power board


power supply is sent by the

mother board or the power

board

2 -12V power

supply error

The voltage of the

-12V test point

exceeds the range

of -12±0.6V; or the

ripple noise is

greater than 50mV.

Inductor L18 or

capacitor C112,

C94 and C87 are

damaged or not

properly soldered


component

Hardware System

5-53

3 +5V power

supply error

The voltage of the

+5V test point

exceeds the range

of +5±0.25 V

The +5V relating

circuit is rosin

jointed; the power

supply’s

impedance to the

ground is

decreased; or

power chip U14 is

damaged

First ensure the +12V power

supply works normally. Then,

check the +5V relating circuit,

re-solder or change the

component.

4 -5V power

supply error

The voltage of the

-5V test point

exceeds the range

of -5±0.25 V

The -5V relating

circuit is rosin

jointed; the power

supply’s

impedance to the

ground is

decreased; or

power chip U12 is

damaged

First ensure the -12V power

supply works normally. Then,

check the -5V relating circuit,


component.

5 +2.5V reference

power supply

error

The voltage of the

VR_MON or VR_H

test point exceeds

the range of

2.5±0.125 V

If the +5V (AVDD)

power supply

works normally,

then the problem

occurred probably

because power

chip U45 or U43,

and its peripheral

components are

damaged or not

properly soldered.

Check the relating circuit;


component

The boost circuit

works improperly

Check the chip U72, U70,

U71 and their peripherals for

any rosin joint or damage

6 +56 constant

current drive

power supply

error

The voltage of the

VCONST test point

exceeds the range

of 56±3V The 56V

voltage-regulator

diode is damaged

or not properly

soldered.


component

Hardware System

5-54

7 +56V monitoring

voltage error

The voltage of the

+56VM test point

exceeds the range

of 1.37±0.2V

If the +56V power

supply works

normally, then the

problem occurred

probably because

something is

wrong with the

monitoring circuit..

Check the U39 and relating

components; re-solder or

change the component

8 +12V monitoring

voltage error

The voltage of the

+12VM test point

exceeds the range

of 1.8V-2.2V

The relating circuit

is not properly

soldered; the

power supply’s

impendence to the

ground is

decreased;

Something is

wrong with the

power IC or the

corresponding AD.

If the +12V power supply

works normally, check U40

and the relating components,


component.

9 -12V monitoring

voltage error

The voltage of the

-12VM test point

exceeds the range

of 2.2V-2.6V

The relating circuit

is not properly

soldered; the

power supply’s

impendence to the

ground is

decreased;

Something is

wrong with the

power IC or the

corresponding AD.

Check U40 and the relating

components, re-solder or

change the component under

the circumstance that the

-12V power supply works

normally

Constant current

source control

signals abnormal,

56V

voltage-regulator

diode abnormal or

boost circuit error

Check whether the constant

current source control signals

are normal. See the

foregoing troubleshooting to

remove the error of 56V

circuit.

10 RBC aperture

voltage

monitoring error

The value of the

aperture voltage

exceeds the range

of 10V-14V

Bath not properly

wired; clogging.

Check the bath wiring;

perform the unclogging

procedure

Hardware System

5-55

Monitoring circuit

error

Components of

the monitoring

circuit are not

properly soldered,

or the

corresponding AD

works abnormally.

Check whether the relating

circuit or AD works normally.

11 WBC aperture

voltage

monitoring error

Same as point 10 Same as point 10 Same as point 10

HGB light error or

the gain

Check whether HGB light is

on, or adjust the gain multiple

of HGB channel

12 HGB

background

voltage

abnormal

HGB value of the

test point exceeds

the normal range

(4.2V-4.8V) The

corresponding AD

works abnormally,

or the error

message is

accidentally

triggered by

improper wiring.

Check whether the

corresponding AD works

normally.

13 FS background

voltage

monitoring error

The value of the

FSBASE test point

exceeds the normal

range (0-400mv)

The flow cell is

dirty, or something

is wrong with the

corresponding

monitoring circuit

error.

Clean the flow cell in time, or

check whether the U38 and

the corresponding AD chip

U44 work normally.

14 Laser diode

drive current

monitoring error

The value of the

LASER test point

exceeds the range

of 1.0-3.0V.

Something is

wrong with the

current value sent

by the laser

control board

Check whether the cable is

properly connected to the

laser control board and

whether the monitoring value

sent from the laser control

board is normal

Hardware System

5-56

Data board

monitoring circuit

error, the

corresponding AD

error or

connection cable

abnormal

Check whether the operation

amplifier U38 and the

corresponding AD chip U44

work normally.

15 RBC aperture

zapping error

No sound is heard

and no bubbles are

produced when

zapping the bath

Something is

wrong with the

zapping voltage

supplied by the

power board, or

with the part of the

data board that

controls zapping.

Ensuring the wiring of the

bath is correct, then check

whether the AC120V zapping

power of the power board is

proper, or check whether the

zapping control signals are

effective.

16 WBC aperture

zapping error

Same as point 15 Same as point 15 Same as point 15

17 No

WBC/RBC/PLT

result

No WBC/RBC/PLT

result, or the result

displays “***”

Bath wiring error,

analog part

channel error, AD

collection error or

algorithm

identification error

Use a oscilloscope to check

whether the analog channel

can output correct signals. If

no signal is detected,,

check the amplification stage

by stage, and check the AD

collection and data uploading

as well.

18 WBC/RBC/PLT

background

abnormal

WBC/RBC/PLT

background

abnormal

Bad shielding,

constant current

source abnormal,

analog channel

resistor-capacitor

components

incorrect or

abnormal

First ensure the bath and the

fluidics work normally, and

then check the shielding and

grounding, check

components (such as

resistors) of the constant

current source, or check the

resistor-capacitor and

operation amplifier of the

signal conditioning channel.

Hardware System

5-57

Table 5-57 Troubleshooting of digital part

No. Error Causes and solutions

1 System startup failed Possible causes: input power supply error, including

improper power cord connection, abnormal power

supply voltage on each board, flash chip error that

causes the operating system to fail to be

downloaded into DDR SDRAM; DDR SDRAM error

that causes the system to fail to operate; Or system

clock abnormal.

Solutions: press the S12 key to reset the system,

and then check whether the error still exists; check

whether the power indicator D51 is on; check

whether the fuse F4 is broken; use a multimeter to

check the voltage of each power supply; use an

oscilloscope to check whether the clock crystal

oscillator output X2 is normal.

2 Network communication failed Possible causes: network connection abnormal;

using non-standard network cable; network chip

damaged, etc.

Solutions: directly connect the analyzer and PC with

the specified shielding-cross network cable. If

nothing is wrong with the network connection and the

settings, then check the crystal oscillator X3 output

by an oscilloscope. If you doubt the network chip

U36 is damaged, replace it with a new one.

3 Abnormal communication with

UART of autoloader board

Possible causes: improper connection; interface chip

U66 damaged.

Solutions: check and make sure the connection is

proper; check whether the interface signals are

normal by an oscilloscope.

4 volumetric board signals, laser

shielding box status and right

door status can not be detected


U74 damaged.


proper; check the interface signals by an

oscilloscope.

5 Abnormal communication with

UART of drive board


U67 damaged.



oscilloscope.

Hardware System

5-58

6 Events of Aspirate Key, Count

Key and Compartment Door

Open Key can not be detected,

or the buzzer and indicator on

the indicator board are out of

control.


U67 damaged.



oscilloscope.

Hardware System

5-59

5.3 Drive board

5.3.1 Introduction The drive board realizes the following functions: 1) driving motors, pumps, valves and heaters

etc. 2) detecting such signals as the motor position and liquid levels; 3) collecting the signals of

temperature, pressure and voltage etc. for AD conversion.


Function

Serial communication

Driving stepping motors

Driving valves and pumps

Temperature control

Pressure control

System status detection

Reagent status detection

Block diagram

EP1C6Q240C8C8051F020

A3979

MS1

MS2

STEP

SLEEP

A

AN

B

BN

MOTOR

8-channel Step-motor driver module

74HC595+

IRLML2502

IN

CLK

LATCH

EN

40

SV1~SV40

40-channel solenoid valvecontrol

HOA0880-T51

CD74HC14M_SEN

20-channel motor position sensor detection

Liquid level sensor or sensitive switch

74LVCR2245

HOLD

L-SEN/SWITCH

ALE

WR

RD

A/D[7:0]

A[15:8]

F_NCONFIG

NCSO

DATA

DCLK

ASDO

EPCS1S18N

PumpHeater

6

TemperaturePressure

Power Voltage (anolog signal)

8

Databoard UART

TXD

RXD F_INT

Databoard JTAG

TMS

TDI

CLK

TDO

7-channel high power pump & valve control2-channel heater control

2-channel temperature measurement2-channel pressure measurement3-channel power voltage measurement

8-channel liquid level sensor & sensitive switch detection

Figure 5-13 Block diagram of drive board

Hardware System

5-60

Description

Serial communication

The main control unit of the drive board is a MCU, which has two asynchronous serial

communication interfaces (UART). UART0 is used for asynchronous serial communication

with the data board. It receives and analyzes control commands sent by the data board, and

responds accordingly. Communication parameters:

Baud Rate: 38400bps

Start bit: 1bit

Data bit: 8 bits

Stop bit: 1bit

Parity: even

UART1 is reserved.

Stepping motor driving

The drive board controls stepping motors through an FPGA. After output by the FPGA, the

control signal is first sent to isolator 74AHCT245, and then to controller A3979 to drive the

motor. The drive board drives 8 stepping motors: the sample syringe motor, the sample

injection syringe motor, the sheath syringe motor, the diluent syringe motor, the lyse syringe

motor, the horizontal motor and the vertical motor.

Valve and pump driving

The drive board provides the drive control for 40 valves and 7 pumps and actually drives 34

valves, 1 pressure pump and 2 vacuum pumps (also be used as the waste pump). The MCU

writes control information of valve SV1-SV40 into the valve buffer of the FGPA. Based on the

data, the FPGA outputs valve control signals through the serial-parallel conversion chip

74HC595, and drive the valves through the MOS transistor IRLML2502. The MCU first sends

the control information of PUMP1-PUMP3 to isolator 74AHCT245, and then to the drive chip

ULN2068 to control the 3 pumps respectively.

Temperature Control

The temperature control circuit keeps temperature of the reaction bath (DIFF bath) and the

optical system constant. By comparing the temperature measurements and the target values,

the MCU turns on/off the heater to control the temperature of each channel. The MC sends

heater control signals to isolator 74AHCT245, then to driver FDS6670A to control the two

heaters.

Air pressure control

The pressure control circuit controls the pressure of the vacuum chamber and the pressure

chamber. The pressure signals (voltage signals) sent by the volumetric board are measured by

Hardware System

5-61

the drive board. Through voltage follower LM358, the signals are then sent to the ADC pin of

the MCU for AD conversion and corresponding operation. Then, the control signals are output

to turn on/off the pressure pump or the vacuum pump, thus, the pressure of each chamber is

adjusted.

System status detection

The drive board detects the ambient temperature and the voltage of power supply. The mother

board sends the inquiry command to obtain the corresponding system status parameter.

Ambient temperature sensor is located on the interface board. After I/V conversion and

amplification, the signals outputted by the temperature sensor are sent to the MCU for AD

conversion and operation, then the temperature value is obtained.

The voltage detection circuit detects all the power supplies (24V, 12V and 5V) on the drive

board.

Reagent status detection

The reagent status is detected by the passive float switch. There are totally 8 reagent detection

channels on the drive board as designed, and 6 channels of them are in use to detect the

following reagents: LEO1, LEO2, LH, cleanser, diluent and waste.


The drive board connects the motherboard via the 3 DIN41612 plugs and 3 DIN41612

receptacles located on the two boards respectively. All the drive-board-relating peripherals

(including valves, pumps, heaters, motors and sensors etc.) are connected to the motherboard

directly. The connectors’ layout and the corresponding connections are shown in the figure

below.

Hardware System

5-62

Driver board

PB3

+5V

Liquid level sensor

PB2 SocketPB1 Socket

UART

Position sensor

6-channel step-motor+24V +12V

2-channel step-motor

Valve

HeaterPUMP

PressureReaction pool temperatureAmbient temperature

插座（96Pin）

Support board

Board mounting bracket & guide

channel

Base board

Socket 96Pin

JTAG Optical train temperature

J9

J1 J10 J8 J2

J4 J5 J3

Socket

Figure 5-14 Interfaces layout of drive board

The functions of the interfaces are listed in the table.

Table 5-58 Interfaces on the driver board

Connector Function Number of

pins Note

J1 FPGA configuration interface

(AS mode) 10

Used when FPGA first

downloading

J2 FPGA Debug Interface 10 Not used on complete

device

J3 Interface with the motherboard 96

Control interface of

valves, pumps and

heaters

J4 Interface with the motherboard 96 Sensor detection and

communication interface

J5 Interface with the motherboard 96 Motor control interface

J8 Communication Debug

Interface 4

Not used on complete

device

J9 MCU Debug Interface 10 Used when MCU first

downloading

J10 Communication Debug

Interface 4

Not used on complete

device

Hardware System

5-63

Definition of J1

J1 is the FPGA configuration interface (AS mode).

Table 5-59 Definition of the interface for FPGA configuration

Pin Name Pin Name

1 F_DCLK 2 AGND

3 F_CONFDONE 4 VDD

5 F_CONFIG 6 F_NCE

7 F_DATA 8 F_NCSC

9 F_ASDO 10 GND

Definition of J2

J2 is the FPGA debug interface (JTAG mode).

Definition of J3

J3 connects to the PB3 connector of the motherboard, and is the interface used for valves,

pumps and heaters control.

Table 5-60 Valve/pump interface- Definition of J3

Pin Definition Note

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

PGND Power ground

14

15

16

17

18

12V0 12V power supply

19 SV1 Control signal for Valve 1


Hardware System

5-64













33 M7-A Connecting end A of A-phase winding of the sample probe

X motor (SM 7)

34 M7-AN Connecting end AN of A-phase winding of the sample probe

X motor (SM 7)

35 M7-B Connecting end B of B-phase winding of the sample probe

X motor (SM 7)

36 M7-BN Connecting end BN of B-phase winding of the sample probe

X motor (SM 7)


Y motor (SM 8)


Y motor (SM 8)


Y motor (SM 8)


Y motor (SM 8)

41 HT1-DRV Control end of the reaction bath heater

42 HT2-DRV Control end of the optical system heater

43 PGND Power ground

44 PUMP7 Control signal for Pump 7 (Reserved. No output)




48 PUMP3 Control signal for the Vacuum/Waste Pump (P3)


50 PUMP1 Control signal for pressure pump (P1)

51 Sv2 Control signal for Valve 2

Hardware System

5-65













64 NC Empty


X motor (SM 7)


X motor (SM 7)


X motor (SM 7)


X motor (SM 7)


Y motor (SM 8)


Y motor (SM 8)


Y motor (SM 8)


Y motor (SM 8)

73 HT1-DRV Control end of the reaction bath heater

74 HT2-DRV Control end of the optical system heater

75 PGND Power ground




79 PUMP4 Control signal for pinch valve V39



82 PUMP1 Control signal for pressure pump (P1)

Hardware System

5-66














96 NC Empty

Definition of J4

J4 connects to the PB1 connector of the motherboard, and is the interface used for sensor

detection and communication.

Table 5-61 Sensors/Communication interfaces-Definition of J4

Pin Name Note

1 PRTO_T1 Temperature sensor signal end of heater 1 (reaction bath)

2 PRTO_T2 Temperature sensor signal end of heater 2 (optical system)

3 PRESSURE_1ST_A Input signal of pressure sensor 1 (Pressure)

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

GND GND

12

13

14

15

16

VCC 5V power supply

17 GND GND

18 LIQ_SIN1 Input signal of LEO1 lyse liquid-level sensor

Hardware System

5-67

19 LIQ_SIN3 Input signal of LH lyse liquid-level sensor

20 LIQ_SIN5 Input signal of liquid-level sensor5 (reserved)

21 LIQ_SIN7 Input signal of waste liquid-level sensor

22 LS_CTRL Control signal for liquid-level sampling

23 GND Digital ground

24 VC_SIN17 Sending end power signal of position sensor 17 (reserved)




28 VC_SIN1 Sending end power signal of sampling syringe initial position

sensor (OP1)

29 M_SIN2 Receiving end feedback signal of sample injection syringe

initial position sensor (OP 2)

30 VC_SIN4 Sending end power signal of lyse syringe initial position

sensor (OP 4)

31 M_SIN5 Receiving end feedback signal of diluent syringe initial position

sensor (OP 5)


33 PRTO_REF Reference end of heater temperature sensor signal

34 PRTO_REF Reference end of heater temperature sensor signal

35 PRESSURE_2ST_A Input signal of pressure sensor 2 (vacuum)

36

37

38

39

40

41

42

43

GND Digital ground

44

45

46

47

48

VCC 5V power supply


50 LIQ_SIN2 Input signal of LEO2 lyse liquid-level sensor

51 LIQ_SIN4 Input signal of cleanser liquid-level sensor

52 LIQ_SIN6 Input signal of diluent liquid-level sensor

Hardware System

5-68

53 LIQ_SIN8 Input signal of liquid-level sensor 8 (reserved)

54


56 M_SIN17 Receiving end feedback signal of position sensor 17

(reserved)


(reserved)


(reserved)


(reserved)

60 M_SIN1 Receiving end feedback signal of sampling syringe initial

position sensor (OP 1)

61 VC_SIN3 Sending end power signal of sheath syringe initial position

sensor (OP 3)

62 M_SIN4 Receiving end feedback signal of lyse syringe initial position

sensor (OP 4)

63 VC_SIN6 Sending end power signal of relieve valve position sensor (OP

6)

64 M_SIN7 Receiving end feedback signal of position sensor 7 (reserved)

65 AMBINET_T_A Input signal of ambient temperature sensor

66

67

68

69

70

71

72

73

74

75

GND Digital ground

76

77

78

79

80

VCC 5V power supply


82 TMS TMS signal of JTAG interface

83 TCK Clock signal of JTAG interface

Hardware System

5-69

84 TDI Data input pin of JTAG interface

85 TDO Data output pin of JTAG interface

86


88 UP_TX Serial port sending data signal (UART0)

89 UP_RX Serial port receiving data signal (UART0)

90


92 VC_SIN2 Sending end power signal of sample injection syringe initial


93 M_SIN3 Receiving end feedback signal of sheath syringe initial


94 VC_SIN5 Sending end power signal of diluent syringe initial position

sensor (OP 5)

95 M_SIN6 Receiving end feedback signal of relieve valve position sensor

(OP 6)


Definition of J5

J5 connects to the PB2 connector of the motherboard, and is the interface used for the

stepping motor control and the position sensor signal detection.

Table 5-62 Stepping motor control interface-definition of J5

Pin Definition Note


2 VC_SEN10 Sending end power signal of autoloading position sensor (OP 10)


4 VC_SEN13 Sending end power signal of WBC bath position sensor (OP 13)

5 M_SIN14 Receiving end feedback signal of RBC bath position sensor (OP

14)

6 VC_SEN16 Sending end power signal of sample probe Y lower position sensor

(OP 16)


8 NC Empty

9

10

11

12

13

24V0 24V power supply

Hardware System

5-70

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

29

30

31

32

PGND Power ground

33 VC_SEN9 Sending end power signal of close tube position sensor (OP 9)

34 M_SIN10 Receiving end feedback signal of autoloading position sensor (OP

10)

35 VC_SEN12 Sending end power signal of DIFF bath position sensor (OP 12)

36 M_SIN13 Receiving end feedback signal of WBC bath position sensor (OP

13)

37 VC_SEN15 Sending end power signal of sample probe Y upper position sensor

(OP 15)

38 M_SIN16 Receiving end feedback signal of sample probe Y lower position

sensor (OP 16)


40 NC Empty

41 M1_A Connecting end A of A-phase winding of the sample syringe motor

(SM 1)

42 M1_AN Connecting end AN of A-phase winding of the sample syringe

motor (SM 1)

43 M1_B Connecting end B of B-phase winding of the sample syringe motor

(SM 1)

44 M1_BN Connecting end BN of B-phase winding of the sample syringe

motor (SM 1)

Hardware System

5-71

45 M2_A Connecting end A of A-phase winding of the sample injection

syringe motor (SM 2)

46 M2_AN Connecting end AN of A-phase winding of the sample injection


47 M2_B Connecting end B of B-phase winding of the sample injection


48 M2_BN Connecting end BN of B-phase winding of the sample injection


49 M3_A Connecting end A of A-phase winding of the sheath syringe motor

(SM 3)

50 M3_AN Connecting end AN of A-phase winding of the sheath syringe motor

(SM 3)

51 M3_B Connecting end B of B-phase winding of the sheath syringe motor

(SM 3)

52 M3_BN Connecting end BN of B-phase winding of the sheath syringe motor

(SM 3)

53 M4_A Connecting end A of A-phase winding of the lyse syringe motor (SM

4)

54 M4_AN Connecting end AN of A-phase winding of the lyse syringe motor

(SM 4)

55 M4_B Connecting end B of B-phase winding of the lyse syringe motor

(SM 4)

56 M4_BN Connecting end BN of B-phase winding of the lyse syringe motor

(SM 4)

57 M5_A Connecting end A of A-phase winding of the diluent syringe motor

(SM 5)

58 M5_AN Connecting end AN of A-phase winding of the diluent syringe motor

(SM 5)

59 M5_B Connecting end B of B-phase winding of the diluent syringe motor

(SM 5)

60 M5_BN Connecting end BN of B-phase winding of the diluent syringe motor

(SM 5)

61 M6_A Connecting end A of A-phase winding of the reserved motor (SM 6,

reserved)

62 M6_AN Connecting end AN of A-phase winding of the reserved motor (SM

6, reserved)

63 M6_B Connecting end B of B-phase winding of the reserved motor (SM 6,

reserved)

64 M6_BN Connecting end BN of B-phase winding of the reserved motor (SM

Hardware System

5-72

6, reserved)

65 M_SIN9 Receiving end feedback signal of close tube position sensor (OP 9)

66 VC_SEN11 Sending end power signal of position sensor 11 (reserved)

67 M_SIN12 Receiving end feedback signal of DIFF bath position sensor (OP

12)

68 VC_SEN14 Sending end power signal of RBC bath position sensor (OP 14)

69 M_SIN15 Receiving end feedback signal of sample probe Y upper position

sensor (OP 15)

70 DCM DC motor control signal (reserved)


72 NC Empty

73 M1_A Connecting end A of A-phase winding of the sample syringe motor

(SM 1)

74 M1_AN Connecting end AN of A-phase winding of the sample syringe

motor (SM 1)

75 M1_B Connecting end B of B-phase winding of the sample syringe motor

(SM 1)

76 M1_BN Connecting end BN of B-phase winding of the sample syringe

motor (SM 1)

77 M2_A Connecting end A of A-phase winding of the sample injection


78 M2_AN Connecting end AN of A-phase winding of the sample injection


79 M2_B Connecting end B of B-phase winding of the sample injection


80 M2_BN Connecting end BN of B-phase winding of the sample injection


81 M3_A Connecting end A of A-phase winding of the sheath syringe motor

(SM 3)

82 M3_AN Connecting end AN of A-phase winding of the sheath syringe motor

(SM 3)

83 M3_B Connecting end B of B-phase winding of the sheath syringe motor

(SM 3)

84 M3_BN Connecting end BN of B-phase winding of the sheath syringe motor

(SM 3)

85 M4_A Connecting end A of A-phase winding of the lyse syringe motor (SM

4)

86 M4_AN Connecting end AN of A-phase winding of the lyse syringe motor

(SM 4)

Hardware System

5-73

87 M4_B Connecting end B of B-phase winding of the lyse syringe motor

(SM 4)

88 M4_BN Connecting end BN of B-phase winding of the lyse syringe motor

(SM 4)

89 M5_A Connecting end A of A-phase winding of the diluent syringe motor

(SM 5)

90 M5_AN Connecting end AN of A-phase winding of the diluent syringe motor

(SM 5)

91 M5_B Connecting end B of B-phase winding of the diluent syringe motor

(SM 5)

92 M5_BN Connecting end BN of B-phase winding of the diluent syringe motor

(SM 5)

93 M6_A Connecting end A of A-phase winding of the reserved motor (SM 6,

reserved)

94 M6_AN Connecting end AN of A-phase winding of the reserved motor (SM

6, reserved)

95 M6_B Connecting end B of B-phase winding of the reserved motor (SM 6,

reserved)

96 M6_BN Connecting end BN of B-phase winding of the reserved motor (SM

6, reserved)

Definition of J8

J8 is the interface used for communication debugging.

Definition of J9

J9 is the MCU debug interface (JTAG mode).

Table 5-63 FPGA debug interface-definition of J9

Pin Name Pin Name

1 VDD 2 GND

3 GND 4 TCK

5 TMS 6 TDO

7 TDI 8 NC

9 GND 10 NC

Definition of J10

J10 is the interface used for communication debugging.

Hardware System

5-74

Assembly drawing

Figure 5-15 Assembly drawing of the drive board

Hardware System

5-75



Table 5-64 LED definition

Indicator Note

D1 FPGA configuration status indicator. It turns on during FPGA configuration.

D2 FPGA working status indicator. It flashes every 1s when FPGA works

normally.

D49 24V power supply (24V0) status indicator. It turns on when the 24V power

supply is normal.

D50 3.3V power supply (VDD) status indicator. It turns on when the 3.3V power

supply is normal.

D51 12V power supply (12V0) status indicator. It turns on when the 12V power

supply is normal.

D52 5V power supply (VDD) status indicator. It turns on when the 5V analog

power supply is normal.

D65 MCU working status indicator. It flashes every 1s when MCU works normally.

D66 Working status indicator of optical system heater. It turns on during heating.

D67 Working status indicator of reaction bath (DIFF bath). It turns on during

heating.


Table 5-65 Test point definition

No. Name Pin Note

1 TP1 PIN26 of U2 FPGA configuration signals F_NCONFIG

2 TP2 PIN28 of U2 FPGA 24.5454MHz clock input signals

FPGA_CLK

3 TP3 PIN228 of U2 Address latch enabling signals of MCU

external bus ALE

4 TP4 PIN50 of U2 Read signals of MCU external bus /RD

5 TP5 PIN20 of U2 FPGA interrupt request signals FPGA_INT

6 TP6 PIN73 of U2 Write signals of MCU external bus /WR

Hardware System

5-76

7 TP7 PIN11 of U2 FPGA reset signals F_RST

8 TP8 1V5 Voltage of +1.5VDC power supply

(1.5±0.075V)

9 TP9 SIO_IN Data input signals of MCU valve control chip

10 TP10 SIO_CLK Clock signals of MCU valve control chip

11 TP11 SIO_EN Enabling signals of MCU valve control chip

12 TP12 SIO_LATCH Data latch signals of MCU valve control chip

13 TP13 PIN17 of U10 Stepping pulse signals of sample probe X

motor STEP7

14 TP14 PIN15 of U9 Stepping pulse signals of sample probe Y

motor STEP8

15 TP16 PIN15 of U21 Stepping pulse signals of sample syringe

motor STEP1

16 TP17 PIN13 of U20 Stepping pulse signals of sample injection

syringe motor STEP2

17 TP18 PIN17 of U20 Stepping pulse signals of sheath syringe

motor STEP3

18 TP19 PIN17 of U25 Stepping pulse signals of lyse syringe motor

STEP4

19 TP20 PIN16 of U26 Stepping pulse signals of diluent syringe

motor STEP5

20 TP21 PIN11 of U10 Stepping pulse signals of reserved motor

STEP6 (not used)

21 TP22 VDD Voltage of +3.3VDC power supply

(3.3±0.15V)

22 TP23

23 TP24 GND Digital ground

24 TP25 1V5 Voltage of +1.5VDC power supply

(1.5±0.075V)

25 TP26 PIN1 of U32 Ambient temperature detection signals

(voltage) AMBINET_T

26 TP27 ADC_VCC Detection signals of VCC（+5VDC） after

voltage-dividing （2.00±0.15V）

27 TP28 ADC_12V Detection signals of 12V0(+12VDC) after


28 TP29 ADC_24V Detection signals of 24V0(+24VDC) after


29 TP30 PIN1 of U33 Pressure chamber detection signals

Hardware System

5-77

(voltage) PRESSURE_1ST

30 TP31 PIN7 of U33 Vacuum chamber detection signals

(voltage) PRESSURE_2ST

31 TP34 PIN2 of U37 Reference voltage of MCU analog-to-digital

module REFIN（2.50±0.006V）

34 TP35 PIN100 of U35 Voltage of MCU digital-to-analog output

channel 0

35 TP36 PIN26 of U35 MCU 25.5454MHz clock input signals

CLKIN

36 TP37 PIN99 of U35 Voltage of MCU digital-to-analog output

channel 1

37 TP38 PIN57 of U35 MCU system clock output signals SYSCLK

38 TP39 PIN6 of U45 Amplifier output signals of the temperature

collection module TEMPER_AD

39 TP40 PRTD_REF Basic voltage of the amplifier input signals

of the temperature collection module

40 TP41 PIN2 of U45 Reference voltage of temperature collection

module amplifier

41 TP42 PIN3 of U45 Input voltage of temperature collection

module amplifier

42 TP43 PIN8 of U22 Driving reference voltage of sample syringe

motor VREF1

43 TP44 PIN8 of U23 Driving reference voltage of sample

injection syringe motor VREF2

44 TP45 PIN8 of U24 Driving reference voltage of sheath syringe

motor VREF3

45 TP46 PIN8 of U29 Driving reference voltage of lyse syringe

motor VREF4

46 TP47 PIN8 of U28 Driving reference voltage of diluent syringe

motor VREF5

47 TP48 PIN8 of U27 Driving reference voltage of reserved motor

VREF6 (not used)

48 TP49 PIN8 of U11 Driving reference voltage of sample probe X

motor VREF7

49 TP50 PIN8 of U13 Driving reference voltage of sample probe Y

motor VREF8

Key definition

The reset switch S1 on the drive board is used to reset the drive board manually. Press the

Hardware System

5-78

reset switch to reset the MCU and FPGA.


Purpose

The drive board is a key component. Please maintain or replace the drive board immediately if

any error or damage occurs. Please follow the procedures to have the drive board replaced.

Tools



Disassembly

Drive board disassembly consists of the following two main procedures:

Remove the drive board from the main unit:

1. Shutdown the analyzer and cut off the power supply;

2. Open the left door;

3. Use your hand or cross-headed screwdriver to remove the two hand-tightened screws

from the bracket.

4. Use both of your hands to flip outward the two latches on both sides of the drive board,

and then draw the drive board out.

Hardware System

5-79

Figure 5-16 Assembly drawing of drive board-1

1---Hand-tightened screws 2---Drive board

Further disassembly of the drive board


(M3X6) from the drive board.

2. Remove the drive board from the bracket.

Figure 5-17 Assembly drawing of drive board-2

1---Drive board 2---Bracket


M3x6 (with washer)

Hardware System

5-80

Assembly

Please assemble the data board as per the above-mentioned steps in the reverse order.

Wear antistatic gloves before maintaining or removing the board.

Be sure to shut down the analyzer and cut off the power supply before disassembling/assembling the board.

Verification

1. Check and make sure that all the components are properly connected to the drive board.

2. First ensure the power supply is cut off, then assemble the drive board and motherboard

properly, then power on the analyzer.

3. Check if the indicators on the drive board are in the following status: 1) D49, D50 and D51

turn on; 2) D2 and D65 flash. You can also check the indicators in the “self-test” screen of

the analyzer. If the self-test is passed, it means the driver board is replaced successfully;

otherwise, you should troubleshoot the board.

4. Readjust the sample probe position as per Section 6.10.1 and save the result.


Error analysis and solutions

Errors related to the drive board are identified and handled by the host control software in the

form of error codes. Note that only some of the error codes reported to the host control

software from the dive board can be handled automatically, while some need to be judged with

the help of the users or service engineers. When error is reported, the error No. and error

names are provided by host control software. The recommended solutions may appear on the

screen as the software help information.

When you check for errors, first ensure the board is well fixed and all the error-related

connections are properly connected. For example, when “Sample probe action failed” is

reported, you should check: 1) whether the sample probe assembly is properly connected to

the board; 2) whether the connecters are well connected (in case of bad connection, shut

down the analyzer and cut off the power supply, and then re-plug the connecters); 3)whether

the connection inside the sample probe assembly is proper; 4) whether the symbol on the

sensor connecting line corresponds to the sensor position; 5) whether the symbol on the motor

connecting line corresponds to the motor position (See 6.6.1 for how to disassemble the

sample probe assembly if necessary).

Hardware System

5-81

Only when you make sure that nothing is wrong with the connections can you remove the error

according to the recommended action in the following table. If the error still exists after the

error causes are found and new components are replaced, you need to replace the drive

board.

The error codes, error names and recommended solutions are listed in the following table.

Table 5-66 Troubleshooting errors with the drive board

Error code Error name Error feature Recommended

action

0100 Valve output

failed

FPGA does not allow the MCU write

data into the valve-pump data

register within 50ms, i.e. the serial

output status indication bit in the

register (which is used to judge the

status of valves and pumps of

FPGA) is always 1. It might be FPGA

error or MCU read register error.

Replace drive board

0101

Valve NO. out

of limit (greater

than 40 or

equal to 0)

Download Valve NO. out of limit

(greater than 40 or equal to 0)

Communication

abnormal. Please try

again.

0201

X motor failed

to move to

target position

X motor does not move to the

pre-set target position after action

1. X motor error, action

is interfered.

2. X motor target

position photocoupler

error.

0202

X motor failed

to move to

home position

after

initialization

X motor is not at the home position

after initialization


is interfered.

2. X motor initial


error.

0203

X motor failed

to leave home

position after

initialization

X motor failed to leave home

position when initializing


is interfered.

2. X motor initial


error.

0204

Adjusting X

motor to target

position failed

X motor does not move to target

position after the adjusting command

is executed.


is interfered.

2. X motor target


Hardware System

5-82

error.

0205

Adjusting X

motor back to

home position

failed

X motor does not back to home


is executed


is interfered.

2. X motor initial


error.

0206

Adjusting X

motor to leave

home position

failed

X motor does not leave home


is executed


is interfered.

2. X motor initial


error.

0207

X motor

adjustment

error

X motor adjustment is out of limit [1,

9]

Re-send the X motor

adjusting command

0208

X motor

adjusting steps

out of limit

X motor adjusting steps at the target

position are out of limit [-20, 20]

Adjust the X motor

again

0209

X motor

adjusting end

position error

The position in the X motor adjusting

end command disagrees with the

pre-send adjusting position

Re-send the X motor

adjusting command

0211

Y motor failed

to move to

target position

Y motor does not move to the

pre-set target position after action

1. Y motor error, action

is interfered.

2. Y motor target


error.

0212

Y motor failed

to initialize to

upper position

Y motor is not at the upper position

after initialization


is interfered.

2. Y motor upper


error.

0213

Y motor failed

to initialize to

lower position

Y motor does not move to lower

position when initializing


is interfered.

2. Y motor lower


error.

0214

Adjusting Y

motor to target

position failed

Y motor does not move to target


is executed.


is interfered.

2. Y motor target


error.

Hardware System

5-83

0215

Adjusting Y

motor to upper

position failed

Y motor does not back to upper


is executed


is interfered.

2. Y motor upper


error.

0216

Adjusting Y

motor to leave

upper position

failed

Y motor does not leave upper


is executed


is interfered.

2. Y motor upper


error.

0217

Y motor

adjustment

error

Y motor adjustment is out of limit [1,

6]

Re-send the Y motor

adjusting command

0218

Y motor

adjusting steps

out of limit

Y motor adjusting steps at the target

position are out of limit [-63,63]

Adjust the Y motor

again

0219

Y motor

adjusting end

position error

The position in the Y motor adjusting

end command disagrees with the

pre-send adjusting position

Re-send the Y motor

adjusting command

0220

Sample probe

assembly is

working

X motor or Y motor action is not

finished.

Send the sample

probe command after

the sample probe

action is finished

0221 Cannot adjust

sample probe

Can not send the command to move

the sample probe

upward/downward/leftward/rightward

by one step before sending the

adjusting command.

You can adjust the

sample probe only

after the adjusting

command is sent.

0222 X motor action

overtime

The action time is longer than the

download time.

0223 X motor action

forbidden

X motor is not at the photocoupler

position or Y motor is not at the

upper photocoupler position

Move the Y motor to

upper photocoupler

position

0224

X motor does

not match

current position

X motor current position does not

match the photocoupler position Initialize the X motor

0225 Y motor action

overtime


download time.

0226 X motor action

forbidden

X motor is not at the photocoupler

position

Move the X motor to

the photocoupler

Hardware System

5-84

position

0227

Y motor does

not match

current position

Y motor current position does not

match the photocoupler position Initialize the Y motor

0228

Y motor failed

to pierce to

lower position

Y motor is not at the lower position

after piercing Pierce again

0229

Y motor failed

to pierce to

upper position

Y motor failed to back to upper

position when piercing Pierce again

0230

X motor

photocoupler

error

X motor photocoupler might be

damaged

Replace X motor

photocoupler

0231

Sample probe

RBC bath

photocoupler

error

RBC bath photocoupler might be

damaged

Replace RBC bath

photocoupler

0232

Sample probe

WBC bath

photocoupler

error

WBC bath photocoupler might be

damaged

Replace WBC bath

photocoupler

0233

Sample probe

DIFF bath

photocoupler

error

DIFF bath photocoupler might be

damaged

Replace DIFF bath

photocoupler

0234

Y motor

photocoupler

error

Y motor photocoupler might be

damaged

Replace X motor

photocoupler

0235

Sample probe

upper

photocoupler

error

Upper photocoupler might be

damaged

Replace the upper

photocoupler

0236

Sample probe

lower

photocoupler

error

Lower photocoupler might be

damaged

Replace the lower

photocoupler

0300

Sampling

syringe is

working

Sampling syringe does not finish the

previous action when it is requested

for initializing, resetting, aspirating or

dispensing.

Command is sent early

while the sampling

syringe is still working.

Hardware System

5-85

0301

Sampling

syringe

photocoupler

abnormal

The detected photocoupler signals

are without any change before and

after action.

1. Sampling syringe

photocoupler error (if

sampling syringe

motor moves)

2. Sampling syringe

motor error (if

sampling syringe

motor dose not move)

0302

Sampling

syringe

aspirating or

dispensing

action failed 1

After aspirating or dispensing, the

sampling syringe should be at the

home position, but the position

detected by the photocoupler

disagrees

1. Sampling syringe


the sampling syringe

motor is at the home

position)

2. Sampling syringe

motor error (if the

sampling syringe

motor is not at the

home position)

0303

Sampling

syringe

aspirating or

dispensing

action failed 2


sampling syringe should not be at

the home position, but the position

detected by the photocoupler

disagrees

1. Sampling syringe


the sample syringe

motor is not at the

home position)

2. Sampling syringe

motor error (if the

sampling syringe


position)

0304

Sampling

syringe

aspirating or

dispensing

action

forbidden

Before aspirating or dispensing, the

sampling syringe should be at the

home position, but the actual

position detected by the

photocoupler disagrees

Sampling syringe




position)

0305

Sampling

syringe

aspirating or

dispensing

action

forbidden 2


sampling syringe should not be at

the home position, but the actual

position detected by the

photocoupler disagrees

Sampling syringe



motor is not at the

home position)

Hardware System

5-86

0306

Sample syringe

aspirate volume

over range

Requested volume + aspirated

volume > maximum aspirate volume

Check and make sure

nothing is wrong with


aspirating and

dispensing action; then

consider programming

overflow at the fluidics

debugging phase.

0307

Sample syringe

dispense

volume over

range

Requested volume > aspirated

volume

Check and make sure



aspirating and




debugging phase and

note the volume add

up error.

0308

Sampling

syringe action

overtime


download time.

0310

Sample

injection

syringe is

working

Sample injection syringe does not

finish the previous action when it is

requested for initializing, resetting,

aspirating or dispensing.


while the sample

injection syringe is still

working.

0311

Sample

injection

syringe

photocoupler

abnormal



after action.

1. Sample injection

syringe photocoupler

error (if sample

injection syringe motor

moves)

2. Sample injection

syringe motor error (if

sample injection

syringe motor does not

move)

0312

Sample

injection

syringe

aspirating or

dispensing


syringe should be at the home

position, but the position detected by

the photocoupler disagrees

1. Sample injection


error (if sample

injection syringe is at

the home position)

Hardware System

5-87

action failed 1 2. Sample injection


sample injection

syringe is not at the

home position)

0313

Sample

injection

syringe

aspirating or

dispensing

action failed 2


syringe should not be at the home



1. Sample injection


error (if sample

injection syringe is not

at the home position)

2. Sample injection


sample injection

syringe is at the home

position)

0314

Sample

injection

syringe

aspirating or

dispensing

action

forbidden 1





Sample injection


error (if sample

injection syringe is at

the home position)

0315

Sample

injection

syringe

aspirating or

dispensing

action

forbidden 2





Sample injection


error (if sample

injection syringe is not


0316

Sample

injection

syringe aspirate

volume over

range



Check and make sure



aspirating and




debugging phase.

0317

Sample

injection

syringe


volume

Check and make sure



Hardware System

5-88

dispense

volume over

range

aspirating and




debugging phase and

note the volume add

up error.

0318

Sample

injection

syringe action

overtime


download time.

0320

sheath fluid

syringe is

working

Sheath fluid syringe does not finish

the previous action when it is

requested for initializing, resetting,

aspirating or dispensing.


while the sheath fluid


0321

Sheath fluid

syringe

photocoupler

abnormal



after action.

1. Sheath fluid syringe


sheath fluid syringe

motor moves)


motor error (if sheath

fluid syringe motor

dose not move)

0322

Sheath fluid

syringe

aspirating or

dispensing

action failed 1









position)



fluid syringe motor is

not at the home

position)

0323

Sheath fluid

syringe

aspirating or

dispensing

action failed 2








motor is not at the

home position)



Hardware System

5-89

fluid syringe motor is


0324

Sheath fluid

syringe

aspirating or

dispensing

action

forbidden 1





Sheath fluid syringe


sample syringe motor

is at the home position)

0325

Sheath fluid

syringe

aspirating or

dispensing

action

forbidden 2





Sheath fluid syringe


sample syringe motor

is not at the home

position)

0326

Sheath fluid

syringe aspirate

volume over

range



Check and make sure



aspirating and




debugging phase.

0327

Sheath fluid

syringe

dispense

volume over

range


volume

Check and make sure



aspirating and




debugging phase and

note the volume add

up error.

0328

Sheath fluid

syringe action

overtime


download time.

0330 Lyse syringe is

working

Lyse syringe does not finish the



dispensing.


while the lyse syringe

is still working.

0331 Lyse syringe The detected photocoupler signals 1. Lyse syringe

Hardware System

5-90

photocoupler

abnormal


after action.


the lyse syringe motor

moves)

2. Lyse syringe motor

error (if the lyse

syringe motor does not

move)

0332

Lyse syringe

aspirating or

dispensing

action failed 1





1. Lyse syringe





error (if the lyse

syringe motor is not at

the home position)

0333

Lyse syringe

aspirating or

dispensing

action failed 2





1. Lyse syringe



is not at the home

position)


error (if the lyse

syringe motor is at the

home position)

0334

Lyse syringe

aspirating or

dispensing

action

forbidden 1





Lyse syringe




0335

Lyse syringe

aspirating or

dispensing

action

forbidden 2





Lyse syringe



is not at the home

position)

0336

Lyse syringe

aspirate volume

over range



Check and make sure



aspirating and



Hardware System

5-91


debugging phase.

0337

Lyse syringe

dispense

volume over

range


volume

Check and make sure



aspirating and




debugging phase and

note the volume add

up error.

0338 Lyse syringe

action overtime


download time.

0340 Diluent syringe

is working

Diluent syringe does not finish the



dispensing.


while the diluent


0341

Diluent syringe

photocoupler

abnormal



after action.

1. Diluent syringe


the diluent syringe

motor moves)

2. Diluent syringe

motor error (if the

diluent syringe motor

dose not move)

0342

Diluent syringe

aspirating or

dispensing

action failed 1





1. Diluent syringe


the diluent syringe


position)

2. Diluent syringe

motor error (if the

diluent syringe motor is

not at the home

position)

0343

Diluent syringe

aspirating or

dispensing

action failed 2





1. Diluent syringe


the diluent syringe

motor is not at the

Hardware System

5-92

home position)

2. Diluent syringe

motor error (if the

diluent syringe motor is


0344

Diluent syringe

aspirating or

dispensing

action

forbidden 1





Diluent syringe


the diluent syringe


position)

0345

Diluent syringe

aspirating or

dispensing

action

forbidden 2





Diluent syringe


the diluent syringe

motor is not at the

home position)

0346

Diluent syringe

aspirate volume

over range



Check and make sure



aspirating and




debugging phase.

0347

Diluent syringe

dispense

volume over

range


volume

Check and make sure



aspirating and




debugging phase and

note the volume add

up error.

0348 Diluent syringe

action overtime


download time.

0390

Automatic

testing

command

forbidden

Start testing the motors before the

automatic testing command is

received.

First start the

automatic testing

command, and then

test the motors.

0401 Reaction bath The reaction bath temp. setup is out Re-set the reaction

Hardware System

5-93

temp. setup out

of limit

of the MCU pre-set range

[30 ,50 ]℃ ℃

bath temperature

0402

Optical system

temp. setup out

of limit

The optical system temp. setup is

out of the MCU pre-set range

[30 ,50 ]℃ ℃

Re-set the optical

system temperature

0403 Reaction bath

temp. error

Reaction bath temperature is out of

the set range

1. Check whether the

heater of the reaction

bath is well connected.


temperature collection

channel of the reaction

bath is normal.

0404 Optical system

temp. error

Optical system temperature is out of

the set range


heater of the optical

system is well

connected.


temperature collection

channel of the optical

system is normal.

0405

Reaction bath

temp.

compensation

error

Compensation value and ones’

complement code don’t match

Reset the reaction

bath temp.

compensation

0406

Optical system

temp.

compensation

error



Reset the optical

system temp.

compensation

0407

Ambient temp.

compensation

error



Reset the ambient

temp. compensation

0408

Reaction bath

temp.

compensation

out of limit

Reaction bath temp. compensation

out of the set range [-12.7℃, 12.7

℃]

Reset the reaction

bath temp.

compensation

0409

Optical system

temp.

compensation

out of limit

Optical system temp. compensation

out of the set range [-12.7℃, 12.7

℃]

Reset the optical

system temp.

compensation

Hardware System

5-94

040a

Ambient temp.

compensation

out of limit

Ambient temp. compensation out of

the set range [-12.7℃, 12.7℃]

Reset the ambient

temp. compensation

0501 Ambient temp.

abnormal

Ambient temperature is out of the set

range

1. The actual ambient

temperature is out of

the working range.


temperature

transducer and the

measurement circuit

work normally.

0601

Controlling

pressure

chamber

pressure

failed

The pressure in the chamber can not

reach the target range within the

specified fluidics time.


pneumatic connection

is well connected and

whether the pressure

pump works normally.


pressure sensor works

normally and whether

the pressure detection

signals of the MCU are

normal.

0602

Controlling

vacuum

chamber

vacuum failed

The vacuum in the chamber can not

reach the target range within the

specified fluidics time.




whether the vacuum

pump and valve 30

and 31 works normally.






normal.

0603

Adjusting

pressure

chamber

pressure failed

The pressure in the chamber is

being controlled. Can not send the

adjusting command

Wait and then send the

adjusting command

again after the

previous pressure

controlling is done.

0604 Adjusting The vacuum in the chamber is being Wait and then send the

Hardware System

5-95

vacuum

chamber

vacuum failed

controlled. Can not send the

adjusting command

adjusting command

again after the

previous vacuum

controlling is done.

0605

Pressure

chamber

pressure out of

limit

The pressure in the chamber is out

of the set range




whether the pressure

pump works normally.






normal.

0606

Vacuum

chamber

vacuum out of

limit

The vacuum in the chamber is out of

the set range




whether the vacuum

pump and valve 30

and 31 works normally.






normal.

0607

Pressure

chamber

pressure

control range

error

The pressure control of the pressure

chamber is of negative range.

Re-send the control

command of positive

range

0608

Vacuum

chamber

vacuum control

range error

The vacuum control of the vacuum

chamber is of positive range

Re-send the control

command of negative

range

0701

FPGA

download mark

error

Wrong download mark. It is not ':'

start Re-download

0702 FPGA The download command is not Re-download

Hardware System

5-96

download

command error

defined.

0703

Read all

configuration

chip content

finished

Finish reading data

0704 Data write out

of limit

The data written for a single time

exceeds the maximum of 32 digits Re-download

0705

Data write and

head-address

over range

The data written plus the

head-address exceed the maximum

content of one page (256 bytes).

Re-download

0706 Write forbidden Failed to write the configuration chip Send the enabling

command first

0707 Write overtime Write delay exceeds 10ms Re-download

0731 Write-in

EEPROM error Failed to write data into EEPROM

1. Check the EEPROM

circuit for any

missing-soldered

component; check the

EEPROM pin for short

circuit and missolder,

etc.

2. If short circuit is not

found and all

components are

properly soldered, it

indicates the EEPROM

is damaged.

0801

Functional code

in the control

code error

The functional code is not defined in

the communication rules.

Communication


again.

0802 Data length

error

The data length mismatches the

corresponding data length of the

current command label

Communication


again.

0803 Command label

error

The command label is not defined in


Communication


again.

0804 Check code

error

The check code mismatches the

calculated one

Communication


again.

0805 End code error The end code is not the one defined Communication

Hardware System

5-97

in the communication rules. (016) abnormal. Please try

again.

0806

Identity code in

the control code

error

The identity code is not defined in


Communication


again.

0817

None-sequence

pack analysis

error

Unable to analyze the

none-sequence pack command

Re-send the correct

command

Troubleshooting special errors

1. Troubleshooting the abnormal pneumatic pressure

If a certain pressure value is abnormal, check the related pumps, valves and airway

for leakage.

If the pneumatic system is normal, then the error should be caused by the damaged

pressure sensor on the drive board. Please replace the sensor or the drive board.

The pressure signals are outputted by the volumetric board. See the following table

for the voltage and pressure.

Table 5-67 Voltage signals and the corresponding pressures

Pressure

channel

Pressure

range Test point

Relation between sensor

output voltage and pressure Note

Pressure

chamber 2.5～4kPa TP30

Vacuum

chamber

-8 ～

-40kPa TP31

( ) 25025.1 ×−= VoutP

P represents

pressure, and

its unit is kPa.

Volt

represents the

voltage of the

test point, and

its unit is V

2. Troubleshooting the abnormal mechanism action

To observe and troubleshoot the abnormal mechanism actions, the service engineers are

usually needed. When errors of this kind happen, please be sure to troubleshoot them as per

the above-mentioned recommended action and the following procedures.

Check whether the error-related mechanisms (such as motors) can move. If the

mechanisms do not move, then the error should be caused by the abnormal executive

components, such as disconnected or damaged motor. If nothing is wrong with them, then

Hardware System

5-98

the error should be caused by the damaged drive board, so the driver board should be

replaced.

If the mechanisms can move, check whether they move in position and whether they are

jammed by lines or other mechanisms during the movement. For transmissive

photocoupler, if the baffle enters above 2/3 photocoupler, it is baffled and moves is in

position.

If nothing is wrong with the mechanism action, consider the photocoupler error. Replace

the photocoupler.

If errors still remain after the photocoupler is replaced, then it should be caused by the

error components on the driver board. Replace the driver board.

Hardware System

5-99

5.4 Autoloader board

5.4.1 Introduction The autoloader board is to feed and mix blood samples, as well as scan barcode information

on tubes.

5.4.2 Board Composition

Function

Stepping motor control

Electromagnet control

Position sensor and sensitive switch status detection

Scanner control

Parameter storage

Block diagram

BUS

C8051F020UA

RT

0

IRQ

Step M

otor Control

EP1C3T144

1

2

3

4

Interface

RS422

D 5VP 12VP 24V

LDODigital 5V 3.3V

FPGA Configuration

Device

Config

Config

5

LDO3.3V 1.5V

Reset

Reset

FPGA Reset

Sensor

Sensor

Status

Mother B

oard

JTA

G

Pow

er B

oard

Sole

noid

Scanner

UART1

Clock

Clock

SMXM

SMZM

SMRM

Sample Mix

SFXM

SFYM

Sample Feed

EE

PR

OM

Figure 5-18 Block diagram of the autoloader board

Description

Stepping motor drive

The autoloader board provide the drive control to the following five stepping motors:

X-co motor of the mix mechanism

Z-co motor of the mix mechanism

Mix motor

Hardware System

5-100

X-co loading motor

Y-co feeding motor

The stepping motor drive is a type of bipolar consist-current half-step drive, and there are

position sensors corresponding to the stepping motors to detect their positions.

Electromagnet control

The electromagnet is used to control the process of opening the sample compartment door

(manual close).

Built-in scanner control

The built-in scanner control is used to read barcodes on tubes and tube racks. The autoloader

board controls the built-in scanner through MCU, and the UART communication between MCU

and the built-in scanner through Serial port 1.

Position sensor and sensitive switch status detection

There are 13 position sensor and 1 sensitive switch on the autoloader. The status of the

sensors and switch is detected by FPGA, and MCU will check the status value of the FPGA

internal storage when necessary.

Parameter storage

As there may be manufacture or installation errors, it is necessary to adjust the initial positions

for the X-co motor of the mix mechanism and the mix motor. The adjusted position parameters

will be stored on the autoloader board.


The autoloader is configured with 14 external interfaces, shown as follows.

Table 5-68 External ports on the autoloader board

Interface Function Number of pins Description

J1 FPGA configuration interface (AS mode)

10 FPGA downloading

J2 FPGA debugging interface (JTAG)

6 FPGA debugging

J3 Electromagnet interface 2 / J4 Reserved 2 J5 Power interface 6

J6 Mix mechanism sensor interface

20

J7 Feeding unit sensor interface 1

20

Not applied to the unit

Hardware System

5-101

J8 Feeding unit sensor interface 2

20

J10 Reserved 5 /

J11 MCU configuration interface

10 /

J12 Communication interface 4 / J14 Feeding motor interface 8 /

J15 Control the X-co motor and Z-co motor of the mix mechanism

8 /

J16 Mix motor interface 4 / P1 Built-in scanner interface 15 /

Definition of J1:

J1 is the FPGA configuration interface (AS mode).

Table 5-69 Definition of the FPGA configuration interface

Pin Name Pin Name

1 F_DCLK 2 AGND 3 F_CONFDONE 4 VDD 5 F_CONFIG 6 F_NCE 7 F_DATA 8 F_NCSC9 F_ASDO 10 GND

Definition of J3:

J3 is the electromagnet interface.

Table 5-70 Definition of the electromagnet interface

Pin Name Description Mark on Wire

Level Note

1 12V0 Working power supply for the electromagnet

12V Current:1A

2 solenoid Control signal for the electromagnet

SOLENOID

Definition of J5:

Table 5-71 Definition of the power interface

Pin Name Description 1 D+5V 5V power supply (digital) 2 P+12V 12V power supply (power) 3 P+24V 24V power supply (power) 4 GND Digital ground 5 PGND Power ground 6 PGND Power ground

Hardware System

5-102

Definition of J6:

J6 is the mix mechanism sensor interface.

Table 5-72 Definition of the mix mechanism sensor interface

Pin Name Description Mark on Wire Note 1 V_X_START Sending end power signal of

X-co initial position 2 X_START Photocoupler signal of X-co

initial position 3 GND Ground 4 GND Ground

MX_START Transmissive sensor

5 V_X_END Sending end power signal of X-co end position

6 X_END Photocoupler signal of X-co end position

7 GND Ground 8 GND Ground

MX_END Transmissive sensor

9 V_Z_START Sending end power signal of Z-co initial position

10 Z_START Photocoupler signal of Z-co initial position


MZ_START Transmissive sensor

13 V_Z_END Sending end power signal of Z-co end position

14 Z_END Photocoupler signal of Z-co end position


MZ_END Transmissive sensor

17 V_R_START Sending end power signal of mix mechanism initial position

18 R_START Photocoupler signal of mix mechanism initial position

19 GND 20 GND

MR_START Transmissive sensor

21 V_SYRINGE Sending end power signal of the sampling position

22 SYRINGE Photocoupler signal of the sampling position


Preserved Transmissive sensor

Definition of J7:

J7 is the feeding sensor interface.

Hardware System

5-103

Table 5-73 Definition of the feeding sensor interface 1


Note

1 V_X_START Sending end power signal of the photocoupler for X-co feeding motor initial position

3 GND Ground 5 X_START Receiving end signal of the

photocoupler for X-co feeding motor initial position

FX_START

Transmissive sensor

2 V_ X_END Sending end power signal of the photocoupler for X-co feeding motor end position

4 GND Ground 6 X_END Receiving end signal of the

photocoupler for X-co feeding motor end position

FX_END

Transmissive sensor

7 V_Y_START Sending end power signal of the photocoupler for Y-co feeding motor initial position

9 GND Ground 11 Y_START Receiving end signal of the

photocoupler for Y-co feeding motor initial position

FY_START

Transmissive

sensor

8 V_Y_RIGHT Sending end power signal of the right photocoupler for Y-co feeding

10 GND Ground 12 Y_RIGHT Receiving end power signal of the right

photocoupler for Y-co feeding

FY_RIGHT Transmissive

sensor

13 V_Y_LEFT Sending end power signal of the left photocoupler for Y-co feeding

15 GND Ground 17 Y_LEFT Receiving end signal of the left

photocoupler for Y-co feeding

FY_LEFT Transmissive

sensor

14 V_UL_START Sending end power signal of the photocoupler for unloading initial position

16 GND Ground 18 UL_START Receiving end signal of the

photocoupler for unloading initial position

F_UL_START

Transmissive sensor

19 GND Ground 20 X_READY Sensitive switch for X-co loading ready

position FX_READY Sensitive

switch

Definition of J8:

J8 is the other feeding sensor interface.

Hardware System

5-104

Table 5-74 Definition of the feeding sensor interface 2


Note

1 V_Y_READY Sending end power signal of the Y-co feeding ready photocoupler

3 GND Ground 5 VCC Receiving end power signal of the Y-co

feeding ready photocoupler 7 Y_READY Receiving end signal of the Y-co feeding

ready photocoupler

Reserved Reflective photocoupler

2 V_UL_FULL Sending end power signal of photocoupler detecting full unloading platform

4 GND Ground 6 VCC Receiving end power signal of

photocoupler detecting full unloading platform

8 UL_FULL Signal of photocoupler detecting full unloading platform

F_UL_FULL

Reflective photocoupler

9 V_TUBE Sending end power signal of tube detecting photocoupler

11 GND Ground

13 VCC Receiving end power signal of tube detecting photocoupler

15 TUBE Tube detecting photocoupler signal

F_TUBE Reflective photocoupler

10 VT_RACK Sending end power signal of sample volume sensor

12 GND Ground 14 VCC Receiving end power signal of sample

volume sensor 16 RACK Sample volume sensor signal

Reserved Reflective photocoupler

17 VC_DOOR Sending end signal of sample compartment door detecting sensor

18 DOOR Receiving end signal of the photocoupler for initial unloading position

19 GND Ground

DOOR

Reflective photocoupler

20 NC Floating

Definition of J11:

J11 is the MCU configuration interface.

Hardware System

5-105

Table 5-75 Definition of the MCU configuration interface

Pin Name Description 1 VDD Power signal 2 GND Ground 3 GND Ground 4 TCK JTAG clock 5 TMS JTAG mode selection signal6 TDO JTAG output data signal 7 TDI JTAG input data signal 8 NC Floating 9 GND Ground 10 NC Floating

Definition of J12:

J12 is the communication interface.

Table 5-76 Definition of the communication interface

Pin Name Description 1 RX+ Serial data receiving end 2 RX- Serial data receiving end 3 TX+ Serial data receiving end 4 TX- Serial data receiving end

Definition of J14:

J14 is the feeding motor interface.

Table 5-77 Definition of the feeding motor interface


1 X_BN Control signal of Phase A, X-co loading motor

2 X_B Control signal of Phase AN, X-co loading motor

3 X_AN Control signal of Phase B, X-co loading motor

4 X_A Control signal of Phase BN, X-co loading motor

SFXM

5 Y_BN Control signal of Phase A, Y-co feeding motor

6 Y_B Control signal of Phase AN, Y-co feeding motor

7 Y_AN Control signal of Phase B, Y-co feeding motor

8 Y_A Control signal of Phase BN, Y-co feeding motor

SFYM

Hardware System

5-106

Definition of J15:

J15 is the control interface of X-co motor and Z-co motor for the mix mechanism.

Table 5-78 Definition of the interface of X-co motor and Z-co motor for the mix mechanism


1 X_BN Control signal of Phase BN, X-co manipulator motor

2 X_B Control signal of Phase B, X-co manipulator motor

3 X_AN Control signal of Phase AN, X-co manipulator motor

4 X_A Control signal of Phase A, X-co manipulator motor

SMXM

5 Z_BN Control signal of Phase BN, Z-co manipulator motor

6 Z_B Control signal of Phase B, Z-co manipulator motor

7 Z_AN Control signal of Phase AN, Z-co manipulator motor

8 Z_A Control signal of Phase A, Z-co manipulator motor

SMZM

Definition of J16:

J16 is the mix motor interface.

Table 5-79 Definition of the mix motor interface


1 R_BN Control signal of Phase BN, mix motor

2 R_B Control signal of Phase B, mix motor

3 R_AN Control signal of Phase AN, mix motor

4 R_A Control signal of Phase A, mix motor

SMRM

Definition of P1:

P1 is the built-in scanner interface.

Hardware System

5-107

Table 5-80 Definition of the built-in scanner interface

Pin Name Description 1 VCC Power signal 2 TXD Serial data receiving end 3 RXD Serial data sending end 4 GND Signal ground 5 NC Floating 6 CTS Sending “ready” signal 7 OUTPUT1 Scanner out put signal 1 8 \ \ 9 Trigger Trigger signal 10 RTS Sending request signal 11 OUTPUT3 Scanner out put signal 3 12 \ \ 13 Chassis Shielding ground 14 OUTPUT2 Scanner out put signal 2 15 NC Floating

Hardware System

5-108

Assembly drawing

Figure 5-19 Assembly drawing of the autoloader

Hardware System

5-109



Table 5-81 LED definition

Indicator Description

D3 12V power supply status indicator. It turns on when the 12V power supply is normal

D4 5V power supply status indicator. It turns on when the 5V power supply is normal

D5 3.3V power supply status indicator. It turns on when the 3.3V power supply is normal

D25 MCU working status indicator. It flashes every 0.5s when MCU works normally

D26 FPGA working status indicator. It flashes every 0.5s when FPGA works normally


Table 5-82 Test point definition

No. Name Pin Note

1 TP1 PIN3 of X1 24.4545M crystal oscillator clock output

signal, FPGA working clock

2 TP2 PIN47 of U2 RD signals of MCU

3 TP3 PIN62 of U2 WR signals of MCU

4 TP4 PIN10 of U2 ALE signals of MCU

5 TP5 PIN28 of U2 FPGA reset signals

6 TP6 PIN5 of J1 FPGA configuration start signal

7 TP7 VCC +5VDC voltage（5±0.25V）

8 TP8 12V0 +12VDC voltage (12±1.2V)

9 TP9 24V0 +24VDC voltage（24±1.2V）

10 TP10 VDD +3.3VDC voltage（3.3±0.15V）

11 TP11 GND

12 TP12 GND

13 TP13 1V5 +1.5VDC voltage（1.5±0.05V）

14 TP15 TUBE Tube detection photocoupler output signal

(0.4V when blocked, and 0.2V unblocked)

15 TP18 PIN3 of X2 24.4545M crystal oscillator clock output

signal, MCU working clock

Hardware System

5-110

16 TP21 PIN12 of U16 Stepping pulse signals of Y-co feeding

motor

17 TP23 PIN12 of U18 Stepping pulse signals of X-co feeding

motor

18 TP24 PIN12 of U22 Stepping pulse signals of Z-co mix motor

19 TP25 PIN12 of U23 Stepping pulse signals of X-co mix motor

20 TP26 PIN12 of U24 Stepping pulse signals of the mix motor

Key definition

The reset switch S1 on the drive board is used to reset the drive board manually. Press the

reset switch to reset the MCU and FPGA.


Purpose

The autoloader board is a key component. You should maintain or replace the board

immediately if any error or damage occurs. Follow the procedures to have the autoloader

board replaced.

Tools



Disassembly



3. Use the 107 cross-headed screwdriver to remove the two M4X8 panhead screws fixing the

shielding box, and then remove the box;

4. Unplug all the cords and connectors connected to the autoloader control board;

5. Use the 107 cross-headed screwdriver to remove the five M3X6 cross-headed panhead

screws fixing the autoloader control board, and then remove the board.

Hardware System

5-111

Figure 5-20 Removing the autoloader control board

1 ---Shielding box 2 --- Panhead screw M4X8

3 --- Autoloader control board 4 ---Cross-headed panhead screw M3X6

Assembly

Assemble the autoloader control board as per the above-mentioned steps in the reverse order.



Verification

1. Check and make sure that all the components are properly connected to the autoloader

control board.

2. After ensuring the power supply is cut off, assemble the drive board and motherboard

properly, and then power on the analyzer.

3. Check if the indicators on the autoloader control board are in the following status: 1) D3,

D4 and D5 turned on; 2) D25 and D26 flashing. You can also check the indicators in the

“self-test” screen of the analyzer. If the self-test is passed, it means the autoloader control

board is replaced successfully; otherwise, you should troubleshoot the board.

Hardware System

5-112

4. Readjust the pincher position as per Section 6.10.2


Error analysis and solutions

Errors related to the autoloader board are identified and handled by the host control software

in the form of error codes. Note that only some of the error codes reported to the host control

software from the autoloader board can be handled automatically, while some need to be

judged with the help of users or service engineers. When an error is reported, the error No.

and error names are provided by host control software. The recommended solutions may

appear on the screen as the software help information.

Most errors of the autoloader board are identified by checking the photocoupler information, so

check the photocouplers first in case of errors. To check the photocouplers: first make sure that

the photocouplers are not blocked, and check if the status information of the photocouplers

from the software matches the actual status; hide the photocouplers with lighttight material,

and check if the status information matches the actual status. Inconsistency found in either one

of the two checks indicates invalidation of the photocouplers; otherwise, the error comes from

the board itself.

Typical errors and solutions:

1. Y-co left or right photocoupler error

The cause of such an error: there two photocouplers mounted on the Y-co feeding direction of

the autoloader, which are called the left photocoupler and right photocoupler. In the

autoloading mode, the current tube feeding status is identified based on the number of times

when the level of the photocouplers jumped and the status of the photocouplers. Therefore,

the left and right photocouplers should be related with each other based on certain logical

requirements. If the requirements are not met, the “Y-co left photocoupler or right photocoupler

error” will be reported.

Troubleshooting measures: 1) check the photocouplers for errors (according to the steps

mentioned above); 2) Check if there is any tube rack blocked along the Y-co feeding line which

occurs when the Y-co feeding motor is not able to push the tube rack due to the tube rack out

of shape or assembly error of the sample transport unit. In such a case, shut down the

analyzer and switch off all the power supplies, and then pull the tube rack along the Y-co

feeding line to identify if the tube rack is out of shape and if the unit is mis-assembled. Replace

with a qualified tube rack if the former one is out of shape; disassemble and repair the sample

transport unit in case of mis-assembly; 3) check if there is any tube rack blocked because

there are tube racks slanting at the unloading area or the unloading platform is not qualified.

Check if the length of the tube rack meets the corresponding requirement and if the metallic

plate of the unloading unit is properly manufactured. 4) Check if the autoloader assembly

(including the buffer plates for the left and right photocouplers, Y-co pallet and Y-co tube rack

backboard) is properly assembled. If there is any mis-assembly, re-adjust the installation

Hardware System

5-113

according to the part related to mechanical structure of the analyzer in this manual, and make

sure the mechanism is out of error.

2. The compartment door cannot be opened

Possible causes for this error: a) compartment door photocoupler error; b) compartment spring

error or door structure error.

Troubleshooting measures: a) check if there is any error with the photocouplers; b) press the

[OPEN] key and check if the electromagnet moves. If the electromagnet acts properly, then

there may be errors with the spring or the mechanical structure of the door and replacement or

adjustment may be necessary.

Error codes and troubleshooting measures

Table 5-83 Troubleshooting errors with the autoloader board

ERR Error name Error feature Recommended action

5A00 EEPROM write error

Failed to write data to EEPROM

1. Check if there are EEPROM elements not welded, EEPROM pin short or mis-welded

2. If there are no such errors, then it is identified as an EEPROM error and board

replacement is needed

5201 SMXM action failed

Current action forbidden while the mix mechanism is

in motion

Confirm the action status of the mix mechanism and resend the command


SMXM should not at the home position, but the

home position photocoupler is blocked

1. SMXM home position photocoupler error: replace the photocoupler if it is confirmed to be a photocoupler error


SMXM should at the home position, but the home

position photocoupler is not blocked


SMZM or SMRM not at home position

Check the Z-co and R-co photocouplers replace the photocoupler if it is confirmed to be

a photocoupler error


SMXM not initialized, action forbidden Initialize the X-co motor

5206 SMXM action failed SMXM action overtime

Check if the predefined action time is reasonable and the actual action speed of the

motor meets the requirement of the design


SMXM should not at the end position, but the end position photocoupler is

blocked

1. SMXM end position photocoupler error: replace the photocoupler when it is confirmed to be an photocoupler error


SMXM should at the end position, but the end


5209 SMXM

photocoupler error

Both the home position and end position photocouplers are blocked, then at least one of them has an error

1. Check the SMXM home position and end position photocoupler, and replace the photocoupler when it is confirmed to be an photocoupler error

Hardware System

5-114

5401 SMZM action failed


in motion

1. Confirm the action status of the mix mechanism and resend the command


SMZM should not at the home position, but the

home position photocoupler is hide

1. Home position photocoupler error: replace the photocoupler if it is confirmed to be a photocoupler error


SMZM should at the home position, but the home



SMXM not at the end position or SMRM not at the

home position

1. Check the SMXM and SMRM photocouplers, and replace the photocoupler when it is confirmed to be an photocoupler error


SMZM not initialized, action forbidden Initialize the Z-co motor

5406 SMZM action failed SMZM action overtime




SMZM should not at the end position, but the end position photocoupler is

blocked

1. SMZM end position photocoupler error: replace the photocoupler when it is confirmed to be an photocoupler error


SMZM should at the end position, but the end


5409 SMZM

photocoupler error

Both the home position and end position photocouplers are blocked, then at least one of them has an error

1. Check the SMZM home position and end position photocoupler, and replace the photocoupler when it is confirmed to be an photocoupler error

5501 SMRM action failed


in motion

1. Confirm the action status of the mix mechanism and resend the command


SMRM should not at the home position, but the

home position photocoupler is blocked

1. SMRM home position photocoupler error: replace the photocoupler if it is confirmed to be a photocoupler error


SMRM should at the home position, but the home



SMXM or SMZM not at the end position

2. Check the SMXM and SMZM photocouplers, and replace the photocoupler when it is confirmed to be an photocoupler error


SMRM not initialized, action forbidden Initialize the R-co motor

5506 SMRM action failed SMRM action overtime




Not reach the target position after finish moving Check the SMRM motor and photocouplers

5601 Mix mechanism Action forbidden while the Confirm the action status of the mix

Hardware System

5-115

action failed current mechanism is in motion

mechanism and resend the command

5604 Mix mechanism action failed

Number of mixing times out of predefined range

Confirm the number of mixing times and resend the correct command


Mix mechanism not initialized Initialize the mix mechanism


At least one of the 3 motors is not at the home position

Check the home position photocouplers of the mix motors. and replace the photocoupler when it is confirmed to be an photocoupler

error

5700 SFXM action failed SFXM motor in motion Confirm the SFXM action status and resend

the command

5701 SFXM action failed

SFXM home position photocoupler status does not match the position of

the current motor

1. Self-test if the SFXM home position photocoupler is broken

2. When the photocoupler is working properly, send a SFXM action command to check if the SFXM motor is normal


Tube rack along Y-co; X-co motor forbidden to move to

the end position

1. Remove the tube rack long Y-co, and then resend the command


SFXM end position photocoupler status does not match the position of

the current motor

1. Self-test if the SFXM end position photocoupler is broken;

2. When the photocoupler is working properly, send a action command to check if the SFXM motor is normal

5704 SFXM

photocoupler error

Both the SFXM end position and home position

photocouplers are blocked

1. Check if both the SFXM end position and home position photocouplers are blocked. If

not, it is the photocoupler at fault.

5705 SFXM loading error

Both the SFXM end position photocoupler signal and the X-co ready sensitive switch invalid after finish loading

1． When there is a ready tube rack, if it is determined that the X-co ready sensitive switch does not function properly, then replace the switch

2． When there is no tube racks, SFXM at end position indicates a SFXM end position photocoupler error. Replace the photocoupler.


SFXM motor action overtime

Check if the defined action time is reasonable and the actual action speed of the motor meet

the requirement of the design


FX_READY sensitive switch error: should be

switched off, but is detected to be switched on

Sensitive switch error: replace the sensitive switch after confirming the switch is broken

5801 Functional

control code error

Functional code not defined in the communication

protocol Communication error. Please resend

5802 Data length errorData length differs from that

of the current command label

Communication error. Please resend

5803 Command label error

Command label not defined in the communication

protocol Communication error. Please resend

5804 Check code error The check code differs from the calculated check code Communication error. Please resend

Hardware System

5-116

5805 End code error Not the end code defined in the communication protocol

(016) Communication error. Please resend

5806 Identity control code error

Identity code not defined in the communication protocol Communication error. Please resend

5817 Non-sequence pack analysis

error

Unable to analyze the non-sequence pack Resend the correct command

Hardware System

5-117

5.5 Power board

5.5.1 Introduction The power board provides six stable power supplies, including D5V, A+12V, A-12V, AC130V,

P12V and P24V.


Function

The power board provides the following six stable power supplies for each functional board

and module of the BC-5380: D5V, A+12V, A-12V, AC130V, P12V and P24V.

Block diagram

Figure 5-21 Block diagram of the power board

Description

The power board works with the 90V-264V AC input voltage (50-60Hz).

Hardware System

5-118

Once the AC power switch is turned on, all the circuits work and the

D5V,A+12V,A-12V,AC130V,P12V and P24V voltage are outputted.

Circuit loads of the power board are described in the table below:

Table 5-84 Output voltage features

Voltage Minimum current

Nominal current

Output voltage range

Voltage adjustment

rate

Load adjustment

rate

Noise

D5V 2A 5A 4.85/5.25V ±1％ ±5% 100mV

+A12V 0mA 1A 11. 5/12. 5V ±1％ ±5% 100mV

-A12V 0mA 650mA -11.5/-12.5V ±1％ ±5% 100mV

P12V 0.3A 5.5A 11.5/12.5V ±1％ ±5% 150mV

P24V 0A 4A 22/27V ±1％ ±10% 150mV

AC120V 0mA 60mA 115/145V(RMS) ±1％ ±10% /

For the P24V, the 7.8A maximum current with the approximate lasting time of 2S and the

period of 60S may occur when working.


The power board is configured with 7 external interfaces. The J1 and J2 interfaces are

connectors of the socket; the rest of the interfaces are connectors of the plug terminal leading

from the board edges. The No. of the PCB board is TP1-TP20.The location of the interfaces on

the power board is shown below.

Hardware System

5-119

Figure 5-22 Interface layout of the power board

See the following table for the function of each interface.

Table 5-85 Interfaces on the power board

Interface Function Number of pins Number of lands Note

J1 AC input 3 / /

J2

Power supply output

of the fans 6 / /

A-J12

Power supply output

of the analog part 6 4

PCB

soldering

output

A-J13 AC output 3 2

PCB

soldering

output

Hardware System

5-120

A-J35

Power supply output

of the power part 10 10

PCB

soldering

output

A-J37

Power supply output

of the digital part 4 4

PCB

soldering

output

Definition of J1:

Table 5-86 Definition of AC input interface

Pin Definition

1 L, Live wire

2 PG, Earth wire

3 N, Neutral wire

Definition of J2:

Table 5-87 Definition of the fan interface

Pin Definition

1/3/5

P12V,connects the positive end of the P12V output

voltage

2/4/6

PGND, connects the negative end of the P12V

output voltage

Definition of A－J12:

Table 5-88 Definition of analog board output

Land Definition Pin

TP16AGND\TP17AGND

AGND, connects the reference

ground of the analog board output

voltage 6,7

TP15A12V

+A12V,connects the positive end of

the +A12V output voltage

5

TP18A-12V

-A12V,connects the negative end of

the -A12V output voltage

8

/ NC 1/2/3/4


Hardware System

5-121

Table 5-89 Definition of AC output

Land Definition Pin

TP19\TP20

Two output ends of

AC120

1/3

/ NC 2


Table 5-90 Definition of power supply output

Land Definition Pin

TP1P12V/TP2P12V positive end of the P12V

output voltage 4/5

TP12PGND/TP13PGND/TP3P

GND\TP4PGND\TP14PGND

negative end of the P12V

output voltage 6/7/8/9/10

TP9P24V\TP10P24V\TP11P24

V

Positive end of the P24V

output voltage 1/2/3


Table 5-91 Definition of D5V output

Land Definition Pin

TP5D5V/TP6D5V Positive end of the 5V output

voltage 1/2

TP7DGND/TP8DGND DGND, negative end of the

5V output voltage

3/4

Assembly drawing

Hardware System

5-122

Figure 5-23 Assembly drawing of the power board

5.5.3 Adjustment and Test Points The important test points when maintaining the power board are listed below:

Hardware System

5-123

Table 5-92 Test points on the power board

No. Pin Function Reference value

1 Q101.2 Q101 switching waveform /

2 Q101.1 Q101 drive waveform /

3 C114.+ PFC output voltage 390±20V

4 U101.9 Reference output voltage of the chip 7.5V

5 U101.14 U101 oscillating waveform /

6 C206.+ VCC voltage 17V~22.5V

7 C204 VDD voltage 12±1V

8 C223 supply voltage of U201 12±1V



11 U201.8 U201 reference voltage 5V


13 Q201.3 R235 voltage waveform, Q201 current

waveform

/

14 C232.+ D5V output voltage and ripple voltage 5±0.5V

15 C311.+ U301 supply voltage 12±1V





20 Q303.3 Q303 current waveform, R313 voltage

waveform

/

21 C326.+ 12VB voltage 12±0.5V

22 C328.+ 130V DC output 115V～150V

23 C332.+ A+12V output 12±0.5V

24 C338.- A-12V output -12±0.5V

25 U351.15 U351 supply voltage 12±0.5V


27 U351.11 Q351 drive waveform /







34 C409.＋ U401 supply voltage 12±1V

Hardware System

5-124






40 C423.+ P24V output voltage, ripple 22~27V

41 C442.+ P12V output voltage, ripple 12±0.5V

5.5.4 Replacement and Connection

Purpose

Damaged power assembly or power board needs to be replaced by a new one.

Tools


Sharp-nose pliers

Multimeter

Disassembly

Disassembly of the power board consists of the following two main procedures (removing the

whole power assembly and further disassembly of the inner components):

Remove the whole power assembly from the main unit:



3. Remove the data board（see section 5.2.4 for details）；

4. Remove the drive board（see section 5.3.4 for details）；

5. Unplug the 3 cables connecting the power assembly from the mother board; loose the

cable fixer and remove the cables.

6. Use the 107 cross-headed screwdriver to remove the cross-headed panhead screws

(M4X8) fixing the earth wire from the ground pole.


(M4X8) fixing the power assembly.

8. Draw out the power assembly for 50-100mm and unplug the 2 cable connectors

connecting the power switch.

Hardware System

5-125

9. Draw out and remove the power assembly.

Figure 5-24 Removing the power assembly 1

1 ---Mother board 2 --- Power switch

3 --- Ground pole 4 --- Power assembly

5 --- Panhead screw M4X8

Further disassembly of the power assembly


(M4X8) fixing the power cover, and then remove the cover together with the power socket

from the power assembly.


(M3X8) fixing the power socket, and then disassembly the power socket.


(M3X8) fixing the shielding box, and then remove the shielding cover.

4. Use the shape-nose pliers to loose the 6 M3 nuts fixing the fan and unplug the cable plug

from the power board, and then remove the fan.


(M3X6) from the power board, and then remove the power board.

Hardware System

5-126

Figure 5-25 removing the power assembly 2

1---Panhead screw M3X8 2 --- Power socket

3---Panhead screw M4X8 4 ---Fan

5---M3 Nut 6---Power board

7 ---fixing board for power board 8---Cross-recessed panhead screw M3x6

9---Power board shielding cover 10 ---Power cover

Assembly

Assemble the power board as per the above-mentioned steps in the reverse order.



Verification

1. Check and make sure the earth wire of the AC input socket is properly connected to the

conductive cover of the main unit.

2. Connect the power cord and turn on the AC switch, then the fan works.

Hardware System

5-127

When assembling, before fixing the upper cover of the power assembly, be sure the AC plug and the plug of the fan are connected with the power board.

Be sure the screws are tightened to firmly fix the power assembly with the main unit.


Causes and recommended action

Refer to the flow chart below to troubleshoot the power board.

Hardware System

5-128

Figure 5-26 Power board troubleshooting flow chart

Be sure the screws are tightened to firmly fix the power assembly with the main unit.

Hardware System

5-129

5.6 Volumetric and pressure detecting board

5.6.1 Introduction The volumetric board provides the metric time signals for the RBC/PLT and WBC count.

Principles for the volumetric time signals: the detected volumetric start and end signals are

processed by the volumetric sensor, through current-voltage transferring, level-transforming

and de-bouncing, the drive-board-required TTL level is obtained and outputted. Principles for

the vacuum and pressure detecting: the detected vacuum and pressure signals are transferred

to the current signals by the vacuum and pressure sensor, and then through the signal

transferring, the AD-required the voltage signals are outputted to the drive board.


Function

Provides the time signals of RBC/PLT and WBC count, i.e. the start and end time of

running.

Provides the vacuum and pressure intensity signals of the vacuum chamber and pressure

chamber, sends the signals to the drive board.

Block diagram

Figure 5-27 Block diagram of the volumetric and pressure detecting board

Hardware System

5-130

Description

WBC count start/end signals

The WBC count start/end signals detected by the WBC volumetric sensor are I-V transferred,

level-transformed and de-bounced by the volumetric board, and then sent to the drive board.

RBC/PLT count start/end signals

The RBC/PLT count start/end signals detected by the RBC/PLT volumetric sensor are I-V

transferred, level-transformed and de-bounced by the volumetric board, and then sent to the

drive board.

Drive control the volumetric sensor

The working status of the volumetric sensor is controlled by the drive board through J1

connector. When the level of the control signal is high, the volumetric sensor doesn't work;

when the level is low, the volumetric sensor works.

Vacuum/pressure voltage signals

The vacuum/pressure intensity signals of the vacuum/pressure chamber are transferred to the

voltage signals by the vacuum/pressure sensor on the volumetric board. Then, they are further

transferred to the A/D-required voltage signals and then sent to the drive board through the J1

connector.


The volumetric board has only one 12PIN connector connecting the drive board. The location

of the connector is shown below.

Hardware System

5-131

Figure 5-28 Interface layout of the volumetric board

Table 5-93 Pin definition

No. Pin Signal description Signal Type

1 P+12V +12V power supply +12 power supply

2 PGND Power ground /

3 DGND Digital ground /

4 POSI_PRESS Pressure voltage signals output Analog

5 NEGA_PRESS Vacuum voltage signals output Analog


7 #VM_CTRL Volumetric sensor control signals TTL level

8 ＃RBC_START RBC count start signals TTL level

9 ＃RBC_STOP RBC count stop signals TTL level

10 ＃WBC_START WBC count start signals TTL level

11 ＃WBC_STOP WBC count stop signals TTL level

12 D+5V Digital +5V power supply +5V power supply

Hardware System

5-132

Assembly drawing

Figure 5-29 Assembly drawing of the volumetric board-Top

Figure 5-30 Assembly drawing of the volumetric board-Bottom


Purpose

The volumetric board is the front component of the whole device. Damaged volumetric board

needs to be replaced by a new one. Please follow the procedures to have the volumetric board

replaced.

Hardware System

5-133

Tools



Sharp-nosed pliers

Disassembly

1. Shut down the analyzer;

2. Open the right door;



4. Disconnect the 4 pipes connecting the volumetric tube.


(M3X8), and use the sharp-nosed pliers to remove the 2 socket cap screws (M3X16) fixing

the volumetric board.

6. Pull out the volumetric board for 30-50mm; unplug the cable connectors on its back and

disconnect the 2 pipes, and then remove the board.

Figure 5-31 Disassembly of the volumetric board

1---volumetric tube bracket 2---Panhead screw M3X8

3---Volumetric tube 4---Rubber ring

5---Socket cap screws (M3X16) 6---Shielding box of volumetric board

7---Volumetric board

Hardware System

5-134

Assembly


Verification

1. The volumetric board is assembled properly.

2. Start up the analyzer properly.

3. Running samples in the whole blood mode. If the RBC/WBC clogging, bubbles and

abnormal pressure/vacuum are not reported by the analyzer, the replacement is

succeeded. If one or more above-mentioned error(s) is reported, you should remove the

error accordingly.


Table 5-94 Troubleshooting the volumetric board

No. Error name Error

type Error feature Causes Probability

Recommended

action

Improper cable

connection with

the mother board

or disconnection

caused by a

broken cable

Medium

Reconnect the

cable or

change a new

cable

1 +12V power

supply error

System

error

The voltage of

the P+12V test

point is not

equal to

12V±0.6V.

Improper power

supply of the

main unit or

Improper +12V

power supply

sent by the

mother board

Low

See

troubleshooting

of the drive

board and

power board

2 +5V power

supply error

Board

error

The voltage of

the P+5V test

point is not

equal to

5V±0.25V.

L2 is damaged

(or rosin jointed)

or something is

wrong (rosin

jointed) with the

C20 and C13.

Low

Replace or

re-solder the

components

Hardware System

5-135

Improper cable

connection with

the mother board

or disconnection

caused by a

broken cable

Medium

Reconnect the

cable or

change a new

cable

Something is

wrong with the

+5V power

supply.

Low See No.2 in the

table

3

Comparator

reference power

supply wrong

Board

error

The TP6

output voltage

≠ 2.5V±0.25V Something is

wrong with the

U8 chip or it is

rosin jointed.

Low

Replace or

re-solder the

U8

Improper cable

connection with

the mother board

or disconnection

caused by a

broken cable

Medium

Reconnect the

cable or

change a new

cable

4 Control signal

error

System

error

Voltage of the

＃ VM_CTRL

signal ≥ 0.8V Control signals

sent by the drive

board through

the mother board

is wrong

Low

See

troubleshooting

of the drive

board

Control signal

error Medium

See No.4 in the

table

5

Constant current

source of the

volumetric

sensor error

Board

error

Standard

voltage (TP5) ≠

2.5V±0.25V

Control circuit

error (Q1 or U2 is

wrong or rosin

jointed; resistors

R10, R11, R18,

R23, R25 and

R24 is wrong or

rosin jointed)

Medium

Replace or

re-solder the

components

Hardware System

5-136

VWST, VWSP,

VRST or VRSP

are not adjusted

well.

Medium

Adjust VWST,

VWSP, VRST

and VRSP to

make the

voltage of the

point WT, WP,

RT and RP

equals to

2.7V±0.1V

respectively.

Volumetric

sensor U15, U21,

U16 or U17 is

wrong (or rosin

jointed).

Low

Replace or

re-solder the

components

Constant current

source of the

volumetric

sensor error

Medium See No.5 in the

table

6

Voltage of the

point WT, WP, RT

and RP is not the

expected value

Board

error

Voltage of the

point WT, WP,

RT and RP ≠

2.7V±0.1V

+5V power

supply error Low

See No.2 in the

table

D1, D2, D3 or D4

is damaged (or

rosin jointed)

Low

Re-solder or

change the

component

+5V power

supply error Low

See No.2 in the

table

Something is

wrong with the

TP6 standard

power supply

Low See No.3 in the

table 7

Indicator

abnormal

Board

error

Indicators D1,

D2, D3 and D4

are off when

fluid flows or

are still on

when no fluid

flows through

the volumetric

tube Voltage of the

point WT, WP, RT

and RP ≠

2.7V±0.1V


table

8 Constant current

source error of

Board

error

Standard

voltage TP10 ≠

+12V power

supply error Low

See No.1 in the

table

Hardware System

5-137

the vacuum

sensor

2.5V±0.25V C14, R37, U11,

R47 or U4 is

damaged (or

rosin jointed).

Medium

Re-solder or

change the

component

+12V power

supply error Low

See No.1 in the

table

9

Constant current

source error of

the pressure

sensor

Board

error

Standard

voltage TP7 ≠

2.5V±0.25V

C21, R36, R35,

U3 or U10 is

damaged (or

rosin jointed).

Medium

Re-solder or

change the

component

+12V power

supply error Low

See No.1 in the

table

10

Pressure/vacuum

unit +2.5V

reference power

supply error

Board

error

Standard

voltage TP9 ≠

2.5V±0.25V

R39, C11, R38,

R48, VR9, U9 or

U6 is damaged

(or rosin jointed)

Medium

Re-solder or

change the

component

VR9 is not

adjusted well. Medium

Adjust VR9,

making the

relative voltage

of the TP9 to

TP8 ≠

1.250±0.002V

Pressure/vacuum

2.5V reference

power supply

error

Medium See No.10 in

the table

11

Pressure/vacuum

1.25V voltage

error

Board

error

The relative

voltage of the

TP9 to the TP8

≠1.250±0.002V

U6 is damaged

or rosin jointed Medium

Replace or

re-solder the

components

+12V power

supply error Low

See No.1 in the

table

Constant current

source error of

the pressure

sensor


table

12 Pressure output

voltage abnormal

Board

error

When the input

pressure is

0HPa or

450HPa, the

output voltage

of the point PP

is not equal to

1.250±0.002V 1.25V voltage

error Medium

See No.11 in

the table

Hardware System

5-138

PPZ or PPG is

not adjusted wellMedium

Adjust PPZ to

make the

voltage of the

PP is

1.250±0.002V

when the input

pressure is 0.

Then, adjust

PPG to make

the voltage of

the PP is

1.250±0.002V

when the input

pressure is

450HPa.

or

2.250±0.002V.

U12, U14, R34,

R44, R45, R46,

R50, R52, C10 or

C23 is damaged

(or rosin jointed)

Medium

Re-solder or

change the

component

+12V power

supply error Low

See No.1 in the

table

Constant current

source error of

the vacuum

sensor


table

13 Vacuum output

voltage abnormal

Board

error

When the input

pressure is

0HPa or

-450HPa, the

output voltage

of the point NP

is not equal to

1.250±0.002V 1.25V voltage

error Medium

See No.11 in

the table

Hardware System

5-139

NPZ or NPG is

not adjusted wellMedium

Adjust NPZ to

make the

voltage of the

NP is

1.250±0.002V

when the input

pressure is 0.

Then, adjust

NPG to make

the voltage of

the NP is

0.250±0.002V

when the input

pressure is

-450HPa.

or

0.250±0.002V.

U12, U13, R33,

R40, R41, R42,

R43, R51, C7 or

C22 is damaged

(or rosin jointed)

Medium

Re-solder or

change the

component

Hardware System

5-140

5.7 Liquid-level detecting board 5.7.1 Introduction The liquid level board detects the status (sufficient or insufficient) of the LEO(I), LEO(II), LH

and cleanser and sends the detected results to the drive board. Principles for the liquid level

detecting: the sufficient or insufficient signals detected by the liquid sensor are processed by

current-voltage transferring, level-transforming and de-bouncing. Finally, the

drive-board-required TTL level is obtained and outputted.


Function

The liquid level board detects the status (sufficient or insufficient) of the LEO(I),LEO(II), LH and

cleanser, transfers the signals and sends them to the drive board.

Block diagram

Liquid Level Board

LEO(I) SensorLEO

Itube

I-V transform Level transform

LEO(II) SensorLEO

IItube

I-V transform Level transform

LH SensorLH tube I-V transform Level transform

CL SensorCL tube I-V transform Level transform

J1 MotherBoard

Figure 5-32 Block diagram of the liquid-level detecting board

Hardware System

5-141

Description

For the liquid level of the LEO(I), LEO(II), LH and cleanser are detected by the same principle,

so the liquid level detection of LEO(I) is used just to be the example.

Detecting the status (sufficient/insufficient) of LEO(I)

The status (sufficient/insufficient) signals of the LEO(I) detected by the sensor is conducted the

I-V converting, level-transforming and de-bouncing by the liquid-level detecting board and then

sent to the drive board.

Drive control of the detecting sensors of the four reagents

The working status of the detecting sensors is controlled by the drive board through J1

connector. When the level of the control signal is high, the detecting sensors do not work;

when the level is low, the detecting sensors work.


The liquid level detecting board has only one connector of 8PIN connecting the drive board.

The location of the connector is shown below.

J1

Figure 5-33 Interface definition of the liquid-level detecting board

The definition of pins is shown in the table below.

Hardware System

5-142

Table 5-95 Pin definition of the liquid-level detecting board

No. Pin Signal description Signal Type

1 D+5V Digital +5V power supply +5V power supply

2 ＃LIQ1 LEO(I) status output signals TTL level

3 ＃LIQ2 LEO(II) status output signals TTL level

4 ＃LIQ3 LH status output signals TTL level

5 ＃LIQ4 Cleanser status output signals TTL level

6 / / /

7 #D_CTRL Drive control signals of detecting sensor TTL level


Assembly drawing

Figure 5-34 Assembly drawing of the liquid-level detecting board-Top

Figure 5-35 Assembly drawing of the liquid-level detecting board-Bottom

Hardware System

5-143

5.7.3 Replacement and Connection

Purpose

Damaged liquid-level detecting board needs to be replaced by a new one to ensure the

operation of the analyzer. Please follow the procedures to have the board replaced.

Tools



Disassembly

Liquid-level detecting board disassembly consists of the following two main procedures:

Remove the board from the main unit:


2. Open the left door.



4. Pull the 4 pipes out from the pipe clamp of the liquid-level detecting board.


(M3X6) from the liquid-level detecting board.

6. Pull out the liquid-level detecting board for 30-50mm, unplug the cable connectors on its

back, and then remove the board.

Hardware System

5-144

Figure 5-36 Disassemble the liquid-level detecting board-1


M3x6 (with washer)

2---Liquid-level detecting board shielding

cover

3---Panhead screw M3X8 4---Liquid-level detecting board

Further disassembly of the drive board


M3X8 fixing the pipe clamp.

2. Remove the 2 pipe clamps.

Figure 5-37 Disassemble the liquid-level detecting board-2

1---Cross-recessed panhead screw M3X8 2---Liquid-level detecting board

3---Pipe clamp

Hardware System

5-145

Assembly


Verification

1. The liquid-level detecting board is assembled properly.

2. The tubing is connected properly.

3. Start up the analyzer properly. Running samples in the whole blood mode. If “No LEO(I)

(/LEO(II)/LH /cleanser)” or bubbles are not reported by the analyzer, the replacement is

succeeded. If one or more above-mentioned error(s) is reported, you should remove the

error accordingly.


Table 5-96 Troubleshooting the liquid-level detecting board

No. Error name Error

type

Error

features Causes Probability

Recommended

action

Improper cable

connection with

the mother board

or disconnection

caused by a

broken cable

Medium

Reconnect the

cable or change a

new cable

Improper power

supply of the main

unit or Improper

+5V power supply

sent by the

mother board

Low

See

troubleshooting of

the drive board

and power board

1 +5V power

supply error

System

error

The voltage

of the +5V

test point is

not equal to

5V±0.25V.

L2 is damaged (or

rosin jointed) or

something is

wrong (rosin

jointed) with the

C7 and C11.

Low

Replace or

re-solder the

components

2

Comparator

reference

power

Board

error

The TP1

output

voltage ≠

Something is

wrong with the

+5V power supply.

Low See No.1 in the

table

Hardware System

5-146

supply

wrong

2.5V±0.25V Something is

wrong with the

chip U9 or R10 or

they are rosin

jointed.

Low Replace or

re-solder the U9

Improper cable

connection with

the mother board

or disconnection

caused by a

broken cable

Medium

Reconnect the

cable or change a

new cable

3 Control

signal error

System

error

Voltage of

the ＃

D_CTRL

signal ≥

0.8V

Control signals

sent by the drive

board through the

mother board is

wrong

Low

See

troubleshooting of

the drive board

Control signal

error Medium

See No.3 in the

table

4

Abnormal

driving of

the

detecting

sensor

Board

error

Voltage to

ground of

collector

electrode of

Q1 is not

between

4.4V-5.25V.

Control circuit

error (Q1, U1, U2,

U3 or U4 are

wrong or rosin

jointed; resistors

R1, R2, R9, R40,

R41, R42 or R43

are wrong or rosin

jointed).

Medium

Replace or

re-solder the

components

VLL1, VVL2,

VVL3 or VVL4 are

not adjusted well.

Medium

Adjust VL1, VL2,

VL3 and VL4 to

make the voltage

of the point VVL1,

VVL2, VVL3 and

VVL4 equals to

2.2V±0.1V

respectively.

5

The voltage

of point

VLL1,

VVL2,

VVL3 and

VVL4 is not

the

expected

value.

Board

error

voltage of

point VLL1,

VVL2,

VVL3 and

VVL4 ≠

2.2V±0.1V

Detecting sensors

U1, U2, U3 or U4

are wrong (or

rosin jointed).

Low

Replace or

re-solder the

components

Hardware System

5-147

Abnormal driving

of the detecting

sensor


table

+5V power supply

error Low

See No.2 in the

table

LED1, LED2,

LED3 or LED4 are

damaged (or rosin

jointed)

Low

Re-solder or

change the

component

+5V power supply

error Low

See No.1 in the

table

Something is

wrong with the

TP1 standard

power supply

Low See No.2 in the

table

voltage of point

VLL1, VVL2,

VVL3 and VVL4 ≠

2.2V±0.1V


table

6 Indicator

abnormal

Board

error

Indicators

LED1,

LED2,

LED3 and

LED4 are

still on

when the

tube is

filled with

fluid or are

off when no

fluid exists

in the tube.

U7, R15, R19,

R32, R17, R13,

R14, R18, R21,

R5, R11, R30,

R22, R12, R31,

R4, R23, R25,

R26, R27 or R28

are damaged (or

rosin jointed).

Medium

Re-solder or

change the

component

Hardware System

5-148

5.8 Laser Control Board 5.8.1 Introduction The laser control board controls the laser to ensure it is stable and moderate.


Function

Power conditioning

Laser drive current monitoring

Constant-laser power controlling

Block diagram

Figure 5-38 Block diagram of the laser control board

Description

Power conditioning

The power conditioning module filters the ±12V power sent by the data board. After filtering,

the ripple is less than 100mV.

Laser drive current monitoring

The working current of the laser is measured and sent to the data board for monitoring.

Constant-laser power controlling

The laser control board controls the laser by constant-power method. I.e. the laser output

Hardware System

5-149

power is monitored by the inner photoelectrical detector, and the results obtained forms a

closed loop system through negative feedback to ensure the constant-power output. The

power is controlled (3mW-5mW) by adjusting the potentiometer VR1 on the board.


The laser control board is configured with 2 external connectors. One is the J1 connecting the

mother board (connecting data board through the mother board), the other one is the J2

connecting the laser, as the figure shows.

Figure 5-39 Interface layout of the laser control board

Table 5-97 Definition of J1 (connecting the mother board)

PIN Definition Note Direction I/O Level

1 AVSS -12V Analog power

supply

I -12V

2 AGND Analog ground Ｏ０

3 LASER Monitoring voltage of

laser drive current Ｏ No greater than 5V

4 AVCC 12V Analog power supply I 12V

５ #CONTROL Control signals produced

by standard voltage

I/O Low level: ≤0.8V

High level: OC door

of 5V

6 VCC 5V digital power supply I 5V

Hardware System

5-150

Table 5-98 Definition of J2 (connecting the laser)

No. Name Note Direction I/O

Level

1 LDA Anode of semi-conductor laser diode O -

2 LDC Cathode of semi-conductor laser diode I -

3 PDA Anode of semi-conductor laser receiver I -

Assembly drawing

Figure 5-40 Assembly drawing of the laser control board


Adjust the slide rheostat VR1 clockwise, then the resistance of the VR1 connecting circuit, the

voltage of the test point TP2VREF and the laser intensity increases. Adjust the slide rheostat

VR1 anticlockwise, then the resistance of the VR1 connecting circuit, the voltage of the test

point TP2VREF and the laser intensity decreases.

Adjust the voltage of TP2VREF to 3.9-4.1V (adjustable as per the situation; it is the voltage

difference relative to A-12V), then the voltage of TPILD is 0.8-2.0V (it is also the voltage

difference relative to A-12V; note: the laser works normally).

The voltage defined in the laser control board testing process should be used as the latest

standard voltage of TP2VREF and TPILD.

Hardware System

5-151

Never try to plug or unplug the semi-conductor laser before the power supply is cut off.

Do adjust the slide rheostat gradually increased.

See the test points in the table below and their locations on the board in the assembly drawing.

Table 5-99Test points of the laser control board

No. Test point

Signal under test

Function

1 A+12V AVCC The +12V power from the data board

2 A-12V AVSS The -12V power from the data board

3 D5V VCC The 5V power from the data board. It enables the

upper photocoupler.

4 AGND

Digital

ground on

board

\

5 TPVREF VREF The 2.5V standard voltage produced by the U1 chip

(relative to A-12V).

6 TP2VREF 2VREF

Double voltage to ground of the rheostat

sliding-end. It controls the intensity of the laser in

direct ratio.

7 TPIPD PDA

The step-down voltage on R1, R21 or R1/R21

caused by the feedback current signals from the

photoelectrical receiving part of the laser.

8 TPILD LASER

The working current signals of the diode part of the

laser. It reflexes the working current of the diode

part through the voltage of TPILD, detecting

whether the laser is working under the expected

status.

5.8.4 Assembly and disassembly See Chapter 7 Optical System for details.

5.8.5 Troubleshooting The troubleshooting information of the laser control board is listed in the table below.

Hardware System

5-152

Table 5-100 Troubleshooting the laser control board

No. Error Error

Features Possible Causes

Recommended action

Improperly connected

or disconnected with

the mother board


change a new cable

Improper power sent

to the laser control

board

Check and make sure the

power sent by the mother

board and the data board

is proper. 1

+12V power

supply error

The voltage of

the A+12V test

point exceeds

the range of

12V±0.6V

Something is wrong

with the power

control circuit on the

board. Grounding

short-circuits. The

power is lower or

higher.

Check the circuit on the

board.

2 -12V power

supply error

The voltage of

the A-12V test

point exceeds

the range of

-12V±0.6V

Something is wrong

with the power

control circuit on the

board. Grounding

short-circuits. The

power is lower or

higher.

Check the circuit on the

board.



the mother board


change a new cable

3 5V power

supply error

The voltage of

the D5V test

point exceeds

the range of

5V±0.25V

Improper power is

sent to the laser

control board by the

data board or mother

board.


power sent by the mother


is proper.



the mother board


change a new cable

4 Control signal

error

The voltage of

the signal

#CONTROL ≤

0.8V

Improper control

signals sent by the

data board or mother

board


signals sent by the mother


are proper.

Hardware System

5-153

5 Reference

voltage error

The voltage of

TPVREF ≠

2.5V±0.1V

(regards -12V

as reference)

First ensure the -12V

power works

normally. Then, the

chip U1 is rosin

jointed or damaged.


U1

6

Laser

intensity

control

reference

voltage error

The voltage of

TP2VREF is

abnormal

(should be

3.9V-4.1V)

First ensure the

TPVREF is normal.

Then, the slide

rheostat is rosin

jointed or damaged.

Or, something is

wrong with the

soldering of the

operation amplifier

U2 and its

peripherals.


components

Laser diode

damaged or

connected improperly

Re-connect or change the

connection cable, or

change the laser diode

5V voltage error See No.3 in the table

Control signals error

or succeeding control

circuit error

See No.4 in the table and

check the succeeding

circuit.

7

Laser

intensity

monitoring

signals TPILD

output error

The voltage of

TPILD

exceeds the

range of

0.8-2V The operation

amplifier U3 and its

peripherals are rosin

jointed or damaged


components

The voltage defined in the laser control board testing process should be used as the latest

standard voltage of TP2VREF and TPILD.

Hardware System

5-154

5.9 Pre-amplification board 5.9.1 Introduction The pre-amplification board conducts the optical-electrical conversion to the two scattered

lights (FS-low-angle scattered light; SS-high-angle scattered light) come from the flow cell and

amplifies the signals. The amplifying boards of the low-angle signal and the high-angle signal

share one PCB. The amplification factor is obtained by soldering the resistors.


Function

Power conditioning

Optical-electrical converting

Signal conditioning

Block diagram

Figure 5-41 Block diagram of the pre-amplification board

Description

Power conditioning

The power conditioning module filters the ±12V power sent by the data board. After filtering,

the ripple is less than 50mV.

Optical-electrical converting

The optical-electrical converting module converts the optical signals into the electrical signals

by the photodiode.

Hardware System

5-155

Signal conditioning

The current signals are transferred into the voltage signals through I/V and then sent to the

succeeding amplifying-conditioning module for further processing. Then, the data board input

required signals are obtained.


The FS/SS pre-amplification board is configured with one external connector respectively, i.e.

the J1 connector connecting the mother board (connecting data board through the mother

board). The layout of the board is shown below.

Figure 5-42 Interface layout of the pre-amplification board


PIN Definition Note Direction I/O

Level


2 FS/SS Pre-amplification board output voltage signals ＜1V

3 SHELL Shielding ground - 0

4 AVSS A-12V analog power supply I -12V±5%


6 AVCC A+12V analog power supply I 12V±5%

The laser control board is configured with 2 external connectors. One is the J1 connecting the

Hardware System

5-156

mother board (connecting data board through the mother board), the other one is the J2

connecting the laser.

Figure 5-43 Interface layout of the laser control board


PIN Definition Note Direction I/O Level

1 AVSS -12V Analog power supply I -12V


3 LASER Monitoring voltage of

laser drive current Ｏ ≤5V

4 AVCC 12V Analog power supply I 12V

５ #CONTRO

L

Control signals produced

by standard voltage

I/O Low level: ≤0.8V

High level: OC

door of 5V

6 VCC 5V digital power supply I 5V

Table 5-103 Definition of J2 (connecting the laser)

No. Name Note Direction I/O Level

1 LDA Anode of semi-conductor laser diode O -

2 LDC Cathode of semi-conductor laser diode I -

3 PDA Anode of semi-conductor laser receiver I -

Hardware System

5-157

Assembly drawing

(a) Top

(b) Bottom

Figure 5-44 Assembly drawing of the FS/SS pre-amplification board

Hardware System

5-158

5.9.3 Adjustment and Test Points No adjustment components. See the test points in the table below and their location on the

board in the assembly drawing.

Table 5-104 Test points definition of the pre-amplification board

No. Test point

Signal under test

Function

1 AGND

Digital

ground on

board

\

2 +12V AVCC The +12V power from the data board

3 -12V AVSS The -12V power from the data board

4 OUT OUT FS/SS pre-amplification board output signals

5 D5V VCC The 5V power from the data board. It enables the

upper photocoupler.

5.9.4 Disassembly and assembly See Chapter 7 Optical System for details.


Table 5-105 Troubleshooting the pre-amplification board

No. Error Error Features Possible Causes Recommended action

Improper cable connection

with the mother board or the

data board, or disconnection

caused by a broken cable


change a new cable

Improper 12V power sent by

the data board or mother

board


power supply is sent by

the mother board or the

data board

1

12V

power

supply

error

The voltage of the

+12V test point

exceeds the range of

12±0.6V; or the

ripple noise is

greater than 50mV. Rosin joint or damage

happens to the +12V test

point relating inductor L1 or

the capacitors C24, C27, C20

and C23.


component

Hardware System

5-159

Improper cable connection

with the mother board or the

data board, or disconnection

caused by a broken cable


change a new cable

Improper -12V power sent by

the data board or mother

board


power supply is sent by

the mother board or the

data board

2

-12V

power

supply

error

The voltage of the

-12V test point

exceeds the range of

-12±0.6V; or the

ripple noise is

greater than 50mV. Rosin joint or damage

happens to the -12V test point

relating inductor L2 or the

capacitors C22, C26, C25 and

C21.


component

The FS board is installed in

the location of the SS board

by mistake.

Change the board SS output signals

too weak (supposing

it is caused only by

the circuit problems) R4, R5 or R6 resistance error,

rosin jointed or damaged


component

The SS board is installed in

the location of the FS board

by mistake.

Change the board

FS output signals

too strong

(supposing it is

caused only by the

circuit problems) R4, R5 or R6 resistance error,

rosin jointed or damaged


component

The photodiode D1 or R1 is

rosin jointed or damaged.


component

The

pre-amplification

board (FF/SS)

output signals are

too weak to be

detected.

The U2 or U3 is rosin jointed

or damaged.


component

3

Channel

output

value

error

Something is wrong

with the band width

of the

pre-amplification

board (FF/SS).

Check whether the relating

resistors and capacitors R4,

R5, R6, C1, C5 and C4 are

rosin jointed or damaged.


component

Hardware System

5-160

5.10 Indicator Board 5.10.1 Introduction The indicator board realizes the functions of analyzer status indicating and buzzer alarming.


Function

Analyzer working status indicating

Buzzer alarming

Description

Analyzer working status indicating

The indicator board indicates the working status of the analyzer by a two-color indicator. When

the system works normally, the indicator displays green. When error happens, the indicator

turns red.

Buzzer alarming

The alarming function is realized by the buzzing of the buzzer.


The indicator board is configured with one external connector J1.

Table 5-106 Interface definition of the indicator board

PIN Name Note Direction

I/O Level

1 VCC Power supply - +5V

4 FAULT Error indicator (red) I TTL

5 WORK Working indicator

(green) I TTL

7 BUZ Buzzer I TTL

8 GND Ground - 0

Hardware System

5-161

Assembly drawing

Figure 5-45 Assembly drawing of the indicator board


Purpose

Damaged indicator board needs to be replaced by a new one.

Tools



Disassembly


2. Open the front cover assembly.

3. Use the 107 cross-headed screwdriver to remove the 2 tapping screws (PT3X6) fixing the

indicator board, and then remove the board.

Hardware System

5-162

Figure 5-46 Disassemble the indicator board and the key board

1---Key board 2--- Tapping screw (PT3X8)

3---Front cover 4--- Indicator board

5--- Tapping screw (PT3X6)

Assembly

Assemble the indicator board as per the above-mentioned steps in the reverse order.

Verification

Turn on the analyzer and start up the PC when finish replacing the indicator board. During the

process from “startup self-test” to “ready”, closely observe the indicator and the buzzer, if they

work normally, the replacement is successful.


Table 5-107 Troubleshooting the indicator board

No. Error Causes and recommended action

1 Indicator doesn't work If the indicator could work off and on when you shaking

the wiring on the J1 connector, then, it might be caused

by the improper connection. If nothing is wrong with the

connection and the system works normally, then, the

diode of the indicator might be damaged.

2 The buzzer is mute when

system alarming.

If the buzzer could buzz off and on when you shaking

the wiring on the J1 connector, then, it might be caused

by the improper connection. If nothing is wrong with the

connection or the buzzer buzzes abnormally (e.g. a

hoarse buzzing), then, the buzzer might be damaged.

Hardware System

5-163

5.11 Key Board 5.11.1 Introduction The key board enables the operator to interact with the main unit through the [RUN] and

[OPEN] keys during the autoloading/manual loading process.


Function

[RUN] key

[OPEN] key

Description

Use the [RUN] key

The operator can press the [RUN] key to start autoloading.

Use the [OPEN] key

The operator can press the [OPEN] key to open the sample compartment door.


The indicator board is configured with one external connector J1.

Table 5-108 Interface definition of the key board

PIN Name Note Direction

I/O Level

2 COUNT_KEY [RUN] key - TTL

3 INSERT_KEY [OPEN] key I TTL

4 GND Ground I 0

Hardware System

5-164

Assembly drawing

Figure 5-47 Assembly drawing of the key board


Purpose

Damaged key board needs to be replaced by a new one.

Tools



Disassembly


2. Open the front cover assembly.

3. Use the 107 cross-headed screwdriver to remove the 4 tapping screws (PT3X8) fixing the

key board, and then remove the board.

Hardware System

5-165

Figure 5-48 Disassemble the key board and the indicator board

1---Key board 2--- Tapping screw (PT3X8)

3---Front cover 4--- Indicator board

5--- Tapping screw (PT3X6)

Assembly

Assemble the key board as per the above-mentioned steps in the reverse order.

Verification

Turn on the analyzer and start up the PC when finish replacing the key board. Wait for the PC

interface to show “ready”, and then press the [OPEN] key in the front cover. If the sample

compartment door opens, then the key board is successfully replaced.

5.11.4 Troubleshooting As the structure of the key board is quite simple, it seldom has errors. If there is no response

after pressing the keys, connect the 2 and 4 pins, as well as the 3 and 4 pins of the J1 interface.

If the circuit is closed after pressing one of the keys, the key board is out of error and you

should check other components for errors; if the circuit is open, the key is not working properly.

6-1

6 Maintenance

6.1 Maintenance Modules and the Corresponding Settings

No. Type Maintenance Settings to be reset

1 Replace the drive board Re-adjust the position of the sampling assembly

by software

2 Replace the autoloader board

Re-adjust the position of the clipper by software

3 Replace the data board Re-adjust the gains, calibration factors and count-related settings

4 Replace the power board

Re-conduct the safety test 5

Boards

Replace the volumetric board Reset the count time and the start signal delay

6

Remove the sample feeding assembly from the analyzer and then re-assemble it

Manually adjust the horizontal position of the sample feeding assembly Re-adjust the position of the sampling assembly to the sample compartment and the autoloading position by software.

7

Remove the sample compartment assembly from the analyzer and then re-assemble it

1. Manually adjust the position of the sample compartment on the sample feeding assembly. 2. Re-adjust the position of the sampling assembly to the sample compartment by software.

8 Disassemble and assemble the sample feeding assembly

Re-assemble the sample feeding assembly as per the steps specified in Section 6.8

9

Disassemble and assemble the DIFF bath assembly or have it upgraded

1. Re-adjust the position of the sampling assembly to the DIFF bath. 2. If the temperature and the mixing are greatly changed, then re-adjusting the optical gain is necessary.

10

Remove the DIFF bath assembly from the analyzer and then re-assemble it

Re-adjust the position of the sampling assembly to the DIFF bath by software

11

Remove the mix assembly from the analyzer and then re-assemble it

1. Manually adjust the horizontal position of the mix assembly. 2. Re-adjust the position of the clipper by software.

12

Disassemble and assemble the clipper or have it upgraded

1. Locate the clipper to the right position by clamp. 2. Re-adjust the position of the clipper by software.

13 Disassemble and assemble the mix assembly

Re-assemble the mix assembly as per the specified process.

14

Mechanism

Replace and disassemble/assemble the front cover

1. Manually adjust the horizontal position of the mix assembly. 2. Re-adjust the position of the clipper by software.

Maintenance

6-2

15

Replace and disassemble/assemble the bottom cover

1. Manually adjust the horizontal position of the sample feeding assembly. 2. Re-adjust the position of the sampling assembly to the sample compartment and the autoloading position by software.

16 Replace the aperture 1. Re-adjust the gains and the calibration factors.2. Reset the count time and the start signal delay.

17 Replace the bath 1. Re-adjust the gains and the calibration factors.2. Reset the count time and the start signal delay.

18 Replace the volumetric tube

1. Re-enter the volume of the volumetric tube at the setting screen. 2. Reset the count time and the start signal delay.

19

Baths

Replace HGB Re-adjust the gain and calibration of HGB.

20 The vacuum created in the sequence is changed Reset the count time and the start signal delay

21

Sequence Sample results are changed greatly Re-adjust the gain and the calibration.

Maintenance

6-3

6.2 General You can service the analyzer as per Section 6.3 – 6.7 . After repairing, follow the verification

procedures to verify the analyzer’s status.

Maintenance

6-4

6.3 Disassembling the Panels

6.3.1 Removing the left door

Purpose

To disassemble the electric and fluidic parts inside the left side of the analyzer, follow this

procedure to remove the left door.

Tools


Removal

1. Power off the analyzer and unplug the power cord

2. Insert 107 the flat-headed screwdriver into the slot of the door lock, and turn the lock

tongue 90° counterclockwise.

3. Pull the side door outward from the bottom.

Figure 6-1 Removing the left door

Installation

Install the left door as per the above-mentioned steps in the reverse order.

Maintenance

6-5

6.3.2 Removing the right door

Purpose

To disassemble the electric and fluidic parts inside the right side of the analyzer, follow this

procedure to remove the right door.

Tools


Removal

1. Power off the analyzer and unplug the power cord.

2. Insert 107 flat-headed screwdriver into the slot of the door lock, and turn the lock tongue

90° counterclockwise.

3. Pull the side door outward from the bottom.

Make sure that the power supply is shut off when you remove the right door; otherwise, the analyzer will alarm and stop running.

Figure 6-2 Removing the right door

Maintenance

6-6

Installation

Install the right door as per the above-mentioned procedures in the reverse order.

6.3.3 Removing the top cover

Purpose

To disassemble the optical components, boards, cables and connectors, follow this procedure

to remove the top cover.

Tools


Removal


2. Use the 107 cross-headed screwdriver to remove the three M4X8 small panhead screws.

3. Pull out the top cover from back upward.

Maintenance

6-7

Figure 6-3 Removing top cover

1 ―――M4X8 small panhead screw 2 ―――top cover

Installation

Install the top cover as per the above-mentioned procedures in the reverse order.

6.3.4 Removing the back panel

Purpose

To maintain the fluidic connectors and electric circuits at the center of analyzer, follow this

procedure to remove the back panel.

Tools


Maintenance

6-8

Removal


2. Use the 107 cross-headed screwdriver to remove the two M4X8 small panhead screws

used for fixing the back panel of power supply。

3. Pull the back panel outward.

Figure 6-4 Removing the back panel of power supply

1 ―――M4X8 small panhead screw 2 ―――back panel of power supply

Installation

Install the back panel as per the above-mentioned procedures in the reverse order.

6.3.5 Removing the front door

Purpose

To maintain the fluidic system inside the front cover, follow this procedure to remove the front

door.

Tools


Maintenance

6-9


Removal


2. Remove the right door as per section 6.3.3 .

3. Turn the handspike handle 90° (clockwise and counterclockwise) to make it slide into the

slot in the front board, and the front door will be pushed open by the handspike.

4. Lift the front door upwards.

Figure 6-5 Removing the front door

1 ―――Handspike handle 2 ―――Handspike

3 ―――Back panel 4 ―――Mix mechanism

5 ―――Front panel 6 ―――Front door

6.3.6 Removing the front cover assembly

Purpose

To maintain the fluidic system, syringes and sample transport unit inside the front cover, follow

this procedure to remove the front cover.

Tools



Maintenance

6-10

Removal


2. Remove the left door as per section 6.3.1 .

3. Remove the right door as per section 6.3.2 .

4. Remove the top cover board as per section 6.3.3 .

5. Make sure there are no tubes or tube racks left at the sample transport area (if there are,

remove them).

6. Use the 107 cross-headed screwdriver to remove the six M4X8 countersunk head screws

on the left, right and top side of the front cover.

7. Pull the front cover outward by 50 - 80 mm, and disconnect the indicator connector from

the indicator board.

8. Remove the front cover forward.

Figure 6-6 Removing the front cover assembly

1 ―――M4X8 small panhead screw 2 ―――top cover

3 ―――Key board 4 ―――indicator light board

5 ―――right door 6 ―――M4X8 countersunk head screw

7 ―――front cover assembly 8 ―――left door

Installation

Install the front cover as per the above-mentioned procedures in the reverse order.

Maintenance

6-11

6.4 Replacing the Valves, Pumps and Syringes (Reagent container and reagent inlet, waste bump, fluidic valve, pinch valve, syringe)

Figure 6-7 Removing fluidic system inside the left door

1 ―――valve assembly I 2 ―――M4X12 small panhead screws

3 ―――plain washer Ф3 4 ―――M3X12 cross-headed panhead screw

(with lock washer)

5 ―――diluent syringe 6 ―――lyse syringe

7 ―――M4X8 small panhead screws 8 ―――pressure chamber

9 ―――air pump 10―――valve assembly II

Maintenance

6-12

Figure 6-8 Removing fluidic system inside the right door

1 ―――valve 2 ―――M3X8 small panhead screw

3 ―――M4X12 small panhead screw 4 ―――vacuum chamber

5 ―――waste pump assembly 6 ―――valve assembly III

7 ―――pinch valve

Maintenance

6-13

Figure 6-9 Removing fluidic system inside the front door

1 ―――valve 2 ―――pressure-leakage valve

3 ―――M3X8 small panhead screw 4 ―――sheath syringe

5 ―――injection syringe 6 ―――sampling syringe

7 ―――plain washer Ф3 8 ―――M3X12 cross-headed panhead screw

(with lock washer)

6.4.1 Replacing valves

Purpose

In case of malfunction of a valve(s), replace the valve.

Tools



Removal

Follow these two procedures to disassemble the valve assemblies.

To remove the valve assembly (valve assembly I, valve assembly II, or valve assembly III)

Maintenance

6-14

1. To remove valve assembly I and II, remove the left door (as per section 6.3.1 ); to remove

valve assembly III, remove the right door (as per section 6.3.2 ).

2. Disconnect all tubes connected to the valve(s) as shown in Figure 6-7, Figure 6-8, and

Figure 6-9.

3. Use the 107 cross-headed screwdriver to remove the M4X12 small panhead screws

fastening the valve assembly.

4. Pull the valve assembly, outward and disconnect all lines from the assembly..

5. Take out valve assembly.

To remove a single valve (including pinch valve, or single valve on the valve assemblies)

1. To remove the valve on the left side, remove the left door (as per section 6.3.1 ); to remove

the valve on the right side, remove the right door (as per section 6.3.2 ); to remove the

valve on the front side, remove the front cover assembly. (as per section 6.3.2 )

2. Disconnect all pipes connected to the valves as shown in Figure 6-7, Figure 6-8, and

Figure 6-9 (if a pinch valve needs to be removed, remember to pinch the corresponding

tube).


fastening the valve assembly.

4. Pull the valve outward, and disconnect the lines connected to the valve. Then take the

valve out.

Figure 6-10 Valve assembly I

Maintenance

6-15

Figure 6-11 Valve assembly II

Figure 6-12 Valve assembly III

1 ―――valve 2 ―――M3X8 small panhead screw

3 ―――valve bracket

Installation

Install the valve assembly as per the above-mentioned procedures in the reverse order.

Verification

1. Check the fluidic connections.

2. Power on and verify the installation.

6.4.2 Replacing the Pressure Chamber

Purpose

In case of malfunction, replace the pressure chamber.

Maintenance

6-16

Tools



Removal

Follow these two procedures to disassemble the pressure chamber.

To remove the pressure chamber:

1. Remove the left door (as per section 6.3.1 ).

2. Disconnect all tubes connected to the assembly as shown in Figure 6-7.

3. Use the 107 cross-headed screwdriver to remove the four M4X8 small panhead screws.

4. Pull the pressure chamber out.

To disassemble the pressure chamber:

1. Use the 107 cross-headed screwdriver to remove the four M3X12 panhead washer screws,

then take out the end cap and mounting plate;

2. Use the 107 flat-headed screwdriver to remove the airproof screw fixed on the end cap,

then take out the small O ring (9.5x1.8).

3. Take out the big O ring (48.7x1.8).

Figure 6-13 Removing pressure chamber

1―――M3X12 cross-headed panhead

screw (with lock washer)

2 ―――end cap

3 ―――O ring 48.7x1.8 4 ―――O ring 9.5 x 1.8

5 ―――airproof screw 6 ―――mounting plate

7 ―――air pressure chamber

Maintenance

6-17

Installation

Install the pressure chamber as per the above-mentioned procedures in the reverse order.

Verification

1. Check if all parts are correctly assembled and tightened.

2. Check the fluidic connections..


6.4.3 Replacing the Vacuum Chamber

Purpose

In case of malfunction, replace the vacuum chamber.

Tools



Removal

Follow these two procedures to disassemble the vacuum chamber.

To remove the vacuum chamber:

1. Remove the right door (as per section 6.3.2 )

2. Disconnect all tubes connected to the assembly as shown in Figure 6-8.

3. Use the 107 cross-headed screwdriver to remove the two M4X12 small panhead screws.

4. Pull vacuum chamber outward.

To disassemble the vacuum chamber:

1. Use the 107 cross-headed screwdriver to remove the four M3X12 panhead washer screws,

then take out the end cap and mounting plate.

2. Use the 107 flat-headed screwdriver to remove the air tightening screw fixed on the end

cap, then take out the small O ring (9.5x1.8).

3. Take out the big O ring (48.7x1.8).

Maintenance

6-18

Figure 6-14 Removing vacuum chamber


screw (with lock washer)

2 ―――end cap

3 ―――O ring (48.7x1.8) 4 ―――O ring (9.5x1.8)

5 ―――airproof screw 6 ―――mounting plate

7 ―――air pressure chamber

Installation

Install the vacuum chamber as per the above-mentioned procedures in the reverse order.

Verification


2. Check the reagent connections.


6.4.4 Replacing the Syringe Assembly

Purpose

In case of malfunction, replace the syringe assembly.

Tools



2 mm hexagon wrench

Maintenance

6-19

2.5 mm hexagon wrench

150 mm monkey wrench

Removal

Follow these two procedures to disassemble the syringe.

To remove the syringe assembly

1. To the remove lyse syringe or diluent syringe, remove the left door (as per section 6.3.1 );

to the remove sheath syringe, injection syringe or sampling syringe, remove the front

cover assembly (as per section 6.3.5 ).

2. Disconnect all tubes connected to the syringe as shown in Figure 6-7 and Figure 6-9.

3. Use the 107 cross-headed screwdriver to remove the four M3X12 panhead washer screws

fixing syringe and Ф3 plain washer. .

4. Incline the assembly outward, and pull it out by 30 - 50mm. Disconnect the wire of the

motor and the photocoupler, and then take the assembly out. (* Note that the four rubber

washers of the syringe should be kept well for reassembly.)

To disassemble the syringe:

1. Remove the lyse syringe, injection syringe, and sample syringe

a. To remove the glass syringe unit on the lyse syringe (three 2.5ml syringes on the

assembly), remove the left door (as per section 6.3.1 ).

b. To remove the glass syringe unit on the injection syringe or on the sample syringe (250ul

and 100ul respectively), remove the front cover (as per section 6.3.5 or 6.3.6 ).

c. The syringe assembly needs not to be disassembled wholly. Use the 107 flat-headed

screwdriver to remove the M4X8 special screw fixing the syringe. Rotate the left glass

syringe unit with hand, and then take out the washer of syringe (as per Figure 6-15).

Apply some glue to the threads. Do not proceed to the next step until the glue is dry.

Maintenance

6-20

Figure 6-15 Removing glass syringe unit

1 ―――M4X8 special screw 2 ―――glass syringe unit

3 ―――washer

d. Use the 107 cross-headed screwdriver to remove the two M3X8 socket head screws on

the electric switch and remove the switch. Use the 107 cross-headed screwdriver to

remove the two M3X6 cross-headed panhead screws, and then remove the electric switch

(Figure 6-16).

Maintenance

6-21

Figure 6-16 Removing syringe assembly

1――MGN9-C1-R95-Z0CM Linear

rolling guide

2 ―――syringe slider

3 ―――M3X8 socket head screw 4 ―――43F4J-05-010 linear stepping motor

5 ―――M3X6 cross-headed panhead

screw

6 ―――PHOTOELEC Optical Sensor

7 ―――syringe photocoupler bracket 8 ―――M3X8 cross-headed panhead screw

9 ―――Syringe protection shield 10 ―――M4X8 retaining screw

e. Use the 107 cross-headed screwdriver to remove the syringe protection shield. Use

2.5mm hexagon wrench to remove the four M3X8 socket head screws on syringe slider.

Use 2 mm hexagon wrench to remove M4X8 retaining screw on syringe slider and remove

the syringe slider. Use 2.5 mm hexagon wrench to remove the four M3X8 socket head

screws fastening the linear stepping motor , then remove the linear stepping motor (Figure

Maintenance

6-22

6-16);

Make sure to insert the retaining screw into the corresponding hole, and apply some glue to the threads.

f. Use 2.5mm hexagon wrench to remove the three M3X8 socket head screws on linear

rolling guide, and then remove the linear rolling guide. (*Note: The slider should not be off

its guide way.)

2. Remove diluent syringe and sheath syringe (*Note: Two syringes are the same, both being

the 10ml Mindray syringe.)

a. To remove the Mindray syringe unit on the diluent syringe, remove the left door (as per

section 6.3.1 )

b. To remove the Mindray syringe unit on the sheath syringe, remove the front cover

assembly (as per section 6.3.5 or 6.3.6 )

c. The syringe assembly should not be removed wholly. Use the 107 cross-headed

screwdriver and flat-headed screwdriver to remove the 10ml syringe presser the two

tailor-made M3X12 socket head screws, and remove the Mindray syringe unit. (Figure

6-17)

Figure 6-17 Removing Mindray syringe unit

1 ―――10ml syringe presser 2 ―――M3X12 socket head screw

3 ―――Mindray syringe unit 4 ―――M4X8 tailor-made screws

Maintenance

6-23

d. Use the 107 cross-headed screwdriver to remove the four M3X10 panhead screws. The

ceramic plug, flange, lock ring and O ring can be disassembled in the axis direction.

(Figure 6-18)

Figure 6-18 Removing Mindray syringe unit

1 ―――10ml ceramic plug 2 ―――PT3X10 cross-headed panhead

screw

3 ―――10ml syringe flange 4 ―――10ml syringe lock ring

5 ―――O ring 15X3 6 ―――10ml syringe body

Before replacing the lock ring, make sure relative parts (especially the operation surface of the ceramic plug) are clean, and then insert the plug into the flange, lock ring and O ring in turn and make it fixed to the syringe body.

Installation

Install the Mindray syringe unit as per the above-mentioned procedures in the reverse order.

Verification


2. Check wire connections.

3. Check reagent connections.


Maintenance

6-24

6.4.5 Replacing the Waste Pump

Purpose

In case of malfunction, replace the waste pump.

Tools



100 mm monkey wrench

Removal

Follow these two procedures to disassemble the waste pump.

To remove the waste pump:

1. Power on the analyzer to empty the fluidic system. Power off the analyzer and unplug the

power cord from the wall outlet.

2. Remove the right door (as per section 6.3.2 ).

3. Disconnect the four tubes connected to the pump;

4. Disconnect the two wires connected to the pump;


on fastening assembly as shown in Figure 6-8.

6. Move the assembly left, make the fastening hole out of the bolt, and then remove it.

To disassemble the waste pump:

1. Use the 107 cross-headed screwdriver to remove the four M3X8 small panhead screws

fixing the pump.

2. Remove the waste pump

3. Use the 100 mm monkey wrench to remove the three nuts and take out the three washers.

4. Remove the pump mounting plate.

5. Remove three shock pads via hand.

Maintenance

6-25

Figure 6-19 Removing waste pump

1 ―――M3X8 small panhead screws 2 ―――rotary pump

3 ―――pump mounting plate 4 ―――8-32UNC-2B nut

5 ―――GB93 4 washer 6 ―――shock pad

7 ―――bracket

Installation

Install the waste pump as per the above-mentioned procedures in the reverse order.

Verification


2. Check the electrical connection of the rotatory pump.

3. Check the reagent connections.


Maintenance

6-26

6.5 Replacing the Bath/Aperture Assembly

Purpose

In case of malfunction of the WBC or RBC reaction bath assembly, replace the corresponding

assembly.

Tools



Removal

1. Power on the analyzer to empty the fluidic system. Power off the analyzer and unplug the

power cord from the wall outlet.

2. Remove the left door (as per section 6.3.1 ).


4. Remove the top cover (as per section 6.3.1 ).

5. Use the 107 cross-headed screwdriver to remove the two M3X6 cross-headed washer

screws on the top cover of data board shielding box, and then remove the top cover.

6. Disconnect the bath signal lines of the WBC reaction bath or RBC reaction bath that needs

to be removed, and then loosen all buckles fastening the lines in the direction of wiring,

until the wire is drawn to the bath.

7. Use the 107 cross-headed screwdriver to remove M3X8 small panhead screw on bath

shield and take it out, then remove the shield. (Figure 6-21)

8. Use the 107 cross-headed screwdriver to remove the two M3X8 small panhead screws on

bath presser and take it out, then remove the bath presser. (Figure 6-21)

9. Pull the bath out with a distance of about 50-80 mm. Disconnect all tubes connected to the

bath. Get the signal wire from wire-protective ring and then remove the WBC bath

assembly or the RBC bath assembly.

Maintenance

6-27

Figure 6-20 Removing signal lines of bath

1 ―――M3X6 cross-headed panhead

washer screw

2 ―――top cover of data board shielding box

3 ―――data board

Figure 6-21 Removing bath assembly

1 ―――shielding plate 2 ―――WBC bath

3 ―――bath presser 4 ―――M3X8 small panhead screw

5 ―――RBC bath 6 ―――shield cover

7 ―――isolation chamber clamp 8 ―――isolation chamber

Maintenance

6-28

Installation

Install the bath assembly as per the above-mentioned procedures in the reverse order.

Verification

1. Check if all parts are mounted to the former position and are fastened.

2. Check if the connection of signal lines of WBC or RBC is correct or not.

3. Check if the connection of power line and reagent pipe is correct or not.


Maintenance

6-29

6.6 Replacing the Sampling Module and Adjusting Position

6.6.1 Replacing the Sample Probe and Wipe

Purpose

To remove or replace the sample probe and probe wipe, follow the steps in this section.

Tools

107 cross-headed screwdriver (107X75)

Replace parts according to requirements:

Probe wipe

open vial sample probe / piercing needle

metal wipe clip

sample probe presser

Preparation

1. Power off the analyzer if it is running.

2. Turn off the main power switch on the right side of the analyzer and unplug the power cord.


4. Move the sampling module to the back of analyzer.

Removal

1. Remove the probe wipe from the sampling module (Figure 6-22)

a. Disconnect the two tubes from the probe wipe.

b. Pull the wipe downward to remove the probe wipe, as indicated by the arrow in the

figure below, and remove the wipe clip.

c. Separate the wipe from sampling module in the direction of arrow

d. Get out the inlet and outlet pipe from the wipe.

Maintenance

6-30

Figure 6-22 Removing wipe

1 ―――pipe clamp 2 ―――presser under the guiding rod

3 ―――probe wipe 4 ―――wipe clip

2. Remove the sample probe from the sampling module. (Figure 6-23)

a. Pull out the sample aspiration tube from the above of sample probe.

b. Use the cross-headed screwdriver to remove the retaining screw (M3X8 small

panhead screw) on probe presser, and take out the fixing flake.

c. Get out the probe from sideward.

Maintenance

6-31

Figure 6-23 Removing sample probe

1 ―――slider 2 ―――sample probe

3 ―――presser 4 ―――M3X8 small panhead screw

When remove the sample probe, get probe wipe out of the presser under guiding rod. The probe tip may contain biohazardous materials. Exercise caution when handling it and keep it to the right position.

Installation

To install a new sample probe and wipe, repeat the above “removal” step 1 or 2 in the reverse

order.

6.6.2 Replacing the Optical Sensor

Purpose

To remove or replace the optical sensor, follow the steps in this section.

Maintenance

6-32

Tools

107 cross-headed screwdriver（107X75）


Sensor module on motor position（3003-21-34925）

Photocoupler fixer

Preparation




Removal

1. Remove the vertical optical sensor module (Figure 6-24)

a. Disconnect the connector of the sensor to be replaced ( not shown in the figure).

b. Use the cross-headed screwdriver to remove the M3x6 screw on the sensor.

c. Remove the sensor module from the bracket.

Figure 6-24 Removing vertical optical sensor

1 ―――M3x6 cross-headed screw 2 ―――sensor module on motor position

3 ―――bracket

2. Remove the horizontal optical sensor module (Figure 6-25)

a. Use the cross-headed screwdriver to remove the M3x6 screw on the photocoupler

Maintenance

6-33

presser to be replaced

b. Gently pull out the photocoupler presser (with the sensor module on motor position)

from the sample mother board and get out the plug of sensor module from the

corresponding hole.

c. Disconnect the sensor connector (not shown in figure). Take out the photocoupler

presser and the sensor module on motor position.

d. Use the cross-headed screwdriver to remove the M3x6 screw fixing the sensor module.

Separate the photocoupler presser from the sensor module on the motor position.

Figure 6-25 Removing optical sensor on horizontal position

Installation

To install a new optical sensor, repeat the above “removal” step 1 or 2 in the reverse order.

6.6.3 Removing the Sampling Module

Purpose

To remove the sampling module, follow steps in this section.

Tools


wire cutter


Sampling module

Maintenance

6-34

Preparation



3. Move the analyzer to turn its right side outward, and expose the back side as much as

possible.

4. Open the back cover of the analyzer (as per section 6.3.2 )

5. Remove the right side door (as per section 6.3.2 )

6. Move the sampling module to the back of the analyzer.

Removal

1. Disconnect all tubes from on the sampling module, and cut the binding belt with the wire

cutter. Remove the tubes from the whole sampling module.

2. Disconnect all the connectors of the vertical part of sampling module, and unplug the

connector from the motor directly.

3. Disconnect all the connectors of the horizontal part of sampling module from the space left

by opened back cover at the back of the analyzer. (BC-5380 has four connectors, and

BC-5380 has five connectors). Unplug the connectors from the motor directly.

4. Use the cross-headed screwdriver to remove the two M3X8 small panhead screws fixing

the joint.

5. Use the cross-headed screwdriver to remove the four M4X12 cross panhead screws fixing

the sampling module.

6. Hold the sampling module and move it gently outward. Pull out the optical sensor module

from corresponding hole with caution. Be careful not to damage or break the line.

7. Check if all connectors of optical sensor module are drawn out from the corresponding

holes, then hold out the sampling module.

Maintenance

6-35

Figure 6-26 Removing the sampling module

1 ―――M3X8 small panhead screw 2 ―――link

3 ―――spacer 4 ―――sampling module

5 ―――M4X12 panhead screw

Watch for the sampling probe when removing sampling module. If necessary, remove sampling probe first as introduced in section 6.6.1 to avoid potential biologic pollution.

Maintenance

6-36

Installation

To replace new sampling module, repeat the above step 1 to 7 in the reverse order.

Maintenance

6-37

6.7 Maintaining and Replacing the DIFF Reaction Bath

Purpose

To remove DIFF reaction bath, follow steps in this section.

Tools


wire cutter


DIFF reaction bath

Preparation



3. Remove the right side door (as per section 6.3.2 )

Removal

1. Use the wire cutter to cut off the binding belts fixing the tubes and remove them from the

DIFF bath assembly.

2. Use the cross-headed screwdriver to remove the two M4X8 small panhead screws fixing

the DIFF bath assembly.

3. Hold the DIFF bath assembly and move it gently outward. Expose the connectors and pipe

connectors at the back side, and then disconnect them.

4. Take out the DIFF bath assembly.

Maintenance

6-38

Figure 6-27 Removing DIFF bath assembly

1 ―――DIFF bath assembly 2 ―――M4X8 small panhead screw

Installation

To replace new DIFF bath assembly, repeat the above removal step 1 to 4 in the reverse order.

Remember to readjust the position of the sample probe over the DIFF bath as per Step 11 to

14 in Section 6.10.1 .

Maintenance

6-39

6.8 Autoloader Assembly (Closed-Tube) 6.8.1 Removing and replacing the closed-tube sample compartment assembly

Purpose

To remove or replace the closed-tube sample compartment, follow steps in this section.

Tools


1.5mm hexagonal wrench

sharp-nose pliers or small flat-headed screwdriver


Damp gear

PHOTOELEC switch

Gear

Electromagnet

Preparation



3. Remove the right side door (as per Section 6.3.2 )

4. Remove the left side door (as per Section 6.3.1 )

5. Remove the top cover (as per Section 6.3.3 )

Removal

Follow these two procedures to disassemble the waste pump.

To remove the sample compartment assembly:

1. Remove the front cover assembly (as per Section 6.3.6 )

2. Unplug the connector of the photoelectric switch on the sample compartment assembly

and the cable connector of the electromagnet.

3. Mark the position of the sample compartment assembly on the autoloader board (make

sure the sample compartment assembly can be installed back to the right position).

4. Use the 107 cross-headed screwdriver to remove the 3 M4X8 small panhead screws, and

then move out the closed-tube sample compartment assembly in the direction as indicated

by the arrowhead in Figure 6-28.

Maintenance

6-40

Figure 6-28 Removing the sample compartment assembly

1 ―――Autoloader 2 ―――Sample compartment assembly

3 ―――M4X8 small panhead screw

To disassembly the closed-tube sample compartment assembly:

1. Use the 107 cross-headed screwdriver to remove the two M3X6 cross-headed panhead

screws, and then remove the electromagnet assembly; remove the two M3X6

cross-headed panhead screws in the electromagnet assembly, and then remove the

electromagnet body; remove the E ring to take out the spring, as shown in Figure 6-29

Maintenance

6-41

Figure 6-29 Removing the electromagnet assembly

1 ―――M3X6 cross-headed panhead screw 2 ―――Electromagnet assembly

3 ―――E ring 4 ―――Spring

5 ―――M3X6 cross-headed panhead screw 6 ―――Electromagnet body

2. Use the 107 cross-headed screwdriver to remove the M4X12 cross-headed panhead

screw fixing the photocouplers, and then remove the photocouplers, as shown in Figure

6-30

Figure 6-30 Removing the photocouplers

1 ―――PHOTOELEC switch 2 ―――M4X12 cross-headed panhead screw

Maintenance

6-42

3. Use the 1.5mm hexagonal wrench to remove the two M3X5 set screws, and then remove

the gear; use the 107 cross-headed screwdriver to remove the two M3X6 cross-headed

panhead screws fixing the damp gear, and then remove the damp gear, as shown in

Figure 6-31.

Figure 6-31 Removing the gear and the damp gear

1 ―――M3X5 set screw 2 ―――Gear

3 ―――Damp gear 4 ―――M3X6 cross-headed panhead screw

4. Use the sharp-nose pliers to remove the spring from either of the two fixing ends, as

shown in Figure 6-32.

5. Use the sharp-nose pliers or the small flat-headed screwdriver to remove either of the two

D2 E rings on the shaft, and loosen the two M3X5 set screws in the tube holder

compartment fixing the shaft. Then take out the shaft and remove the tube holder

compartment body and the helical torsion springs.

During installation, make sure the M3X5 set screws are fixed in the same level of the notches in the shaft, and one of the screws should be plunged into the cone-shaped hole.

Maintenance

6-43

Figure 6-32 Removing the helical torsion springs

1 ―――D2 E ring 2 ―――Shaft

3 ―――M3X5 set screw 4 ―――Tube holder compartment

5 ―――Pulling spring 6 ―――Helical torsion springs

6. Use the 1.5mm hexagonal wrench to remove the M3X5 set screw fixing the shaft, and then

you can take out the shaft, deep groove ball bearing, wheel, bush and gasket in turn, as


During installation, the two bearings should be put into the wheel (the bearings are supposed to be cling to the inner of the wheel) until their ends reaches those of the wheel; the set screws should be fixed in the level of the notches in the shaft.

Maintenance

6-44

Figure 6-33 Disassembling the shaft assembly

1 ―――Shaft 2 ―――3x6x2.5 deep groove ball bearing

3 ―――Wheel 4 ―――Bush

5 ―――Gasket 6 ―――M3X5 set screw

Installation

To replace the sample compartment assembly with a new one, repeat the first removal

procedure (step 1 to 4) in the reverse order. During installation, take into account the

following items:

1. One side of the sample compartment assembly should be set close to the positioning step

raised on the bottom board (autoloader bottom board)

2. Be sure to install the assembly back to the position marked in disassembly.

To replace components like the photocouplers, electromagnet, damp gear or springs,

repeat the second procedure above in the reverse order. During installation, take into

account the following items:

1. The tube holder compartment body should be put right in the center

2. Always install the damp gear after the gear is installed

3. Turn the core of the electromagnet 360° and make sure there is no interference

4. Move the guiding axis of the electromagnet with you hand and make sure the sample

compartment can turn properly. Push the compartment body back to the initial position and

make sure it can be locked up.

Maintenance

6-45

6.8.2 Removing and replacing the detection switches of the sample transport unit

Purpose

To remove or replace the detection switches (detecting the sample transport unit for proper

loading of tube rack and empty/full status of the unloader), follow the steps in this section.

Tools




Sensitive switch

PHOTOCOUPLER (reflective)

Preparation






Removal


2. Unplug the cable connector corresponding to the switch to be replaced

3. Use the 101 cross-headed screwdriver to remove the two M2X8 cross-headed panhead

screws fixing the sensitive switch detecting the proper loading of tube racks, and then

remove the sensitive switch.

During installation, remember to check the orientation of the sensitive switch and make necessary adjustment. To make adjustment, move the tube rack manually to where the switch locates until it cannot be moved any more; the clicking sound made by the sensitive switch indicates proper installation (move the tube rack repeatedly to identify).

4. Use the 107 cross-headed screwdriver to remove the M2X8 small panhead screws fixing

the switches detecting the empty/full status of the unloader, and then remove the switch,

as shown in Figure 6-34.

Maintenance

6-46

Install the switch as level as possible.

Figure 6-34 Disassembling the switches of the sample transport assembly

1 ―――M3X8 small panhead screw 2 ―――PHOTOCOUPLER (reflective)

3 ―――M2X8 cross-headed panhead screw 4 ―――Sensitive switch

Installation

To replace the switch with a new one, repeat Step 1 to 4 above in the reverse order.

6.8.3 Replacing the sample transport unit

Purpose

As there may be errors with the sample transport unit (especially the switches and driving

units) during operation, you need to replace these components according to the steps in this

section.

Tools


Maintenance

6-47




3mm hexagonal wrench

Preparation






Removal

Follow the two procedures to remove and disassemble the sample transport unit.

Remove the sample transport unit:


2. Remove the shielding box from the autoloader board, and unplug the cable connectors

between the sample transport assembly and the autoloader control board

3. Use the 107 cross-headed screwdriver to remove the three M4X12 cross-headed panhead

screws fixing the sample transport unit, and then remove the sample transport unit, as


Note: You should readjust the position of the sample transport unit during installation. See

Chapter 3 for how to make adjustment.

Maintenance

6-48

Figure 6-35 Disassembling the sample transport unit (1)

1 ―――Sample transport unit 2 ―――M4X12 panhead screw

Disassemble the sample transport assembly:

1. See Figure 6-36 for components of the sample transport compartment

Maintenance

6-49


1 ―――Loading unit (forth-and-back) 2 ―――Sample transport frame

3 ―――Closed-tube sample compartment assembly 4 ―――Riser unit

5 ―――Unloader unit 6 ―――Platform unit

7 ―――Loading unit (left-and-right) 8 ―――Backboard

2. Unplug the connector of the stationary barcode scanner; use the 107 screwdriver to

unscrew the four M3X8 small panhead screws fixing the stationary barcode scanner and

its bracket on the backboard unit, and then remove the stationary barcode scanner and its

bracket, as shown in Figure 6-36 and Figure 6-37

3. Use the 107 cross-headed screwdriver to remove other units on the backboard like the

tube detecting photocouplers and the tube rack locating plate as per Figure 6-37

During installation, make sure the back of the tube locating block and that of the tube rack locating plate are at the same plane; adjust the distance between the tube rack block and the tube rack to be around 0.2mm.

Maintenance

6-50


1 ―――Stationary barcode scanner 2 ―――Barcode scanner bracket

3 ―――Backboard bracket 4 ―――Sensor fixing board

5 ―――M3X8 small panhead screw 6 ―――Tube rack locating plate

7 ―――Rubber baffle plate 8 ―――Rubber baffle plate presser

9 ―――M2X4 cross-headed panhead screw 10―――PHOTOCOUPLER (reflective)

11―――Tube locating block


fixing the unloader unit and remove the connector of the photoelectric sensor on the

unloader unit, and then remove the unloader unit, as shown in Figure 6-36 and Figure 6-37

5. Use the 107 cross-headed screwdriver to remove the unloader unit as per Figure 6-38

Maintenance

6-51


1 ―――M3X8 small panhead screw 2 ―――M4X10 cross-headed panhead screw

3 ―――GP1A05A photoelectric sensor 4 ―――Unloader pulling spring

5 ―――Sensory plate 6 ―――Top cover of the gear holder

7 ―――Gear shaft 8 ―――Short rack

9 ―――Gear holder 10―――Long rack

11―――Bottom cover of the gear holder 12―――M3X8 cross-headed countersunk screw

13―――Unloader bracket


fixing the spring presser, and then remove the spring presser, as shown in Figure 6-36 and

Figure 6-39

Maintenance

6-52


1 ―――Riser unit 2 ―――Large plain washer GB96 3

3 ―――Spring presser 4 ―――M3X8 small panhead screw

5 ―――Shaft sleeve 6 ―――Sensory plate 3


fixing the front supporting board, and then remove the front supporting board, as shown in

Figure 6-36 and Figure 6-40

8. Unplug the connectors of the sensitive switch and the PHOTOCOUPLER (reflective) on

the platform unit; use the 107 cross-headed screwdriver to remove the six M3X8 small

panhead screws fixing the platform unit, and then remove the platform unit, as shown in

Figure 6-36 and Figure 6-40

Maintenance

6-53


1 ―――M3X8 small panhead screw 2 ―――Sample transport platform

3 ―――M4X8 panhead screw 4 ―――Front supporting board

9. Unplug the connectors of the stepping motor and the three photoelectric sensor in the

left-and-right loading unit; use the 107 cross-headed screwdriver to remove the three

M3X8 small panhead screws fixing the left-and-right loading unit, and then remove the

left-and-right loading unit, as shown in Figure 6-36 and Figure 6-41

10. Use the 1.5mm hexagonal wrench, 2.5mm hexagonal wrench and the 107 cross-headed

screwdriver to remove the left-and-right loading unit as per Figure 6-41

Maintenance

6-54


1 ―――Stepping motor PK244M-01B 2 ―――M3X5 hexagon set screw

3 ―――Washer 4 ―――Driven belt shaft

5 ―――Synchronous pulley, P16MXL6.4 6 ―――E ring GB/T896-86.4

7 ―――Guiding rail supporting block 8 ―――Photoelectric sensor GP1A05A

9 ―――Guiding rail MGN9C1R95ZOCM 10―――M3X8 cheese head hexagon screw

11―――Belt presser 12―――Left-and-right loading slid plate

13―――M3X5 cheese head hexagon screw 14―――Shaft sleeve


screw (with washer)

16―――Pallet

17―――Plain washer GB97.1 3 18―――M4X10 cross-head panhead screw

19―――Synchronous belt 20―――M3X8 small panhead screw

21―――Left-and-right loader bracket 22―――Synchronous pulley, P16MXL6.4

11. Unplug the connectors of the stepping motor and the two photoelectric sensor in the

forth-and-back loading unit; use the 107 cross-headed screwdriver to remove the four

M3X8 small panhead screws fixing the left-and-right loading unit, and then remove the

forth-and-back loading unit, as shown in Figure 6-36 and Figure 6-42

12. Use the 1.5mm hexagonal wrench, 2.5mm hexagonal wrench, 101 cross-headed

screwdriver and the 107 cross-headed screwdriver to remove the forth-and-back loading

unit as per Figure 6-42

Maintenance

6-55


1 ―――Driven belt shaft 2 ―――Washer

3 ―――Synchronous belt TBN160MXL025 4 ―――Synchronous pulley, P16MXL6.4

5 ―――Stepping motor PK244M-01B 6 ―――M2X8 cross-headed panhead screw

7 ―――Large plain washer GB96 3 8 ―――Right pusher

9 ―――M3X5 hexagon countersunk head

set screw

10―――Belt presser

11―――M3X5 cheese head hexagon screw 12―――Pulling spring


screw (with washer)

14―――Shaft sleeve 2

15―――Left pusher 16―――Forth-and-back loading pusher board

17―――Photoelectric sensor GP1A05A 18―――M3X8 small panhead screw


screw

20―――Guiding rail MGN9C1R155ZOCM

21―――M3X8 cheese head hexagon screw 22―――Forth-and-back loader bracket

23―――E ring GB/T896-86.4 24―――Synchronous belt TBN160MXL02

(two positioning plate)

Maintenance

6-56

Installation

Repeat the removal steps in the reverse order to install.

Take into account the following items during installation and adjustment:

Requirements for installing the forth-and-back loading unit:

Install the guiding rail close to one side, and put in the positioning screws before installation

Before installing the synchronous pulley of the driven belt shaft, apply some lubricator on the

surface of the shaft.

Make sure the shaft end of the stepping motor and the end of the synchronous pulley are at

the same plane.

While installing the stepping motor, adjust the tensility of the synchronous belt before locking

up screws.

Requirements for installing the left-and-right loading unit:

Install the guiding rail close to one side, and put in the positioning screws before installation

Before installing the synchronous pulley of the driven belt shaft, apply some lubricator on the

surface of the shaft.

Make sure the shaft end of the stepping motor and the end of the synchronous pulley are at

the same plane.

While installing the stepping motor, adjust the tensility of the synchronous belt before locking

up screws.

Requirements for installing the unloader unit:

Make sure the two racks can move freely with little resistance after installation. If the resistance

is large, repair is necessary; otherwise, the unit may not be able to restore the initial position.

See the initial positions of the short rack in Figure 6-43 with one tooth hanging over the end.

Figure 6-43 Initial position of the short rack

Requirements for installing the sample transport unit:

While installing the assembled sample transport unit to the main unit, readjust tbe sample

proble position as per Step 1 to 10 in Section 6.10.1

Maintenance

6-57

Verification

1. Readjust the position of the sample probe as per Step 10 to 14 in Section 6.10.1 .

2. Check if all parts are mounted to the former position and are fastened.

3. Check if the connection of signal lines of WBC or RBC is correct or not.


Maintenance

6-58

6.9 Mix mechanism

Purpose

As there may be errors with the mix mechanism during operation, you need to replace the

mix mechanism according to the steps in this section.

Tools




3mm hexagonal wrench


BC-5380 mix mechanism

Preparation






Removal

Follow the two procedures to remove and disassemble the mix mechanism.

Remove the mix mechanism:

1. Remove the shielding box on the autoloader board, and unplug the cable connectors

between the mix mechanism and the autoloader control board


3. Use the 107 cross-headed screwdriver to remove the four M4X8 panhead screws, and

then remove the mix mechanism, as shown in Figure 6-44.

Maintenance

6-59

Figure 6-44 Removing the mix mechanism

1 ―――Mix mechanism 2 ―――M4X8 small panhead screw

Disassemble the mix mechanism:

1. Unfasten the plastic cable tie fixing the components and pull out the plugs from the five

photocouplers and three motors to the cable, and then remove the cable

2. Use the 107 cross-headed screwdriver to remove the three M3X6 cross-headed panhead

screws fixing the small motor protection cover, and then remove the cover, as shown in

Figure 6-45

3. Use the 2.5mm hexagonal wrench to remove the three M3X8 cheese head hexagon

screws connecting the rotation and X-co motion unit and the Z-co motion unit, and then

remove the two units, as shown in Figure 6-45

Maintenance

6-60

Figure 6-45 Disassembling the mix mechanism

1 ―――Rotation and X-co motion unit 2 ―――M3X8 cheese head hexagon screw

3 ―――Small motor protection cover 4―――M3X6 cross-headed panhead screw

5 ―――Z-co motion unit

4. Use the 107 cross-headed screw driver to remove the four M3X6 cross-headed panhead

screws fixing the protection cover, and then remove the protection cover, as shown in

Maintenance

6-61

Figure 6-46

5. Use the 107 cross-headed screw driver to remove the four M3X6 cross-headed panhead

screws fixing the two photocouplers on the 43 motor installation board, and then remove

the motor installation board and the elements on the board (draw out the motor shaft from

the motor nut), as shown in Figure 6-46

6. Use the 107 cross-headed screw driver to remove the three M3X6 cross-headed panhead

screws fixing the motor nut, and then remove the nut, as shown in Figure 6-46

7. Use the 2.5mm hexagonal wrench to remove the four M3X5 cheese head hexagon screws

fixing the connection block, and then remove the block, as shown in Figure 6-46

8. Use the 107 cross-headed screw driver to remove the two M3X6 cross-headed panhead

screws fixing the Z-co sensory plate, and then remove the two Z-co photocoupler sensory

plates, as shown in Figure 6-46

9. Use the 2.5mm hexagonal wrench to remove the five M3X5 cheese head hexagon screws

fixing the linear guiding rail MGN9C1R175Z0CM, and then remove the guiding rail, as

shown in Figure 6-46

10. Use the 2.5mm hexagonal wrench to remove the two M3X6 cross-headed panhead

screws fixed in the slider connecting board for baffling


Maintenance

6-62

1 ―――Protection cover 2 ―――Photocouplers

3 ―――M3X6 cross-headed panhead screw 4―――Connecting block

5 ―――Motor nut 6 ―――Z-co sensory plate

7 ―――Linear guiding rail MGN9C1R175Z0CM 8 ―――Bracket

9 ―――M3X5 cheese head hexagon screw 10 ―――M3X8 small panhead screw

11 ―――43 motor installation board 12 ―――Sensor installation bracket


screws fixing the sensor installation bracket, as shown in Figure 6-47

12. Use the 2.5mm hexagonal wrench to remove the four M3X8 cheese head hexagon screws

fixing the linear stepping motor E43H4Q, and then remove the linear stepping motor

E43H4Q, four M3 large washer and 8 O rings, as shown in Figure 6-47


1 ―――Linear stepping motor E43H4Q 2 ―――O ring

3 ―――43 motor installation board 4―――M3X6 cross-headed panhead

screw

5 ―――Sensor installation bracket 6 ―――M3 large washer

7 ―――M3X8 cheese head hexagon screw 8 ―――Sleeve

13. Use the 107 cross-headed screw driver to remove the six M3X6 cross-headed panhead

screws fixing the photocouplers, X-co sensory plate, X-co sensor installation board, and

then remove the photocouplers, X-co sensory plate, X-co sensor installation board, as


14. Use the 107 cross-headed screw driver to remove the four M2.5X6 cross-headed panhead

screws fixing the linear stepping motor, and then remove the stepping motor E28H41, as


15. Use the 2.5mm hexagonal wrench to remove the two M3X8 cheese head hexagon fixing

the 28 motor installation board, and then remove the installation board, as shown in Figure

6-48

Maintenance

6-63

16. Use the 2.5mm hexagonal wrench to remove the four M3X5 cheese head hexagon screw

fixing the connecting board, and then remove the connecting board

17. Use the 2.5mm hexagonal wrench to remove the four M3X5 cheese head hexagon screw

fixing the linear guiding rail MGN9C1R75Z0CM, and then remove the guiding rail


screws fixed in the slider connecting board for baffling


1 ―――Linear motor E28H41 2 ―――M3X8 cheese head hexagon screw

3 ―――28 motor installation board 4―――M2.5X6 cross-headed panhead

screw

5 ―――Slider connecting board 6 ―――linear guiding rail

MGN9C1R75Z0CM

7 ―――Connecting board 8 ―――M3X5 cheese head hexagon screw

9 ―――M3X6 cross-headed panhead screw 10 ―――X-co sensory plate

11 ―――Photocouplers 12 ―――X-co sensor installation board

19. Use the 2.5mm hexagonal wrench to remove the M3X8 hexagon screw fixing the presser,

Maintenance

6-64

and then remove the presser, as shown in Figure 6-49

20. Use the 2.5mm hexagonal wrench to remove the M3X8 hexagon screw fixing the rotation

photocoupler plate, and then remove the rotation photocoupler plate, as shown in Figure

6-49

21. Use the 2.5mm hexagonal wrench to remove the M3X8 hexagon screw fixing the swing

arm and use the 2mm hexagonal wrench to remove the M4X8 set screw fixing the swing

arm, and then remove the swing arm


screws fixing the spring tube pincher, and them remove the M3 large washer and the

spring tube pincher, as shown in Figure 6-49

23. Use the 2.5mm hexagonal wrench to remove the four M3X10 cheese head hexagon

screws fixing the rotation stepping motor, and then remove the four M3 large washer, the

rotation stepping motor and the synchronous belt, as shown in Figure 6-49

24. Use the 1.5mm hexagonal wrench to remove the four set screws fixing the two small

pulleys, and then remove the pulleys, as shown in Figure 6-49

25. Use the 2.5mm hexagonal wrench to remove the two M3X8 screws fixing the bearing

holder, and then remove the bearing holder, pulley shaft and the two deep groove ball

bearings, as shown in Figure 6-49

26. Use the 107 cross-headed screw driver to remove the three M3X6 cross-headed panhead

screws fixing the linear stepping motor E28H41 nut, and then remove the linear stepping

motor E28H41 nut, as shown in Figure 6-49

27. Use the 107 cross-headed screw driver to remove the M3X6 cross-headed panhead screw

fixing the rotation sensor bracket, and then remove the rotation sensor bracket and the

photocouplers


Maintenance

6-65

1 ―――Presser 2 ―――Spring tube pincher

3 ―――Rubber washer 4―――M3X8 cheese head hexagon screw

5 ―――Swing arm 6 ―――M4X8 set screw

7 ―――M3X5 set screw 8 ―――Small pulley

9 ―――Pulley shaft 10 ―――Rotation motor installation board

11 ―――Rotation sensor bracket and

photocouplers

12 ―――Bearing holder

13 ―――Deep groove ball bearing 14 ―――Rotation sensory plate

15 ―――Rotation stepping motor 16 ―――Linear stepping motor E28H41 nut

17 ―――M3X6 cross-headed panhead screw 18 ―――M3 large washer

19 ―――M3X10 cheese head hexagon screw 20 ―――Synchronous belt

Installation

Perform the steps above in the reverse order to install.

During installation or position adjustment, take into consideration the following items:

1. Install the guiding rail close to one side, and put in the positioning screws before

installation

2. Make sure the motion parts can move properly

3. Keep the synchronous belt fully tightened

4. Adjust the initial position of the pincher (for forth-and-back movement, left-and-right

movement, and rotation) while installing the assembled unit to the main unit. See Section

6.10.2 for how to make adjustment.

Maintenance

6-66

6.10 Adjustment

6.10.1 Adjusting Sample Probe Position 1. Switch off the power of the analyzer and open the sample compartment manually. Put the

sample probe in-compartment locating fixture in the sample compartment and close the

compartment door, as shown in Figure 6-50. Loosen the three screws on the sample

transport unit shown in Figure 6-51, Figure 6-52 and Figure 6-53. Move the sample probe

assembly and sample transport unit horizontally and enable the sample probe to aim at the

central hole in the locating fixture, and then fix the three screws.

Figure 6-50 Sample transport unit

Figure 6-51 Left screw Figure 6-52 middle screw Figure 6-53 Right screw

2. Connect the reagents properly and connect the main unit and the PC with a network cable.

Start up the PC software on the main unit and on the PC. Then, enter the user name

“service” and the password “Se s700” (note: there is a space between “e” and ”s”) into the

pop-up box, and then click “Ok” to initialize the analyzer. During initialization, a message

box will pop up asking you whether to “Ignore fluidic initialization?”. Click “Yes” to skip

the initialization.

3. Press the [OPEN] key on the front cover, and the sample compartment will be opened

automatically. Put the sample probe in-compartment locating fixture in the sample

compartment, as shown in Figure 6-54.

Maintenance

6-67

Figure 6-54 Placing the sample probe in-compartment locating fixture

4. Click “Menu” → “Service” → “Debug” to enter the “Debug” screen, as shown in Figure

6-55.

Figure 6-55 Clicking “Debug”

5. Click “CT Piercing Position” and “Start” in turn, and the sample probe will move to the

position above the sample compartment automatically, as shown in Figure 6-56.

Maintenance

6-68

Figure 6-56 Starting CT piercing position adjustment

6. Click “Forward”, “Backward”, “Up” and “Down” to adjust the position of the sample probe,

making the probe inserted into the slot, and then click “Up” to move out the probe, as


Click “Start”

Maintenance

6-69

Figure 6-57 Adjusting the CT piercing position using the software

7. Put a piece of paper on the locating fixture and click “Down” to make the sample probe

touch the paper. Then click “Stop” to save the position of the probe over the sample

compartment. Open the sample compartment manually to remove the sample

in-compartment locating fixture and close the compartment door, as shown in Figure 6-58.

Figure 6-58 Placing a piece of paper on the fixture

8. Put the sample probe autoloading locating fixture at the autoloading position of the sample

Click “Forward”, “Backward”, “Up” and “Down”

Click “Stop”

Maintenance

6-70

transport assembly, as shown in Figure 6-59

Figure 6-59 Placing the locating fixture at the piercing position

9. Click “AL piercing Position” and “Start” in turn, and the sample probe will move onto the

autoloading position, as shown in Figure 6-60

Figure 6-60 Starting AL piercing position adjustment

10. Click “Forward”, “Backward”, “Down” and “Up” to adjust the position of the sample probe,

Click “Start”

Maintenance

6-71

making the probe inserted into the slot of the locating fixture. Click “Up” and put a paper on

the AL positioning fixture, and then click “Down” until the sample probe reaches the paper,

as shown in Figure 6-61. Click “Stop” to save the autoloading position of the sample probe,

and then remove the sample probe AL positioning fixture, as shown in Figure 6-62.

Figure 6-61 Adjusting the sample probe AL piercing position using the software

Figure 6-62 Sample probe reaching the paper

11. Put the sample probe DIFF bath up position locating fixture in the aperture of the DIFF

Click “Forward”, “Backward”, “Down” and “Up”

Click “Stop”

Maintenance

6-72

bath, as shown in Figure 6-63.

Figure 6-63 Placing the DIFF bath up position locating fixture

12. Click “DIFF Bath Up Position”, and then click “Start” to move the sample probe onto the

DIFF bath, as shown in Figure 6-64.

Figure 6-64 Starting DIFF bath position adjustment

13. Click “Forward”, “Backward”, “Up” and “Down” to adjust the sample probe, making it

inserts in the position in front of the round slot. Click “Stop” to save the position of the

sample probe, and then remove the fixture, as shown in Figure 6-65.

Click “Start”

Maintenance

6-73

Figure 6-65 Adjusting the sample probe DIFF bath up position using the software

14. Click “Ok” to exit the “Debug” screen.

6.10.2 Adjusting Pincher Position 1. Switch off the power of the analyzer and put the tube rack at the piercing position of the

sample transport unit, making the recess of the tube rack lap over the presser, as shown in

Figure 6-66, Figure 6-67 and Figure 6-68.

Figure 6-66 The recess of the tube rack

Click “Forward”, “Backward”, “Up” and “Down”Click “Stop”

Click “Ok”

Recess

Maintenance

6-74

Figure 6-67 The presser of the sample transport unit

Figure 6-68 Placing the tube rack

2. Move the pincher to the tube grabbing position and push upwards. Then put the tube

locating fixture into the pincher and make the pincher upright. Move the pincher

downwards slowly, and check if the tube locating fixture can be inserted to the tube rack

properly. If not, remove the four set screws and the left-and-right mixing assembly to insert

the tube locating fixture to the tube rack. Secure the screws after adjustment, as shown in

Figure 6-69.

Figure 6-69 Adjusting the manipulator position manually

3. Connect the reagents properly and connect the main unit and the PC with a network cable.

Start up the main unit and the PC software. Then, enter the user name “service” and the

Presser

The presser laps over the recess of the tube rack

Four screws

Tube locating fixture

Maintenance

6-75

password “Se s700” (note: there is a space between “e” and “s”) into the pop-up box, and

then click “Ok” to initialize the analyzer. During initialization, a message box will pop up

asking you whether to skip the initialization. Click “Yes” to skip the initialization

4. Click “Menu” → “Service” → “Debug” to enter the “Debug” screen

5. Click “Manipulator” and “Start” in turn, and the pincher will move onto the tube grabbing

position, as shown in Figure 6-70.

Figure 6-70 Starting manipulator position adjustment

6. Put the tube rack at the piercing position of the sample transport unit, and then put the

tube locating fixture into the pincher, as shown in Figure 6-71

Figure 6-71 Placing the pincher locating fixture

7. Click “Left” and “Right” to adjust the pincher to be upright, and then click “Forward”,

Click “Start”

Maintenance

6-76

“Backward”, “Up” and “Down” to make the tube locating fixture able to insert in the hole of

the AL piercing position locating fixture. Click “Up” and remove the two fixtures, as shown

in Figure 6-72 and Figure 6-73.

Figure 6-72 Adjusting the pincher position using the software

Figure 6-73 The hole in the piercing position locating fixture

8. Click “Stop” to save the position of the pincher, as shown in Figure 6-72.

9. Click “Ok” to exit the “Debug” screen, as shown in Figure 6-72.

Click “Left”, “Right” “Forward”, “Backward”, “Up” and “Down”

Click “Stop”

Click “Ok”

7-1

7 Optical System

7.1 Optical System Adjustment and Troubleshooting

Purpose

To replace and repair the optical system component in case of malfunction.

Tools

Antistatic gloves

Hexagon wrench

Cross-headed screwdriver

Flat-headed screwdriver

Horologic driver

Duke (4K-07) 7µm standard particles

Oscilloscope or oscillometer

Removal and installation

Before removing the optical system component, remove the right side door and the top cover

of the analyzer first (refer to Chapter 6 Maintenance), then remove all the screws on them, as

Figure 7-1 shows. Remove the protective cover of the optical system. After component

installation, reinstall the protective cover and secure it. The above-mentioned steps will not be

repeated in the following procedures.

Optical System

7-2

Figure 7-1 Remove the protective cover of the optical system

Screws

Optical System

7-3

7.2 Removing and Installing Optical System Assemblies The optical system consists of the following assemblies: the front light assembly, flow cell

assembly, rear light collimator assembly, beam splitter assembly, rear light collector assembly,

and rear light detector assembly.

Wear antistatic gloves when removing boards.

Be sure to turn off the analyzer and disconnect the power cord before removing boards.

Do not plug/unplug the laser generator unless the power cord is disconnected. Otherwise, the laser generator will be damaged.

7.2.1 Laser driver board

The laser driver board supplies power to the laser generator and controls the output power of

the laser.

1. Turn off the analyzer, open the laser cover and remove the connecting line from the driver

board.

2. Remove the fixing screws, and remove the laser driver board support.

3. Replace the laser driver board and reinstall it in the reverse order, then secure the fixing

screws.

Optical System

7-4

Figure 7-2 Laser driver board installation

1——fixing screws of laser driver board

support

2——fixing screws of laser driver board

7.2.2 Front light assembly The front light assembly generates the laser beam that enters the flow cell. Remove and install

the assembly strictly as instructed below. See Figure 7-3 for the assembly drawing.

1. Turn off the analyzer and disconnect its power cord.

2. Disconnect the laser power connector from the laser control board. Disconnect the heater,

temperature sensor and over temperature protection switch connectors.

3. Use the hexagon wrench to remove the fixing screws at the two sides of the front light

assembly and remove the assembly.

4. Use the hexagon wrench and the cross-headed screwdriver to remove the screws fixing

the laser generator assembly and the cylindrical mirror assembly separately, and then

remove the assemblies from the front light guide assembly.

Optical System

7-5

Figure 7-3 Front light assembly

1——Laser assembly 3——Cylindrical mirror assembly

2——Front guide assembly

5. According to the malfunction of the front light assembly, replace the whole laser assembly

or the whole cylindrical mirror assembly, install the new one on the front light assembly and

secure the assembly to the optical support.

6. Reconnect the laser power connector, heater, temperature sensor and the connector of

the over temperature protection switch.

7.2.3 Flow cell assembly

The flow cell assembly is used to create a stable sheath fluid flow, which enables the particle

tested to pass through the flow cell in a certain speed and to interact with the incident laser to

create scattered light. Remove and install the flow cell assembly strictly as instructed below.

1. Power on the analyzer to empty the fluidic pipes, then power off the analyzer and

disconnect the power cord.

2. Disconnect the sheath charging tube, sample charging tube and waste outlet tube (at the

outlet of the flow cell). Use the hexagon wrench to remove the two fixing screws and take

out the flow cell assembly carefully, as Figure 7-4 shows.

Optical System

7-6

Figure 7-4 Flow cell fluidic connecting tube

1―――Sample charging tube 2―――Sheath charing tube

3. Use the hexagon wrench to remove the two connecting screws and divide the flow cell

assembly into two parts: rectifier assembly and detecting assembly, as Figure 7-5 shows.

4. Clean or replace the detecting assembly and liquid transporting assembly as needed.

Figure 7-5 Flow cell structure

1——Rectifier assembly 3——Detecting assembly

2——O ring 4——Hexagon screw

5. Install the flow cell assembly as stated above in the reverse order.

Optical System

7-7

7.2.4 Rear light collimator assembly The rear light collimator assembly collects the scattered light created by the particle tested and

allows the light to be tested by the rear light detector assembly. Remove the rear light

collimator assembly strictly as instructed below. See Figure 7-6 for the assembly drawing of

the rear light collimator assembly.

1. Power off the analyzer and disconnect its power cord.

2. Use the hexagon wrench to remove the fixing screws at two sides of the rear light


3. Use the hexagon wrench to remove the two screws fixing the diaphragm lens assembly to

remove the lens assembly.

Figure 7-6 Rear light collimator assembly

1―――Diaphragm lens assembly 2―――Rear light guide assembly

4. Install the new rear light diaphragm lens assembly on the rear light guide assembly to form

a new rear light collimator assembly. Ensure that the superface edge of the diaphragm

lens assembly parallels the end face edge of backward oriented assembly. Install and

secure the assembly to the optical support.

7.2.5 Beam splitter assembly The beam splitter assembly splits the scattered light into two paths: one for the forward low

angle PD assembly and the other for the forward high angle PD assembly. See Figure 7-7 for

the assembly drawing of the beam splitter assembly.


2. Use the hexagon wrench to remove the fixing screws at two sides of the beam splitter


3. Use the flat-headed screwdriver to remove the two clamping rings. Use the cross-headed

Optical System

7-8

screwdriver to remove the screws at the top board and the side boards to remove the

boards.

4. Remove the two protective washers to remove the beam-splitting prism.

5. When replacing or installing a new beam-splitting prism, pay attention to the direction of

the prism (see Figure 7-7 ). Install the prism following steps above in the reverse order.

Figure 7-7 Beam splitter assembly

1——Base of spectroscope 4——Clamping ring

2——Side board 5——Washer

3——Top board 6——Beam-splitting prism

7.2.6 Rear light collector assembly The rear light collector assembly enhances the collection efficiency by focusing the scattered

light, which has passed the beam splitter assembly, on the PD detecting target. It consists of a

LAS assembly and a MAS assembly.

LAS assembly


2. Use the hexagon wrench to remove the two fixing screws on the LAS assembly and

remove the LAS assembly from the optical support.

3. Use the cross-headed screwdriver to remove the two screws fixing the low angle

diaphragm and remove the diaphragm. Use the cross-headed screwdriver to remove the

two screws fixing the rear light focus lens assembly and remove the assembly.

Optical System

7-9

Figure 7-8 LAS assembly

1——Low angle diaphragm 2——Rear light focus lens assembly

4. Install and secure the low angle diaphragm and the rear light focus lens assembly as

needed.

5. Install the LAS assembly to the optical support and screw it with the hexagon wrench.

During securing, ensure that the diaphragm assembly is close to the M4 hexagon screws.

MAS assembly


2. Use the hexagon wrench to remove the two screws fixing the MAS assembly and then

remove the MAS assembly from the optical support.

3. Use the cross-headed screwdriver to remove the two screws fixing the diaphragm and

then remove the diaphragm. Use the cross-headed screwdriver to remove the two screws

on the rear light focus lens assembly and then remove the assembly.

Figure 7-9 MAS assembly

1——High angle diaphragm 2——Rear light focus lens assembly

Optical System

7-10

4. Install and secure the diaphragm and the rear light focus lens assembly as needed.

5. Install the MAS assembly to the optical support and screw it with the hexagon wrench.

During securing, ensure that the diaphragm assembly is close to the M4 hexagon screws.

7.2.7 Rear light detector assembly The rear light detector assembly detects the scattered light signal and converts it into electrical

signals for further processing. It consists of two parts: a forward low angle PD assembly and a

forward middle low angle PD assembly.

Forward low angle PD assembly


2. Use the hexagon wrench to remove the screws fixing the forward low angle PD assembly

and then remove the assembly from the optical support.

3. Use the cross-headed screwdriver to remove the two screws fixing the PD board and

remove the shielding box from the forward low angle PD assembly.

Figure 7-10 Forward low angle PD assembly

1——Shielding box 3——PD

2——Low angle pre-amplification board 4——PD cover

4. Use the cross-headed screwdriver to loosen the low angle pre-amplification board, remove

the PD board, replace the corresponding parts and reinstall them orderly.

5. Assemble the shielding box to the forward low angle PD assembly and then install the

forward low angle PD assembly to the optical support.

Forward middle low angle PD assembly


2. Use the hexagon wrench to remove the screws fixing the forward middle low angle PD

Optical System

7-11

assembly and remove the assembly from the optical support.

3. Use the cross-headed screwdriver to remove the two screws fixing the PD board and then

remove the shielding box from the forward middle low angle PD assembly.

Figure 7-11 Forward middle low angle PD assembly

1——Shielding box 3——PD

2——High angle pre-amplification board 4——PD cover

4. Use the cross-headed screwdriver to loosen the low angle pre-amplification board, remove

the PD cover and the PD board, replace the corresponding parts and install them orderly.

5. Assemble the shielding box to the forward middle low angle PD assembly and then install

the forward middle low angle PD assembly to the optical support.

Pre-amplification board


2. Use the cross-headed screwdriver to loosen the two screws securing the PD board, and

remove the shielding box from the PD assembly.

3. Use the cross-headed screwdriver to remove the pre-amplification board from the PD

assembly and replace it with a new pre-amplification board, then reinstall it orderly.

Note: The rear light PD assembly needs not to be removed from the optical system during the

replacement of the pre-amplification board assembly.

Optical System

7-12

7.3 Adjustment Any assembly in the optical system should be adjusted after the installation once it has been

disassembled. The adjustment procedure can be simplified according to how the assembly

has been disassembled.

The adjustment to the optical system consists of coarse adjustment and fine tuning. Coarse

adjustment roughly aligns every optical assembly and makes them approximately on the same

optical axis, so that the signal can be created rapidly when standard particles are run. Fine

tuning ensures the best position of the optical system. An oscilloscope is used to observe the

signal waveform and the corresponding optical assembly position is finely tuned so that the

signal generated meets the adjustment standard.

7.3.1 Coarse adjustment According to each optical assembly, the coarse adjustment can be divided into: front light

assembly adjustment, flow cell adjustment, rear light collimator assembly adjustment, rear light

collector assembly diaphragm adjustment and backward detecting PD assembly adjustment.

Front light assembly adjustment

Purpose:

Horizontally, the beam is upright to the rear light collimator lens. The collimator emergent far

field spot is in the vertical direction.

Principle:

The laser beam distributes symmetrically along the optical axis; the reflex fully covers the

incident light when the light enters vertically.

Procedure:

Install the rear light assembly first, and cling the rear light assembly closely to the pin stop at

the rear light position, as Figure 7-12 shows. Aim the pin stop of the front light assembly at the

optical support, secure the fixing screw (make sure the forward optical system attaches the

optical support and is still movable). Turn on the power of the laser, and turn the laser

assembly to make the far field spot of the emitting laser vertical. Attach the rear light collimator

assembly to the pin stop, use a hexagon wrench to check whether the light reflected from the

surface of the rear light collimator lens is on the same axis with the incident light and slowly

turn the front light assembly to make them on the same axis, and then secure the assembly, as

Figure 7-13 shows.

Optical System

7-13

Figure 7-12 Rear light assembly installation

Figure 7-13 Front light assembly adjustment

Optical System

7-14

Flow cell adjustment

Purpose:

Adjusting the flow cell to irradiate the incident light to the surface of the flow cell vertically.

Principle:

That the flow cell is vertical to the incident laser uses the principle of that the reflex fully covers

the incident light when the light enters vertically.

Procedure:

Turn the flow cell into the optical path (do not position the square aperture detection area in the

optical path). Use a hexagon wrench to check whether the light reflected from the flow cell

surface is on the same axis with that of the incident light and adjust the flow cell slowly to

harmonize them and then secure the flow cell.

Figure 7-14 Flow cell coarse adjustment

Rear light collimator assembly adjustment

Rear light horizontal position adjustment Purpose:

To make sure the front and the rear light is on the same axis approximately.

Principle:

The beam that goes through the main point of the lens will not change the transmitting

direction.

Procedure:

1. Remove the rear light collimator assembly; check whether the beam spot that passes

through the beam-splitting prism and the diaphragm on the MAS assembly is symmetrical.

Adjust the MAS assembly to make the beam spot symmetrical, as shown in Figure 7-15.

Optical System

7-15

Figure 7-15 Adjustment of the horizontal position of the rear light collimator assembly

2. Move horizontally the rear light collimator assembly along the pin stop and observe the

beam spot position on the diaphragm of the MAS assembly. When the spot is in the center

of the diaphragm (as shown in Figure 7-16), secure the fixing screw of the rear light

collimator assembly.

Figure 7-16 The adjustment of the horizontal position of the rear light collimator assembly is finished

The rear light assembly must cling to the pin stop when it is moved.

Rear light collection assembly adjustment

LAS assembly diaphragm adjustment

Optical System

7-16

Purpose:

To obtain the effect of selecting low angle scattered light by positioning the LAS assembly

diaphragm symmetrically along the light axis.

Procedure:

1. Place a piece of white paper with rough surface at the back of the LAS assembly

diaphragm, and adjust the horizontal adjusting screw cap until the spot is symmetrical

horizontally (as shown in Figure 7-17).

2. Adjust the vertical adjusting screw cap until the spot is symmetrical vertically (as shown in

Figure 7-17).

Figure 7-17 Adjustment of the LAS assembly diaphragm

MAS assembly diaphragm adjustment Purpose:

To obtain the effect of selecting middle low angle scattered light by positioning the MAS

assembly diaphragm symmetrically along the light axis.

Note: After the adjustment of the horizontal position of the rear light collimator assembly is

finished, the position adjustment of the MAS assembly diaphragm is finished. You can secure

the fixing screw.

Rear light detector assembly adjustment

Forward low angle PD assembly adjustment Purpose:

To ensure the scattered light from the forward low angle is completely collected by the PD.

Procedure:

Optical System

7-17

Adjust the horizontal and vertical positions of the forward low angle PD assembly until the

center of the spot emitted from the LAS assembly diaphragm is completely received by the

aperture (as shown in Figure 7-18).

Figure 7-18 Adjustment of the forward low angle PD assembly

1―――Aperture diaphragm of eliminating

veiling glare

2―――Low angle beam spot

Forward middle low angle PD assembly adjustment Adjust the forward middle low angle PD assembly in the same way as adjusting the forward

low angle PD assembly. Ensure that the center of the emitted spot is completely received by

the aperture (as shown in Figure 7-19).

Figure 7-19 Spot from the forward middle low angle PD assembly

1―――Aperture diaphragm of eliminating

veiling glare

The above description is a complete procedure of coarse adjustment. By the adjustment above,

each assembly is roughly positioned symmetrically along the light axis. The following

describes the fine tuning of the optical system.

Optical System

7-18

7.3.2 Preparation before fine tuning

Adjustment of the horizontal position of the flow cell

Before fine tuning, the detecting square aperture of the flow cell should be turned into the

optical path. Check the MAS assembly diaphragm. When the sideline shades of the square

aperture distribute symmetrically on the diaphragm, the flow cell is turned into the optical path,

as shown in Figure 7-20.

Figure 7-20 Flow cell position adjustment

1——Flow cell horizontal adjusting knob

Adjustment of diaphragm against direct light

After the flow cell horizontal position adjustment is finished, turn the diaphragm against direct

light into the center of the optical path, so that the light intensity shielded by the diaphragm is

the largest and brightest. The following two methods show how to judge whether the

diaphragm is right in this position.

Visual check method:

Place a card (with a drawing line on it) on the MAS assembly diaphragm so that the two

sideline shades of the flow cell distribute symmetrically along the drawing line, as shown in

Figure 7-21. Adjust the position of the diaphragm against direct light. When the shielded spot

distributes symmetrically along the drawing line, the adjustment is finished.

Optical System

7-19

Figure 7-21 Visual check method

1―――Beam spot 3―――Drawing line

2―――Inner aperture of the flow cell 4―――High angle diaphragm

DC background method:

Output the pre-amplification board TPOUT test point of the forward low angle PD assembly (or

the TP43 LASIN test point connected to the signal processing board) to the oscilloscope and

select DC gear. Adjust the position of the diaphragm against direct light until minimum LAS DC

background is obtained, and then the adjustment is finished.

After the adjustment, secure the two screws of the diaphragm against direct light (as shown in

Figure 7-22).

Figure 7-22 Diaphragm against direct light

1——Lock screw of the diaphragm

against direct light

7.3.3 Fine tuning The purpose of fine tuning is to ensure the optical system is in the optimal position when it

detects the scattered light signal from the designed angle. The fine tuning purpose mainly

consists of the following three parts: (1) to focus the laser on the cell flow; (2) To ensure that

the center of the sample flow basically covers the spot center; and (3) To adjust the scattered

Optical System

7-20

light of the rear light assembly from the designed angle. Therefore, the tuning is mainly on the

forward optical system axial position, the flow cell horizontal position and the position of the

rear light collimator assembly.

Before the particle adjustment, at the “Main”→ “Menu”→ “Setup”→ “Gain” screen, set the

values of SS and FS to be 100.

Adjustment of front light assembly axial position

Purpose:

Ensure that the laser beam focus is on the cell flow.

Procedure:

1. Test the voltage of the tp2vref test point of the laser control board to see whether the

voltage reaches 4V. If not, adjust the variable resistance of the laser control board until the

voltage is 4V.

2. Output the pre-amplification board TPOUT test point of the forward low angle PD

assembly to the oscilloscope channel 1 (CH1), set the oscilloscope to be: voltage 50mv/div,

time 500ns/div and AC coupling.

3. Adopt standard particles as sample for test. Add 3 drops of Duke (4K-07) 7µm standard

particles into a 1.5mL centrifugal tube, and then add diluent or deionized water into the

centrifugal tube to 1mL. Use the diluted standard particle solution within 3 hours.

4. Run the standard particles in the open-vial mode normally, check the signal in the

oscilloscope channel 1 and adjust the adjusting knob of the front light assembly (as shown

in Figure 7-23) in the axial position. When the maximum signal amplitude and stability is

obtained and distributes normally, the pulse width is the narrowest and about 1.3us, as

shown in Figure 7-24, secure the fixing screws of the front light guide assembly.

Optical System

7-21

Figure 7-23 Fine tuning of the front light axial position

1――Front light axial adjustment knob 2——laser axial adjustment lock screws

Figure 7-24 Standard particle signal graph output by forward optical system

Note: The sampling time of the DIFF channel is about 20s. To simplify the adjustment and

generate signals quickly, you can adjust the forward optical axis adjusting knob in advance

until the distance between the front end surface of the front light guide assembly and that of

the guide assembly support is about 4mm.

Fine tuning of the rear light collimator assembly

Purpose:

To ensure that what the PD assembly detects is the scattered light signals of the designed

collection angles.

Optical System

7-22

Procedure:

1. Output the pre-amplification board TPOUT test point of the forward middle low angle PD

assembly (or the TP44 MASIN test point connected to the signal processing board) to the

oscilloscope channel 2 (CH2), set the oscilloscope to: voltage 100mv/div, time 500ns/div

and AC coupling.

2. Run standard particles in the open vial mode normally, adjust the adjusting knob of the

rear light collimator assembly and check the signal pulses of the oscilloscope channel 2.

Secure the set screws of the rear light collimator assembly when the pulse peaks reach

the maximum value, the signal are stable and the shake is little.

3. Switch to the channel 1 (CH1) and check whether the signal peaks are 190mv±10mv. If not,

adjust the adjustable resistance on the laser control board until the signal peaks of the

CH1 are 190mv±10mv.

4. Check whether the signal peaks of the channel 2 (CH2) are about 800mv. If not, adjust the

adjusting knob of the rear light collimator assembly and confirm whether the pulse signal

peaks of the CH2 are at the maximum.

Fine tuning of the flow cell horizontal position

Purpose:

To ensure that the center of the sample flow is positioned in the center of the beam spot.

Procedure:

1. Run standard particles in the open vial mode, and check whether the signal peaks of the

oscilloscope channel 1 (CH1) are stable and shake little.

2. Adjust the flow cell horizontal position until the particle signal peaks displayed on the

oscilloscope are at the maximum and uniform.

Optical System

7-23

Figure 7-25 Adjustment of the flow cell horizontal position

1―――Horizontal adjusting knob of the

flow cell

3. Step 3: After the test, standard particles scattergrams will be obtained, as shown in Figure

7-26:

Figure 7-26 Standard particles scattergrams

Click the “Optical” in the “Review” menu to enter the “Optical” screen (the default screen is

the DIFF channel calculation screen), then click “Calculate” to obtain the particle scattergram

parameters of the DIFF channel and then check whether the parameters meet the following

standards:

MAS 0.1max width < 15.21

LAS 0.1max width < 6.5

4. Step 4: When all the standard particle parameters meet the standards above, secure the

flow cell lock screws (as shown in Figure 7-27) and secure the protective cover of the

optical system.

Optical System

7-24

Figure 7-27 the secured flow cell

1―――Lock screws of the flow cell

Now, the adjustment of the optical system is finished.

7.3.4 Gain setup After the optical system adjustment, you need to reset the DIFF channel gains. The gain setup

consists of two steps:

Calibration using calibrators

At the count screen, ensure that the WBC background is under 0.1, and then run the calibrator

in the CT-WB-CBC+DIFF mode normally. (If the WBC background exceeds the limit, please

clean the flow cell or do a background check).

After the test, Click the “Optical” in the “Review” menu to enter the “Optical” screen (the

default screen is the DIFF channel calculation screen), and then click “Calculate” to obtain the

calibrator scattergram parameters of the DIFF channel.

Optical System

7-25

Figure 7-28 Optical system output calibrator signal

Enter into the Peak target boxes:

LAS low angle gravity center target

MAS high angle gravity center target

Calculate the gains, enter the gains into the corresponding boxes of the

“Main”→”Setup”→”Gain” screen and save the results according to the prompt on the screen.

After the gain setup, retest the calibrator and 7µm standard particles to verify the gain and

check if the following requirements are met. For the calibrator: the low angel gravity center of

the calibrator should be within ±0.57 from the target; the high angel gravity center within ±0.63

from the target. For the 7um standard particles: the low angel gravity center of the calibrator

should be 18.05±1.37 (16.68, 19.42); high angel gravity center 104.24±3.68 (100.56, 107.92);

low angel width ≤6.50; high angel width ≤15.21. Otherwise, continue calibrating until the

following requirements are met. For the calibrator: the low angel gravity center of the calibrator

should be within ±1.51 from the target; the high angel gravity center within ±2.4 from the target.

For the 7um standard particles: the low angel gravity center of the calibrator should be

18.05±1.37 (16.68, 19.42); high angel gravity center 104.24±3.68 (100.56, 107.92); low angel

width ≤6.50; high angel width ≤15.21.

Sample verification

After the above standard particle gain setup is finished, get several normal fresh blood

samples for test. The scattergram of a normal fresh blood sample should be like the images

shown in Figure 7-29:

Optical System

7-26

Figure 7-29 Scattergram of a normal fresh blood sample

If the WBC scattergram results of the normal fresh blood samples are significantly different

from the figure above, please check whether the reagents, reaction system and the fluidic

system work normally.

Optical System

7-27

7.4 Troubleshooting

7.4.1 Laser spot-deviation The SS and FS gain setup is not changed during the use of the analyzer. Yet the scattergram

is compressed to the left down side, namely, the two signals collecting angle direction turn

smaller, as shown in Figure 7-30. This is mainly because the focusing spot at the flow cell

position move forward or backward, causing the diminishment of laser intensity.

Figure 7-30 Compressed scattergram

Settlement:

Make standard particle fist, and record the peak value position of standard particle. Loose the

laser axial adjustment lock screws (as shown in Figure 7-20). Turn the adjustment screw of

front light assembly counterclockwise for a quarter turn. Make standard particle and see the

peak value position. If the peak value position becomes greater, keep turning the adjustment

screw counterclockwise with 1/8 circle each time till the peak value position becomes smaller,

then turn back with 1/8 circle. If the peak value position becomes smaller, turn the adjustment

screw in the reverse order with the same method. After finding the maximum position of

standard particle, lock the laser axial adjustment fixing screws.

7.4.2 Flow cell clog This is because a big blood clot or impurity blocks the flow cell or sampler inlet, which makes

the sheath flow unable to form. The scattergram is accordingly abnormal and scattered, as

Figure 7-31 shows.

Optical System

7-28

Figure 7-31 Scattered scattergram

Settlement:

Soak with dilute probe cleanser. If it does not work, replace the flow cell assembly.

7.4.3 Dirty flow cell It can be classified into: dirty inner wall and dirty outer surface. Dirty outer surface might due to

the pollution from waste, and dirty inner wall is caused by the pollution of blood clot on the

inner wall of flow cell.

Settlement:

Dirty outer surface: wipe the outer surface gently with dustless cloth soaked in alcohol, and in

the same direction

Dirty inner wall: refer to the cleaning method for the inner wall of liquid flow cell.

8-1

8 Troubleshooting

8.1 Error code and information

Table 8-1 Error code and information

Error Code Error Name Error Code Error Name

0x01000100 Valve output failed 0x01003011 High pressure

0x01000101 Valve No. out of range 0x01003020 WBC volumetric tube filter

clog

0x01000201 Sampling assembly horizontal

motor failed to move to target

position

0x01003021 RBC volumetric tube filter

clog


motor failed to return to home

position after initialization

0x01003030 DIFF reaction bath temp.

error


motor failed to leave home

position after initialization

0x01003031 Temperature out of working

range

0x01000204 Adjusting sampling assembly

horizontal motor to target

position failed

0x01003032 Temperature out of operating

range


horizontal motor to home

position failed

0x01003033 Optical system temp. error


horizontal motor to leave

home position failed

0x01003050 FS blank voltage abnormal


motor adjustment error

0x01003060 HGB blank voltage abnormal


motor adjusting steps out of

limit

0x01003061 Laser diode current abnormal


motor adjusting end position

error

0x01003062 HGB channel error

0x01000211 Sampling assembly vertical 0x01003070 Diluent expired

Troubleshooting

8-2

motor failed to move to target

position

0x01000212 Sampling assembly vertical

motor failed to initialize to

upper position

0x01003071 HGB Lyse expired


motor failed to initialize to

lower position

0x01003072 LEO(I) Lyse expired


vertical motor to target

position failed

0x01003073 LEO(II) Lyse expired


vertical motor to upper

position failed

0x01003074 Cleanser expired


vertical motor to leave upper

position failed

0x01003080 No Diluent


motor adjustment error

0x01003081 No LH lyse


motor adjusting steps out of

limit

0x01003082 No LEO(I) lyse


motor adjusting end position

error

0x01003083 No LEO(II) lyse

0x01000220 Sampling assembly is working 0x01003084 No Cleanser

0x01000221 Cannot adjust sampling

assembly

0x01003085 Waste is full


motor action overtime

0x01003090 Emptying WBC bath failed


motor action forbidden

0x01003091 Emptying RBC bath failed


motor does not match current

position

0x010030A0 Constant current source 55V

voltage abnormal


motor action overtime

0x010030A1 +12V analogue voltage

abnormal


motor action forbidden

0x010030A2 -12V analogue voltage

abnormal

Troubleshooting

8-3


motor mismatch current

position

0x010030A3 Drive board 24V voltage

abnormal


motor failed to pierce to lower

position


abnormal


motor failed to pierce to upper

position


abnormal


motor photocoupler error

0x010030B0 Data board DDR abnormal

0x01000231 Sampling assembly RBC bath

photocoupler error

0x010030B1 Data board FLEXBUS

abnormal

0x01000232 Sampling assembly WBC

bath photocoupler error

0x010030B2 Data board FLASH abnormal

0x01000233 Sampling assembly DIFF bath

photocoupler error.

0x010030B3 Data board AD7908

abnormal

0x01000234 Sample assembly vertical

motor photocoupler error

0x010030B4 Data board AD7928

abnormal

0x01000235 Sampling assembly upper

photocoupler error

0x010030C0 Drive board communication

error

0x01000236 Sampling assembly lower

photocoupler error

0x010030D0 Side door open

0x01000300 Sampling syringe busy 0x010030D1 Optical assembly cover open

0x01000301 Sampling syringe

photocoupler abnormal

0x010030D2 Sample compartment door

open

0x01000302 Sampling syringe failed to

return to home position after

action

0x01004200 Software protocol resolution


leave home position after

action

0x01004201 Response overtime


return to home position before

action

0x01004202 Heartbeat disconnected


leave home position before

action

0x01004401 DIFF data FIFO overflow

0x01000306 Sample syringe aspirate 0x01004402 DIFF data RAM overflow

Troubleshooting

8-4

volume over range

0x01000307 Sample syringe dispense

volume over range

0x01004403 WBC data FIFO overflow

0x01000308 Sample syringe action

overtime

0x01004404 WBC data RAM overflow

0x01000310 Sample injection syringe busy 0x01004405 RBC data FIFO overflow

0x01000311 Sample injection syringe


0x01004406 RBC data RAM overflow


failed to return to home

position after action

0x01004407 PLT data FIFO overflow


failed to leave home position

after action

0x01004408 PLT data RAM overflow



position before action

0x01004409 HGB data FIFO overflow



before action

0x0100440a HGB data RAM overflow


aspirate volume over range

0x01004600 Analyzer communication

disconnected


dispense volume over range

0x01004601 Analyzer network

configuration fail


action overtime

0x01005200 Loading motor busy

0x01000320 Sheath fluid syringe busy 0x01005201 Manipulator pinch motor busy

0x01000321 Sheath fluid syringe


0x01005202 Manipulator pinch motor


0x01000322 Sheath fluid syringe failed to

return to home position after

action



position


leave home position after

action


action forbidden


return to home position before

action


initialization failed

0x01000325 Sheath fluid syringe failed to 0x01005206 Manipulator pinch motor

Troubleshooting

8-5

leave home position before

action

action overtime

0x01000326 Sheath fluid syringe aspirate

volume out of range


failed to leave end position

0x01000327 Sheath fluid syringe dispense

volume out of range


failed to return to end position

0x01000328 Sheath fluid syringe action

overtime


initialization forbidden

0x01000330 Lyse syringe busy 0x01005401 Manipulator elevation motor

busy

0x01000331 Lyse syringe photocoupler

abnormal

0x01005402 Manipulator elevation motor


0x01000332 Lyse syringe failed to return to

home position after action



position

0x01000333 Lyse syringe failed to leave



action forbidden

0x01000334 Lyse syringe failed to return to

home position before action


initialization failed

0x01000335 Lyse syringe failed to leave



action overtime

0x01000336 Lyse syringe aspirate volume

out of range


failed to leave end position

0x01000337 Lyse syringe dispense volume

out of range


failed to return to end position

0x01000338 Lyse syringe action overtime 0x01005500 Manipulator elevation motor

forbid mix motor action

0x01000340 Diluent syringe busy 0x01005501 Mix motor busy

0x01000341 Diluent syringe photocoupler

abnormal

0x01005502 Mix motor failed to leave

home position

0x01000342 Diluent syringe failed to return

to home position after action

0x01005503 Mix motor failed to return to

home position

0x01000343 Diluent syringe failed to leave


0x01005504 Mix motor action forbidden

0x01000344 Diluent syringe failed to return

to home position before action

0x01005505 Mix motor initialization failed

0x01000345 Diluent syringe failed to leave


0x01005506 Mix motor action overtime

0x01000346 Diluent syringe aspirate 0x01005507 Mix motor failed to leave end

Troubleshooting

8-6

volume out of range position

0x01000347 Diluent syringe dispense

volume out of range

0x01005508 Mix motor failed to return to

home position

0x01000348 Diluent syringe action

overtime

0x01005600 Action forbidden when the

mix motor is not at home

position

0x01000401 Optical system setting out of

limit

0x01005601 Mix mechanism busy

0x01000402 DIFF bath temperature setting

out of limit

0x01005602 Mix mechanism initialization

failed

0x01000601 Setting pressure failed 0x01005603 Mix mechanism action

overtime

0x01000602 Setting vacuum setting failed 0x01005604 Mix time setting out of limit

0x01000603 Adjusting pressure chamber

pressure failed

0x01005605 Mix mechanism initialization

failed

0x01000604 Adjusting vacuum chamber

vacuum failed

0x01005606 Mix mechanism current

action forbidden

0x01000605 Pressure test failed 0x01005700 Feeding motor busy

0x01000606 Vacuum test failed 0x01005701 Feeding motor initial position

photocoupler error

0x01000607 Pressure chamber pressure

out of control limit

0x01005702 Feeding position tube rack

error

0x01000608 Vacuum chamber vacuum out

of control limit

0x01005703 Feeding motor end position

photocoupler error

0x01000611 Flow cell clog 0x01005704 Feeding motor photocoupler

error

0x01000701 Driver board FPGA download

symbol error

0x01005705 Feeding motor loading error

0x01000702 Driver board FPGA download

command error

0x01005706 Feeding motor action

overtime

0x01000703 Driver board FPGA load

address out of range

0x01005708 Feeding position switch error

0x01000704 Drive board single data written

out of limit

0x01005801 Autoloader board functional

code error

0x01000705 Drive board data write out of

limit

0x01005802 Autoloader board data length

error

0x01000706 Drive board write forbidden 0x01005803 Autoloader board command

label error

0x01000707 Drive board FPGA write 0x01005804 Autoloader board check code

Troubleshooting

8-7

overtime error

0x01000731 Drive board EEPROM write

error

0x01005805 Autoloader board end code

error

0x01000801 Drive board functional code

error

0x01005806 Autoloader board identity

code error

0x01000802 Drive board data length error 0x01005820 Autoloader board FPGA

download symbol error

0x01000803 Drive board command label

error

0x01005821 Autoloader board FPGA

download command error

0x01000804 Drive board check code error 0x01005822 Autoloader board FPGA load

address out of range

0x01000805 Drive board end code error 0x01005823 Autoloader board single data

write out of limit

0x01000806 Drive board identity code error 0x01005824 Autoloader board data write

out of limit

0x01000807 Sequence pack analysis busy 0x01005825 Autoloader board write

forbidden

0x01000808 No complete sequence pack 0x01005826 Autoloader board write

overtime

0x01000809 Sequence pack head frame

error

0x01005900 Loading motor receive

command error

0x01000810 Sequence pack start analysis

number error

0x01005901 Loading motor initialization

forbidden

0x01000811 Sequence pack total frames

error

0x01005902 Unloading tray full, unloading

forbidden

0x01000812 Sequence pack save error 0x01005903 Loading motor initial position

photocoupler error

0x01000813 Sequence pack end frame

error

0x01005904 Loading motor unloading

position photocoupler error

0x01000814 Sequence pack body frame

error

0x01005905 Unloading position right

photocoupler error

0x01000815 Sequence pack frame order

error

0x01005906 Unloading position left

photocoupler error

0x01000816 Sequence pack execution

overtime

0x01005907 Loading motor not initialized

0x01000817 None-sequence pack analysis

error

0x01005908 Loading motor feeding not at

initial position

0x01002000 Background abnormal 0x01005909 Loading motor unloading not

at initial position

Troubleshooting

8-8

0x01002010 WBC count starts too slow 0x0100590A Loading motor action

overtime

0x01002011 WBC count time too long 0x0100590B Autoloader receive command

error(not in sampling mode)

0x01002020 WBC count starts too fast 0x0100590C Autoloader receive command

error(not in stop status)

0x01002021 WBC count time too short 0x0100590D Autoloader horizontal loading

photocoupler match error

0x01002022 WBC bubbles 0x0100590E Autoloader unloading tubes

out of limit when initialization

0x01002030 RBC count starts slow 0x0100590F Photocoupler blocked after

autoloader initialization

0x01002031 RBC count time too long 0x01005a00 Autoloader board EEPROM

chip error

0x01002040 RBC count starts too fast 0x01005a01 Opening sample

compartment door failed

0x01002041 RBC count time too short 0x01005a02 Autoloader action forbidden

when autoloader is paused

0x01002042 RBC bubbles 0x01005a03 Autoloader adjust forbidden

when autoloader is not at

adjusting status

0x01003000 Low vacuum 0x01005a04 Autoloader adjustment

parameter setting out of

range

0x01003001 High vacuum 0x01005a05 Scanner read error

0x01003010 Low pressure

Troubleshooting

8-9

8.2 Errors indicated by error messages When operating the analyzer, if error(s) is detected, the corresponding error message will be

displayed on the bottom of the screen. In the error message area, the severity levels are

discriminated from high to low by background colors, with red for the highest and green for the

lowest.

Click the error message on the screen and the corresponding help information will pop up. You

can click the "Remove error" button as instructed by the help information to remove the error,

or, remove some errors as instructed by the troubleshooting procedures of this manual.

8.2.1 Pressure errors

Table 8-2 Pressure errors

Error Message Description Possible causes

Setting pressure failed The pressure created in

the specified time can

not meet the

requirement.

Pressure pump abnormal

Tubing connects the pressure chamber

or pressure pump leaks

Pressure filter leaks

Pressure sensor abnormal, immoderate

error

Related detecting circuit abnormal

Setting vacuum setting

failed

The vacuum created in

the specified time can

not meet the

requirement.

Vacuum pump abnormal

Tubing connects the vacuum chamber or

vacuum pump leaks

Vacuum sensor abnormal, immoderate

error

Related detecting circuit abnormal

8.2.2 Reagent errors

Table 8-3 Reagent errors


No Diluent Diluent is used up or the

sensor of the diluent

pick up tube is

connected improperly.

The Diluent is used up.

The sensor of the diluent pick up tube is

connected improperly or damaged and

needs to be replaced.

No LH lyse LH lyse is used up or

excessive bubbles exist

in the LH lyse channel

The LH lyse is used up.

LH lyse channel leaks, leading to

excessive bubbles.

Troubleshooting

8-10

No LEO(I) lyse LEO(I) lyse is used up or


in the LEO(I) lyse

channel

The LEO(I) lyse is used up.

LEO(I) lyse channel leaks, leading to

excessive bubbles.

No LEO(II) lyse LEO(II) lyse is used up

or excessive bubbles

exist in the LEO(II) lyse

channel

The LEO(II) lyse is used up.

LEO(II) lyse channel leaks, leading to

excessive bubbles.

No Cleanser Cleanser is used up or


in the Cleanser channel

The cleanser is used up.

Cleanser channel leaks, leading to

excessive bubbles.

Waste is full The waste container is

full or the sensor

connecting the waste

container is connected

improperly

Waste container is full.

The sensor of the waste pick up tube is

connected improperly or damaged and

needs to be replaced.

Diluent expired Diluent expired Diluent expired

Exp. date setting is wrong

LEO(I) Lyse Expired LEO(I) lyse expired LEO(I) Lyse expired


LEO(II) Lyse expired LEO(II) lyse expired LEO(II) Lyse expired


LH Lyse expired LH lyse expired LH Lyse expired


Cleanser expired Cleanser expired Cleanser expired


8.2.3 Hardware errors Refer to Chapter 5 Hardware System for how to troubleshoot each board.

8.2.4 Measurement errors

Table 8-4 Measurement errors


Background

abnormal

One or more background

results are out of the

specified range

1. Bath, sample probe, probe wipe or

aperture are contaminated.

2. Diluent is expired or contaminated

3. Diluent tubing and back bath tubing

leak, leading to excessive bubbles

Troubleshooting

8-11

4. Bubbles or clog is alarmed during the

background count.

5. Outside interference caused by poor

shielding

LAS background

voltage abnormal

Value is out of the range

of 0-400mv

1. LAS voltage signal is improperly

inducted.

2. Flow cell is contaminated.

3. Related detecting circuit abnormal

HGB background

voltage abnormal

HGB background voltage

is out of the range

[3.2,4.9]V

1. No diluent in the WBC/HGB bath;

HGB light is not turned on.

2. WBC/HGB bath is contaminated.

3. Reagent is expired or contaminated.

4. Improper HGB gain settings

5. HGB light assembly abnormal

6. Related detecting circuit abnormal

RBC clog RBC count time too long

RBC starts too slow

1. Improper settings for reference count

time and start time.

2. The bath is contaminated or the

aperture is clogged by impurity.

3. The photocoupler of the volumetric

tube is damaged.

4. Vacuum abnormal

5. Volumetric-tube-related tubing clogs.

6. Poor connections between the valves

and the driver board.

RBC bubbles RBC count time too short

RBC starts too fast




tube is damaged.

3. Volumetric tube is dirty.

4. Bubbles exist at the tee connector of

the volumetric tube.

5. Fluidic error that leads to the failed

emptying of the volumetric tube.

6. Vacuum abnormal



WBC clog WBC count time too long

WBC starts too slow



2. The bath is contaminated or the

Troubleshooting

8-12

aperture is clogged by impurity.


tube is damaged.

4. Vacuum abnormal

5. Volumetric-tube-related tubing clogs.



WBC bubbles WBC count time too short

WBC starts too fast




tube is damaged.

3. Volumetric tube is dirty.

4. Bubbles exist at the tee connector of

the volumetric tube.

5. Fluidic error that leads to the failed

emptying of the volumetric tube.

6. Vacuum abnormal



8.2.5 Temperature errors

Table 8-5 Temperature errors


Optical system temp.

error

Temperature value read

is out of the range of [30,

40] .℃

The temperature transducer inner the

optical system error

The heater inner the optical system error

DIFF reaction bath

temp. error

Reaction bath abnormal

or reaction bath

temperature transducer

error

The bath temperature is out of the

reference range of 35℃-37 . Please ℃

adjust the temperature to meet the

requirement.

The temperature transducer of reaction

bath is damaged and needs to be

replaced.

Ambient temperature

out of working range

Ambient temperature

abnormal or ambient


error

The ambient temperature is out of the

working range of 15℃-30 . Please ℃


requirement

The ambient temperature transducer is

damaged and needs to be replaced.

Troubleshooting

8-13

Ambient temperature

out of operating range

Ambient temperature

abnormal or ambient


error

The ambient temperature is out of the

operating range of 10℃-40 . Please ℃


requirement

The ambient temperature transducer is

damaged and needs to be replaced.

8.2.6 Scattergram errors

Table 8-6 Scattergram errors


Fuzzy division

between MON and

NEU

Fuzzy division between

MON and NEU occur on

normal samples, which

leads to abnormal or no

MON differential result.

Inaccurate volume of DIFF differential

reagents is added in. LEO(I) should be

1.2ml and LEO(II) should be 0.15ml.

The DIFF bath is contaminated.

Flow cell is dirty.

Reaction bath temperature is out of the

normal range. The reaction is not

thoroughly processed.

LYM too high

For normal samples, the

DIFF scattergram

differentiates but fuzzy

division occur between

LYM and Ghost, which

leads to abnormal or no

LYM differential result.

RBCs are not thoroughly hemolyzed.

Inaccurate volume of DIFF differential

reagents is added in. LEO(I) should be

1.2ml and LEO(II) should be 0.15ml.

The DIFF bath is contaminated.

Reaction bath temperature is out of the

normal range. The reaction is not

thoroughly processed.

Spots scatter all over

the scattergram

Spots obtained from

normal patient samples

are randomly scattered

all over the scattergram.

Sheath flow is not formed. Excessive

bubbles enter the WBC channel. Check

whether the diluent container is empty to

make sure if something is wrong with the

diluent sensor.

Compressed

scattergram

For normal patient

samples, the

scattergrams obtained is

compressed either

evenly or to one side.

Calculate the gain of the analyzer

according to the standard scattergram. If

the newly set gain is normal and the

scattergram differentiates properly

without the compressed problem, then no

further adjustment is necessary.

If the gain setup cannot solve the

Troubleshooting

8-14

problem, refer to the optical system

section in the service manual to remove

the error.

A-1

9 Appendixes

A. Accessories

A.1 Spare parts and assemblies No. Code/Model Name

1 3001-30-68501 Data Board

2 3101-30-68503 Drive Board

3 3101-30-68505 Mother Board

4 3101-30-68507 Liquid Detection Board

5 3101-30-68509 Power Supply Board

6 3101-30-68511 Volumetric Board

7 3101-30-68513 Laser Control Board

8 3101-30-68515 FS Pre-amplify Board

9 3101-30-68517 SS Pre-Amplify Board

10 3101-30-68519 Indicator Board

11 3102-30-69199 Autoloader board

12 0033-30-74615 10ml syringe

13 3100-10-49438 100ul syringe

14 3101-10-69301 250ul syringe

15 M90-100032--- 2.5ml syringe

16 3003-20-34942 2-way valve(Asco)

17 3003-20-34941 3-way valve(Asco)

18 3101-30-68611 Release Valve Assembly

19 M07-00014S-00 Pinch Valve Assembly

20 3101-30-68351 Waste Pump Assembly

21 3001-10-07252 Waste Pump

22 530B-10-05275 Pressure Pump

23 3001-10-07057 Volumetric Tube

24 3100-30-40745 tube rack assembly

25 3101-30-68320 Diff Bath Assembly

26 3102-30-69230 HGB assembly

27 3102-30-69253 WBC bath assembly

Appendixes

A-2

28 3102-30-69223 RBC bath assembly

29 3003-20-53969 RBC Ruby (D70nm)

30 3003-20-53970 WBC Ruby (D100nm)

31 3102-20-69171 Sampling probe

32 3101-30-68756 Diluent Cap Assembly

33 3101-30-68765 LEO (I) Lyse Cap Assembly

34 3101-30-68766 LEO (II) Lyse Cap Assembly

35 3101-30-68767 LH Lyse Cap Assembly

36 3101-30-68768 Cleanser Cap Assembly

37 3101-30-68776 Waste Cap Assembly

38 3006-20-74804 Probe Wipe

39 3003-20-34949 Isolation Chamber

40 3102-20-69165 Pressure Chamber

41 3101-30-68547 Vacuum Chamber

42 3001-10-07054 Air filter

43 2800-21-28878 Syringe Motor Position Sensor Assembly

44 3003-21-34925 Sampling Motor Position Sensor Assembly

45 0030-10-13064 Syringe Motor (100ul 250ul 2.5ml 10ml)

46 BA30-10-15115 Sampling motor

47 0000-10-11272 motor 2.33V 1.8'for sample mixing assembly

48 0000-10-11271 motor 2.1V 1.8'for sample mixing assembly

49 3102-30-69231 autoloader assembly

50 3101-30-68651 Optical System Assembly

51 3100-30-49556 Front Laser Assembly

52 3100-30-49559 Back Laser Assembly

53 3100-30-49560 Splitter Assembly

54 3101-30-68662 Las Stop Assembly

55 3101-30-68663 Mas Stop Assembly

56 3101-30-68664 Las PD Assembly

57 3101-30-68665 Mas PD Assembly

58 3100-30-49568 Flow Cell Assembly

59 3100-10-49436 7um particle (15ml)

60 M90-100031--- Tubing, PTFE, 0.066"X0.098"

61 M90-000026--- Tubing, PTFE,1/32"X1/16", 3000074

62 M90-000025--- Tubing, 1/8"X1/4",R-3603AAC02007, Tygon

Appendixes

A-3

63 M6G-020011--- Tubing, PharMed, 1/16"ODX1/8"ID

64 M6G-020009--- Tubing, 0.031"ID0.156"OD

65 M6G-020007--- Tubing, OD3mm ID1mm EVA

66 M6G-020006--- Tubing, Silicone, 1/16"X3/16", TYGON 3350

67 A21-000007--- Tubing, Silicone,3/32"X7/32"2800392-100

68 3001-10-07069 Tubing,1/16"X1/8",S-50-HLAAX02002,Tygon

69 0040-10-32301 Tubing,PTFE,.040"ID+/-.002"X.066"OD+/-.002”

70 3101-20-68590 Fan of Power Supply Assembly

71 3101-20-68572 Fan of Main Unit

72 M07-00097S--- Switch

73 3001-10-07060 Aspirate key

A.2 Spare pipes No. Code/Model Name

1 0040-10-32301 Tubing.PTFE,.040""ID+/-.00

2 3001-10-07069 Tubing.1/16"X1/8",S-50-HLAAX02002,Tygon

3 A21-000002--- Tubing.Silicone,1/8"X1/4" X100ft,2800546-100

4 M6G-020006--- Tubing.Silicone,1/16""X3/1

5 M6G-020007--- Tubing OD3mm ID1mm EVA

6 M6G-020009--- Tubing. Silicone 0.031""ID

7 M90-000025--- Tubing.1/8""X1/4"",R-3603

A.3 Spare PCBA No. Code/Model Name

1 051-000014-00 Data board (including rootfs) 2 3101-30-68503 Drive board 3 3101-30-68505 Mother board 4 3101-30-68507 Liquid-level board 5 3101-30-68509 Power board 6 3101-30-68511 Volumetric board 7 3101-30-68513 Laser control board 8 3101-30-68515 FS pre-amplification board 9 3101-30-68517 SS pre-amplification board

10 3101-30-68519 Indicator board 11 3102-30-69197 Key board 12 3102-30-69199 Autoloading board

Appendixes

A-4

A.4 Spare cables No. Code/Model Name

1 3100-20-49018 Network cable (for connection between the analyzer and the computer)

2 3100-20-49040 Connecting cable of Micro-switch 3 3101-20-68574 Connecting cable of reagent sensor 4 3101-20-68575 Connecting cable of volumetric board 5 3101-20-68578 Connecting cable of power switch 6 3101-20-68581 Connecting cable of laser control 7 3101-20-68584 SS signal line 8 3101-20-68585 FS signal line 9 3101-20-68589 Connecting cable from switch to power board

10 3101-20-68590 Power box fan and connecting cable 11 3101-20-68591 Outlet earth wire 12 3101-20-68592 Connecting cable of pump 13 3101-21-68588 Connecting cable of AC input 14 3101-21-68593 Connecting cable of laser 15 3102-20-69101 Power cord of the autoloading unit 16 3102-20-69102 Connecting cable of autoloader control 17 3102-20-69104 Wiring harness of the mixing motors 18 3102-20-69105 Connecting cable of DIFF bath 19 3102-20-69106 Connecting cable of the indicator board 20 3102-20-69107 Connecting cable of the switch control 21 3102-20-69108 Connecting cable of the autoloading motors and sensors 22 3102-20-69103 of the autoloading motors and sensors

A.5 Spare connectors No. Code/Model Name

1 3001-10-07066 Tee connector T220/230-1

2 3102-20-69219 Waste tube connector

3 M90-100009--- Connector. Female Luer,Lug,Panel,1/4-28UNF,1/8"ID

4 M90-100010---

Connector. Lock Nut, Panel Mount,1/4-28UNF,Orange

Nylon

5 M90-100012--- Connector. Lock Nut, Panel Mount,1/4-28UNF,White Nylon

6 M90-100013--- Connector. Lock Nut, Panel Mount,1/4-28UNF,Black Nylon

7 M90-100015--- Lock Nut

8 M90-100016--- Connector. Lock Nut, Panel Mount,1/4-28UNF,Blue Nylon

9 M90-100017---

Connector. Male Luer Lock Ring, For MTLP or

LC23,Orange

10 M90-100019--- Connector. Male Luer Lock Ring, For MTLP or LC23,White

11 M90-100020--- Connector. Male Luer Lock Ring, For MTLP or LC23,Black

Appendixes

A-5

12 M90-100021--- Connector. Male Luer Lock Ring, For MTLP or LC23,Red

13 M90-100022--- Connector. Male Luer Lock Ring, For MTLP or LC23,Green

14 M90-100023--- Connector. Male Luer Lock Ring, For MTLP or LC23,Blue

15 M90-100024--- Connector. Male Luer,1/16"Barb,White Nylon,MTL210-1

16 M90-100025--- Connector. Male Luer,1/8"Barb,White Nylon,MTL230-1

17 M90-100028--- Connector.Tee,400Barb,3/32"ID,White Nylon

18 M90-100028-01 Connector. Straight Through,40 0Barb,3/32"ID,White

19 M90-100028-03 Connector.Y,400Barb,3/32"ID,White Nylon

20 M90-100030--- Connector.Y,200Barb,1/8"ID,White Nylon

21 M90-100046--- Connector. Coded Lock Ring, For FTLLB or FTLB, Orange

22 M90-100048--- Connector. Coded Lock Ring, For FTLLB or FTLB, White

23 M90-100049--- Connector. Coded Lock Ring, For FTLLB or FTLB, Black

24 M90-100051--- Connector. Coded Lock Ring, For FTLLB or FTLB, Green

25 M90-100052--- Connector. Coded Lock Ring, For FTLLB or FTLB, Blue

26 M90-100065--- Connector. Tee Reduction,400Barb,1/8"&3/32"ID,White

27 M90-100069--- Connector.Thread,10-32UNF,1/4"Hex,400Barb,3/32"ID

A.6 Consumables No. Name Code/Model Package

Specifications

1 M-53LEO(I)

Lyse(Chinese/4L) A11-000105--- 4LX1

2 M-53LEO(I)

Lyse(Chinese/1LX4) A11-000113--- 1LX4

3 M-53LEO(I)

Lyse(English/1LX4) A11-000128--- 1LX4

4 M-53LEO(I)

Lyse(English/4L) A11-000129--- 4LX1

5 M-53LEO(II)

Lyse(Chinese/200mlX4)A11-000114--- 200mLX4

6 M-53LEO(II)


7 M-53LEO(II)

Lyse(English/200mlX4) A11-000130--- 200mLX4

8 M-53LEO(II)


9 M-53LH


Appendixes

A-6

10 M-53LH

Lyse(Chinese/1LX4) A11-000117--- 1LX4

11 M-53LH


12 M-53LH

Lyse(English/1LX4) A11-000133--- 1LX4

13 M-53

Cleanser(Chinese/1LX4)A11-000118--- 1LX4

14 M-53

Cleanser(English/1LX4) A11-000134--- 1LX4

15 M-53D

Diluent(domestic/20L) A12-000140--- 20LX1

16 M-53D

Diluent(export/20L) A12-000167--- 20LX1

17 M-50P Probe Cleanser

（domestic/50mL） A12-000151---

50mLX1

18 M-50P Probe Cleanser

（export/50mL） A12-000178---

50mLX1

B-1

B. List of Wearing Parts

No. Code/Model Name

1 3001-10-07054 Air Filter

2 3003-20-34941 Tee valve ASCO458284

3 3003-20-34942 Two-way valve ASCO458283

4 3006-20-74804 Probe Wipe

5 M07-00014S-00 VAL S305 07-Z030H 12VDC

6 M07-00076F--- FUSE Slow-Blow

7 M07-00077F--- FUSE Slow-Blow 125V 5A

8 M07-00079F--- FUSE Slow-Blow 125V 7A

9 M08-000789--- PHOTOELEC switch

10 M6G-020011--- Tubing.PharMed,1/16""ODX1/

C-1

C. Fluidic diagram

D-1

D. Pump and Valve Function Table

D1. Valve Function Table

No. Function Two

way/Tee

V01 Provides fluid for the sample probe; V01 opens, the waste discharging

path of the diluent syringe connects the sample probe. 3

V02 Provides fluid for the probe wipe; V02 opens, the waste discharging

path of the diluent syringe connects the inlet of the probe wipe. 3

V03 Aspirating/discharging switch of diluent syringe 3

V04 Cleans the interior of the sample probe; V04 opens, the sample probe

connects the sheath fluid syringe. 2

V05 Aspirating/discharging switch of LEO (I) lyse 3

V06 Aspirating/discharging switch of LEO (II) lyse 3

V07 Aspirating/discharging switch of LH lyse 3

V08 Provides fluid for RBC bath; V08 opens, the waste discharging path of

the diluent syringe connects the fluidic line of RBC bath 3

V09 Opens and closes the pressure chamber and the waste outlet of the

DIFF bath; bubbles the DIFF bath 2

V10 Opens and closes the path between the vacuum chamber and the

pressure chamber 2

V11 Opens and closes the pressure chamber and the isolation chamber t of

the RBC bath; bubbles the RBC bath 2

V12 Opens and closes the pressure chamber and the isolation chamber t of

the WBC bath; bubbles the WBC bath 2

V13 Together with V33 and V29 to control the cleaning of the WBC back

bath 2

V14 Together with V34 and V30 to control the cleaning of the RBC back bath 2

V15 Controls the aspiration of the cleanser 3

V21 Opens and closes the sheath fluid syringe and the sample dispensation

syringe; assists the sheath fluid dispensing the sample 2

V22 Opens and closes the sheath fluid syringe and DIFF bath; cleans DIFF

bath 2

V23 Aspirating/discharging switch of sheath fluid syringe 3

V24 Opens and closes the sheath fluid syringe and flow cell; dispenses

sheath fluid 2

V25 Empties the WBC volumetric tube 2

Appendixes

D-2

V26 Empties the RBC volumetric tube 2

V27 Controls the waste discharging of the probe wipe 2

V28 Controls the waste discharging of the flow cell 2

V29 Controls the cleaning of the WBC back bath 3

V30 Controls the cleaning of the RBC back bath 3

V31 Empties the WBC volumetric tube 3

V32 Empties the RBC volumetric tube 3

V33 Controls the WBC counting 2

V34 Controls the RBC counting 2

V35 Controls the draining of the RBC bath 2

V36 Controls the draining of the WBC bath 2

V37 Controls the draining of the vacuum chamber 2

V38 Controls the draining of the DIFF bath 2

V39 Controls the preparation of the DIFF sample 2

D2. Pump function table Name Function

P1 Creates pressure in the pressure chamber, which is used to bubble and flash

the aperture

P2

Discharges the waste of the DIFF bath; empties and creates vacuum in the

vacuum chamber to drive the counting by impedance method, clean the back

bath and drain the volumetric tube.

P3 Discharges the waste of the WBC bath, RBC bath and probe wipe

D3. Syringe function table Name Function

Diluent syringe Dispenses diluent into the WBC bath and RBC bath; cleans the sample

probe and dispenses fluid for the probe wipe

Sheath syringe Prepares samples; forms sheath fluid; cleans the DIFF bath and the

sample preparation tubing

Aspiration

syringe

Aspirates and dispenses samples

Sample syringe Dispenses the sample into the flow cell

Lyse-Syringe Aspirates and dispenses the LEO (I) Lyse, LEO (II) Lyse and LH Lyse

E-1

E. Tubing

E1. Components

F-1

F. Method to identify cross network cable and direct-connected network cable

F.1. Identify cross network cable 1. With the metal contactors’ side up, mark the 8 lines in the connector from left to right with 1-8.

Accordingly, the colors of the lines are: white and orange, orange, white and green, blue, white

and blue, green, white and brown, and brown.

Connector of the network cable

2. Define one end of the cable to be A randomly. Then, the other end is B. way to connect the

end A and B is shown in the Figure below.

End A and End B

End A：white and green, green, white and orange, blue, white and blue, orange, white and

brown, and brown （ 1 and 3 is exchanged; 2 and 6 is exchanged）

End B：white and orange, orange, white and green, blue, white and blue, green, white and

brown, and brown

F.2. Identify direct-connected network cable 1. With the metal contactors’ side up, mark the 8 lines in the connector from left to right with 1-8.

Accordingly, the colors of the lines are: white and orange, orange, white and green, blue, white

and blue, green, white and brown, and brown.

Appendixes

F-2

Connector of the direct-connected network cable

2. Define one end of the cable to be A randomly. Then, the other end is B. way to connect the

end A and B is shown in the Figure below.

End A and End B of the direct-connected network cable

End A：white and orange, orange, white and green, blue, white and blue, green, white and

brown, and brown

End B：white and orange, orange, white and green, blue, white and blue, green, white and

brown, and brown

P/N: 046-000142-00(V1.0)

Documents

BC-5380 Service Manual.pdf